+ All Categories
Home > Documents > LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B - Pavilion … Pine Village/Plans... · LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING...

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B - Pavilion … Pine Village/Plans... · LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING...

Date post: 30-Aug-2018
Category:
Upload: dangphuc
View: 220 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
442
LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 441 Lone Pine Blvd. The Dalles, Oregon 48 Unit Multi-Family Housing on the Columbia River PROJECT MANUAL Issued for Permit October 12, 2011 Submitted by: 919 NW Bond St. #216 Bend, OR 97701 p: 541-647-5675 f: 541-749-2464
Transcript

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B

441 Lone Pine Blvd. The Dalles, Oregon

48 Unit Multi-Family Housing on the Columbia River

PROJECT MANUAL

Issued for Permit

October 12, 2011

Submitted by: !

! 919 NW Bond St. #216! Bend, OR 97701! p: 541-647-5675! f: 541-749-2464

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 3132 Geotechnical Data00 4100 Bid Form00 4300 Bid Form Supplements00 7200 General Conditions00 7300 Supplementary Conditions

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 1100 Summary of Work 01 2500 Substitution Procedures 01 2519 Substitution Request Form 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination 01 3216 Construction Progress Schedules 01 3233 Photographic Documentation 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 3546 Indoor Air Quality Management 01 4000 Quality Requirements 01 4523 Testing and Inspection Services 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 5800 Project Identification 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 7123 Field Engineering 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 01 7419 Construction Waste Management 01 7700 Closeout Procedures

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

Not used

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 5413 Gypsum Concrete Underlayment

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

04 0513 Masonry Mortaring 04 0516 Masonry Grouting 04 2000 Unit Masonry

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 0100

DIVISION 05 - METALS

05 1200 Structural Steel Framing 05 5000 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

06 1000 Rough Carpentry 06 1100 Framing and Sheathing 06 1643 Gypsum Sheathing 06 1733 Wood I-Joists 06 1753 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 06 1800 Glued-Laminated Construction 06 4000 Architectural Wood Trim 06 4100 Architectural Wood Casework

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 1800 Traffic Coatings 07 1900 Water Repellents 07 2113 Board Insulation 07 2115 Batt Insulation 07 2600 Vapor Retarders 07 2800 Weather Barriers 07 4213 Metal Wall Panels 07 4646 Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding 07 5400 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 6100 Sheet Metal Roofing 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 8400 Firestopping 07 9200 Joint Sealers

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 2100 Hollow Core Interior Doors 08 2200 Fiberglass Entry Doors 08 3613 Sectional Doors 08 5300 Vinyl Windows and Patio Doors 08 7100 Door Hardware 08 8000 Glazing

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 2200 Metal Support Assemblies 09 2615 Veneer Plastering 09 2900 Gypsum Board 09 3000 Tiling

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 0100

09 6270 Laminate Flooring 09 6816 Sheet Carpeting 09 9100 Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 1429 Dimensional Letters 10 2813 Toilet Accessories 10 4413 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10 5500 Postal Specialties

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 3100 Appliances

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 2113 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 2116 Vertical Louver Blinds 12 9300 Site Furnishings

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Not used

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 2100 Electric Traction Passenger Elevators

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 0000 Basic Fire Protection Requirements 21 0500 Fire Protection Basic Materials and Methods

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

To Be Determined

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 0500 HVAC Materials and Methods 23 0590 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 0700 Mechanical Insulation 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping System 23 3000 Air Distribution 23 3400 HVAC Fans 23 8000 Terminal HVAC Equipment

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 0100

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 0519 Low-Voltage Power Conductors and Cables 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 0534 Conduit 26 0537 Boxes 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 2416 Panelboards 26 2701 Wall Mounted Group Metering Equipment 26 2717 Equipment Wiring 26 2726 Wiring Devices 26 2813 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 26 2818 Enclosed Switches 26 5100 Lighting DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 1005 Low-Voltage Cabling Pathways

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

See General Notes on Civil Drawings

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 1313 Concrete Paving 32 1400 Unit Paving 32 8400 Irrigation (01120 - Irrigation Systems) 32 9300 Planting (01040 - Planting) See General Notes on Civil Drawings

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

See General Notes on Civil Drawings

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 0100

DOCUMENT 00 3132

GEOTECHNICAL DATA

1.1 INVESTIGATION

A. Geotechnical investigations were conducted at the site, the results of which can be found in the report issued by RhinoOne Geotechnical, Report No. ICO-2010-001, dated November 15, 2010.

B. A copy of the report is available in electronic format from the Architect.

1.2 INTERPRETATION

A. The report is provided only for bidder's information and convenience and is not part of the Contract Documents. Owner and Architect do not warrant the accuracy or extent of the report or locations of the test borings.

B. The report is based upon the assumption that uniform variation exists in soil properties between borings. Interpretation of the report is bidder's responsibil-ity. Owner and Architect will not be responsible for interpretation of report by bidders.

C. Bidders are urged to examine the report and the site.

D. Additional soil borings or other exploratory operations may be made by bid-ders at no additional cost to Owner, provided such operations are approved by Owner in advance.

E. Refer to Conditions of the Contract for additional information.

END OF DOCUMENT

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 3132

DOCUMENT 00 4100

BID FORM

DATE , 20____

PROJECT Lone Pine Village - Building B Apartments

PROPOSAL OF hereinafter called "Bidder", a (corporation) (partnership) (sole proprietorship) (Bidder strike out inapplicable terms)

TO Key Development (hereinafter called "Owner")

The undersigned, in compliance with your Advertisement for Bids, submits the following Bid.

1.1 REPRESENTATIONS

A. Bidder will accept the provisions of the Bidding Documents.

B. Bidder will enter into and execute a contract with the Owner within 15 days after notification of the acceptance of this Bid.

C. Bidder will accomplish the Work in accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by Ambient Architecture LLC.

1.2 TIME OF COMPLETION

A. Bidder will achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the following calendar days after a Notice to Proceed is issued:

Days (_______________)

1.3 BID AMOUNTS

A. Base Bid Amount: Bidder proposes to construct this project for the [stipulated sum] [guaranteed maximum cost] of:

Dollars (_______________)

B. Contractor’s Fee: Bidder proposes to construct this project for a fee (the amount of which is included in the guaranteed maximum cost stated above) of:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 4100

Dollars (_______________)

1.4 ADDENDA

A. Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:

No. ________ Dated ____________________, 20____

No. ________ Dated ____________________, 20____

No. ________ Dated ____________________, 20____

No. ________ Dated ____________________, 20____

No. ________ Dated ____________________, 20____

Respectfully Submitted,

Firm Name By

Street Address Signature

City, State and Zip Code Title

Telephone

Corporations: Affix Corporate Seal

State in which incorporated

END OF DOCUMENT

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 4100

DOCUMENT 00 4300

BID FORM SUPPLEMENTS

DATE , 20____

PROJECT Lone Pine Village - Building B Apartments

SUPPLEMENT TOPROPOSAL OF

TO Key Development (hereinafter called "Owner")

The undersigned, in compliance with your Advertisement for Bids, submits the Supple-ments to the Bid Form listed below. The information provided shall be considered as an integral part of the Bid Form previously submitted.

These Appendices are as follows:

1. Proposed Subcontractors: Includes the names of Subcontractors and the portions of the Work they will perform.

2. Base Bid Amount Breakdown: Identifies the cost breakdown of the previously sub-mitted Base Bid amount into the portions of the Work requested.

Respectfully submitted,

Firm Name

Name of Officer

Signature of Officer

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 4300

PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS

Bidder proposes to use the following Subcontractors for the portions of the Work indi-cated.

SPECIFICATIONSECTION SUBCONTRACTOR

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 4300

BASE BID AMOUNT BREAKDOWN

The following is a breakdown of the Base Bid Amount into amounts attributable to the portions of the Work indicated. Contractor’s overhead and profit shall be included as a separate line item.

ITEM OF WORK VALUE

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

TOTAL (BASE BID AMOUNT) $

END OF DOCUMENT

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 4300

DOCUMENT 00 7200

GENERAL CONDITIONS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Related Documents:1. Document 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions.2. Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.2 DOCUMENT

A. American Institute of Architects (AIA) Document A201-2007, General Condi-tions of the Contract for Construction, forms a part of this Contract and by reference is incorporated herein as fully as if repeated at length.

END OF DOCUMENT

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 7200

DOCUMENT 00 7300

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Related Documents:1. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions.2. Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.2 GENERAL

A. The following supplements modify, delete from, or add to the General Condi-tions referenced above.

B. Where provisions of the General Conditions are modified, unaltered provisions remain in effect.

1.3 SUPPLEMENTS

A. Article 1 - General Provisions:

1. Add Subparagraph 1.1.9:

1.1.8 The term "product" includes materials, systems, and equip-ment.

2. Add Subparagraph 1.1.10:

1.1.9 The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placement or similar requirements.

3. Add Subparagraph 1.1.11:

1.1.10 The term "install" means to unload, unpack, assemble, erect, place, finish, protect, adjust, and clean, or similar requirements.

4. Add Subparagraph 1.1.12:

1.1.11 The term "provide" means to furnish and install.

B. Article 8 - Time:

Include the following if liquidated damages are to be included. Edit to suit project re-quirements.

1. Add Subparagraph 8.2.4:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 7300

8.2.4 The Owner will suffer financial loss if Substantially Completion has not been reached on or before the established date. The Con-tractor shall be liable for and shall pay to the Owner the sum of $[____] as fixed and agreed liquidated damages for each day of delay until the project is Substantially Complete.

C. Article 9 - Payments and Completion:

1. Add Subparagraph 9.6.8:

9.6.8 Until [final payment,] [Substantial Completion,] the Owner will retain [5] [10] [__] percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. [Upon Substantial Completion re-tainage will be reduced to [5] [__] percent.]

D. Article 10 - Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Add Paragraph 10.3.7:

10.3.7 The Contractor shall not knowingly use any materials con-taining asbestos or other known hazardous materials in the Work.

Edit the following to include required limits for Contractor’s Liability Insurance.

E. Article 11 - Insurance and Bonds:

1. In Subparagraph 11.1.1, following the word "located", add "and against whom the Owner has no reasonable objection."

2. Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 11.1.3: "The form of the Certificate of Insurance shall be [ACORD Form 25S] [acceptable to the Owner.]”

3. Add Subparagraph 11.1.5:

11.1.5 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of cover-age and be on a comprehensive basis including:

.1 Premises-Operations including X, C and U coverages as appli-cable.

.2 Independent Contractors' Protective. .3 Products and Completed Operations. .4 Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. .5 Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's ob-

ligation under Paragraph 3.18. .6 Owned, non owned and hired motor vehicles. .7 Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Opera-

tions."

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 7300

4. Add Subparagraph 11.1.6:

11.1.6 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be writ-ten for not less than the [following limits] [limits proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Owner] or those required by law, whichever is greater [and shall include the following coverages as a minimum]:

.1 Worker's Compensation:(a) State: Statutory.(b) Applicable Federal: Statutory.(c) Employer's Liability: $[____] per accident; $[____] per dis-

ease, Policy Limit; $[____] per disease, each employee. .2 Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability including

Premises-Operations; Independent Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage:

(a) Bodily Injury: $[____] each occurrence; $[____] aggre-gate.

(b) Property Damage: $[____] each occurrence; $[____] ag-gregate.

(c) Products and Completed Operations shall be main-tained for [1 year] [2 years] after final payment. [Provide evidence of coverage on annual basis.]

(d) Property Damage Liability: Include X, C and U coverage. (e) Broad Form Property Damage shall include Completed

Operations. .3 Contractual Liability: (a) Bodily Injury: $[____] each occurrence; $[____] aggre-

gate. (b) Property Damage: $[____] each occurrence; $[____] ag-

gregate. .4 Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted: $[____]

aggregate. .5 Business Automobile Liability including owned, non owned

and hired vehicles: (a) Bodily Injury: $[____] each person; $[____] each occur-

rence. (b) Property Damage: $[____] each occurrence. .6 If General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial

Liability policy, the: (a) General Aggregate shall be not less than $[____] and it

shall apply, in total, to this policy only. (b) Fire Damage Limit shall be not less than $[____] on any

one Fire. (c) Medical Expense Limit shall be not less than $[____] on

any one person. .7 Umbrella Excess Liability: (a) $[____] over primary insurance.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 7300

(b) $[____] retention for self insured hazards each occur-rence.

.8 Aircraft Liability, owned and non owned, when Aircraft are used in the performance of the Contract: $[____].

.9 Watercraft Liability, owned and non owned, when Watercraft are used in the performance of the Contract: $[____].

Include the following for Performance and Payment Bonds.

6. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1; substitute the following:

11.4.1 Furnish to Owner performance bond and labor and material payment bond, each equal to the amount of the Contract Sum, with approved surety, covering faithful performance of Contract and payment of obligations incurred in performance of Contract and also for use and benefit of parties who may become entitled to liens under the Contract according to provisions of laws of the State in which the project is located. The form of the bonds shall be acceptable to Owner.

.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Owner-Contractor Agreement, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished.

.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

F. Article 13 - Miscellaneous Provisions:

1. Add Paragraph 13.8:

13.8 Equal Opportunity

13.8.1 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. The [Contractor] [Con-struction Manager] shall take affirmative action to ensure that ap-plicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, or na-tional origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the fol-lowing: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The [Contractor] [Construction Manager] agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and appli-

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 7300

cants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of nondis-crimination.

13.8.2 The Contractor and Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for em-ployment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, or national origin.]

G. Article 15 - Claims and Disputes:

1. Add Paragraph 15.1.5.3:

15.1.5.3 Extensions of time because of inclement weather will be granted only for the following conditions at the site:

.1 Precipitation, defined as 0.4 inch or more of rain, snow, or ice, exceeds the mean for that month as published by the Na-tional Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration for the closest reporting station to the Project.

.2 Freezing weather, defined as a high daytime temperature of 25 degrees F or below, exceeds the mean for that month as published by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Admin-istration for the closest reporting station to the Project.

.3 Sustained winds exceeding 35 MPH..4 Standing snow of 4 inches or more.

.5 Claims shall be in whole or half day increments. If both pre-cipitation and freezing weather exceed the norm for any given day, only one day will be counted.

END OF DOCUMENT

Lone Pine Village - Building B 00 7300

SECTION 01 1100

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Project description.2. Work by Others.3. Work sequence.4. Owner occupancy.5. Future work.6. Contractor’s use of site and premises.7. Owner furnished Products.

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this Project is described as [the construction of a new four story facility entitled Lone Pine Village Building B apartments, located at 441 Lone Pine Blvd, The Dalles, Oregon.

B. Work includes site construction, general construction, and mechanical and electrical work.

C. The Project will be constructed under a prime contract.

1.3 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. The Owner will occupy the site and premises during the entire period of con-struction for conduct of normal operations.

B. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner’s op-erations.

C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Limit use of site and premises to allow for: 1. Work by separate contractors.2. Work by Owner.3. Owner occupancy.4. Use of site and adjacent premises by the public.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 1100

B. Move any stored products under Contractor’s control that interfere with the operations of the Owner or separate contractors.

C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract stored on site.

D. Obtain and pay for use of any additional storage or work areas needed for operations.

E. Coordinate use of site and premises with the Owner:1. Employee parking: In designated areas.2. Access to site: In designated areas.3. Storage and staging areas: In designated areas.4. Transport materials and equipment to and from construction area along

routes approved by Owner.

F. Conform to Building Rules and Regulations.

G. Confine operations to construction area unless otherwise approved by Owner.

H. If access to adjacent common or occupied spaces is required:1. Schedule operations with Owner in advance.2. Perform work after normal business hours or on weekends when directed

by Owner.

I. Do not interrupt building fire or life safety systems.

J. Do not close or obstruct exits.

K. Do not use or store hazardous or flammable materials on premises without Owner’s approval; follow requirements of governing authorities having juris-diction over the work.

L. Prohibit smoking within interior spaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 1100

SECTION 01 2500

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Product Substitution Procedures.

1.2 GENERAL

A. Definition: Proposal by Contractor to use manufacturer, product, material, or system different from one required in Contract Documents.

B. Do not substitute Products unless a substitution request has been approved by Architect.

C. Substitutions during Bidding: Refer to Instructions to Bidders.

D. Architect will consider substitution requests within 30 days after award of Con-tract. After initial 30 day period, substitutions requests will be considered only due to non-availability of a specified Product through no fault of Contractor.

E. In case of non-availability of a specified Product notify Architect in writing as soon as non-availability becomes apparent.

1.3 SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS

A. Submit substitution requests on copy of form bound into Project Manual.

B. Document specified product and proposed substitution with complete data, including:1. Product identification, including name and address of manufacturer.2. Product description, performance and test data, and reference stan-

dards.3. Sample, if requested.4. Description of any anticipated effect that acceptance of proposed

substitution will have on Progress Schedule, construction methods, or other items of Work.

5. Description of any differences between specified product and pro-posed substitution.

6. Difference in cost between specified product and proposed substitution.

C. Burden of proof for substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Document requirements remains with Contractor.

D. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2500

1. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified Product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subse-quently become apparent.

5. Will reimburse Owner for design services associated with re-approval by authorities or revisions to Contract Documents to accommodate the substitution.

E. Substitutions will not be considered if:1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or other submittals with-

out submittal of a substitution request.2. Approval will require substantial revision of Contract Documents without

additional compensation to Architect.

F. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

G. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of each Substitution Request.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2500

DOCUMENT 01 2519

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

DATE: _________________________________

TO:

ATTENTION:

PROJECT:

We submit for your consideration the following product as a substitution for the speci-fied product:

Section No. Paragraph Specified Product

__________ __________ __________________________________________________

Proposed Substitution:

Reason for Substitution:

Product Data:

Attach complete technical data for both the specified product and the proposed substitution. Include information on changes to Contract Documents that the pro-posed substitution will require for its proper installation.

Samples:

___ Attached ___ Will be furnished upon request

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2519

Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings?

___ No ___ Yes (explain)

Effects of proposed substitution on other Work:

Differences between proposed substitution and specified Product:

Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed substitution are:

___ Same ___ Different (explain)

Maintenance service and spare parts are available for proposed substitution from:

Previous installations where proposed substitution may be seen:

Project: Project:

Owner: Owner:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2519

Architect: Architect:

Date Installed: Date Installed:

Cost savings to be realized by Owner, if proposed substitution is approved:

Change to Contract Time, if proposed substitution is approved:

___ No Change ___ Add ________ days ___ Deduct ________ days

Submittal constitutes a representation that Contractor has read and agrees to the pro-visions of Section 01 2500.

Submitted by Contractor:

Signature

Firm

For Use by Architect:

Based on the information supplied by the Contractor, the Architect has reviewed the proposed substitution on the basis of design concept of the Work and confor-mance with information given in Contract Documents.

___ Approved ___ Approved as Noted ___ Rejected

Submit Additional Information:

By: Date:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2519

SECTION 01 2600

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Supplemental Instructions.2. Proposal Requests.3. Contractor proposed changes.4. Construction Change Directives.5. Change Orders.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

1.2 CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. Architect's Supplemental Instructions:1. Format: AIA Document G710 - Architect's Supplemental Instructions.2. Architect will advise of minor changes in Work not involving an adjust-

ment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Proposal Requests:1. Format: AIA Document G709 - Proposal Request.2. Architect may issue a Proposal Request that includes a detailed descrip-

tion of a proposed change with supplemental or revised Drawings and specifications.

3. Prepare and submit an estimate of any change to Contract Sum or Contract Time within 7 days after receipt. Include:a. Quantities and unit costs, with total cost or credit to Owner. If re-

quested, furnish documentation of quantities.b. Taxes, delivery charges, equipment rentals, and trade discounts as

applicable.c. If change in Contract Time is involved, provide updated Progress

Schedule.4. Do not stop work or initiate changes in response to a Proposal Request. If

approved, Architect will prepare and issue a Change Order.5. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

C. Contractor Proposed Changes:1. Format: Contractor’s standard.2. Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to

Architect.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2600

3. Describe proposed change, reason for change, its full effect on Work, and any change to Contract Sum or Contract Time. Include:a. Quantities and unit costs, with total cost or credit to Owner. If re-

quested, furnish documentation of quantities.b. Taxes, delivery charges, equipment rentals, and trade discounts as

applicable.c. If change in Contract Time is involved, provide updated Progress

Schedule.4. Document any required substitutions in accordance with Section

01 6000.5. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

D. Construction Change Directive:1. Architect may issue a directive, signed by Owner, instructing Contractor

to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 2. Documentation will describe changes in Work and designate method of

determining any change to Contract Sum or Contract Time. Promptly execute change.

E. Change Orders:1. Format: AIA Document G701 - Change Order.2. Execution: Architect will issue Change Orders for signature of parties as

provided in Conditions of the Contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2600

SECTION 01 2900

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Schedule of Values.2. Applications for Payment.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. General:1. Submit a Schedule of Values to Architect at least 20 days prior to submit-

ting first Application for Payment.2. Upon request of Architect, furnish additional data to support values

given that will substantiate their correctness.3. Approved Schedule of Values will be used as basis for reviewing Con-

tractor’s Applications for Payment.

B. Form and Content:1. Format: AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet of Application and

Certification for Payment. 2. Use Table of Contents of Project Manual as basis of format for listing

costs of Work.3. List installed value of component parts of Work in sufficient detail to

serve as basis for computing values for progress payments.4. Include separate line items for:

a. Site mobilization.b. Bonds and insurance.c. Contractor’s overhead and profit.

5. For items on which payment will be requested for stored materials, break down value into:a. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded.b. Total installed value.

6. For each line item that has a value of more than $25,000.00, break down costs to list major products or operations under each item.

7. Total of costs listed in Schedule shall equal Contract Sum.

C. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

D. Review and Resubmittal:1. After initial review by Architect, revise and resubmit if required.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2900

2. Revise and resubmit along with next Application for Payment when a Change Order is issued. List each Change Order as a new line item.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Preparation:1. Format: AIA Document G702 - Application and Certification for Pay-

ment, supported by AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet.2. Prepare required information in typewritten format or on electronic me-

dia printout.3. Use data from reviewed Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in

each column for each line item representing portion of work performed.4. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing

Change Order number and dollar value.5. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01 7700.

B. Waivers of Lien:1. Along with the each Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien

from Contractor and each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor in-cluded on the current month's Application for Payment.

2. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, prior to de-duction of retainage.

3. For completed items, submit full or final waiver.

C. Substantiating Data:1. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying

dollar amounts in question.2. Provide one copy of data with cover letter showing Application number

and date, and line item number and description.

D. Submittal:1. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, of each Application

for Payment.2. Payment period: Submit at intervals stipulated in Owner/ Contractor

Agreement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 2900

SECTION 01 3100

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Project coordination.2. Coordination drawings.3. Project meetings.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 7700 - Contract Closeout.

1.2 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Submit required project submittals electronically in Adobe PDF format, if pos-sible.

B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of various Sections of specifica-tions to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdepend-ent construction elements.

C. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical items that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. 1. Follow routing shown as closely as practical; place runs parallel with

building lines.2. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,

for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coor-dinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in prepa-ration for Substantial Completion.

G. After Owner occupancy, coordinate access to site for correction of defec-tive Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.3 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3100

A. Coordination Drawings: 1. Prior to commencement of Work, prepare coordination drawings to de-

fine relationship of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical components with beams, columns, ceilings and walls.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details required to define rela-tionships between components.

3. Prepare drawings at 1/4 inch = 1'-0" scale for general layout and 3/8 inch = 1'-0" for plans and sections in congested areas including equip-ment spaces.

4. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

B. Hold coordination meetings with trades providing mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical work.

C. Resolve conflicts between trades, prepare composite coordination drawings and obtain signatures on original composite coordination Drawings.

D. When conflicts cannot be resolved:1. Cease work in areas of conflict and request clarification prior to pro-

ceeding.2. Prepare drawings to define and to indicate proposed solution.3. Submit drawings for approval when actual measurements and analysis

of Drawings and Project Manual indicate that various systems cannot be installed without significant deviation from intent of Contract Docu-ments.

E. Submit original composite coordination drawings as part of Project Record Documents specified in Section 01 7700.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer preconstruction conference, progress meetings, and pre-installation conferences as required.

B. Make physical arrangements for meetings; notify involved parties at least 5 days in advance.

C. Record significant proceedings and decisions at each meeting; reproduce and distribute copies to parties in attendance and others affected by pro-ceedings and decisions made.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed at project field of-fice or at central site convenient to all parties.

B. Attendance:1. Contractor.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3100

2. Owner.3. Architect and principal consultants, as needed.4. Major subcontractors and suppliers as Contractor deems appropriate.

C. Review and Discuss:1. Relation and coordination of various parties, and responsible personnel

for each party.2. Use of premises, including office and storage areas, temporary controls,

and security procedures.3. Construction schedule and critical work sequencing.4. Processing of:

a. Contract modifications.b. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.c. Applications for Payment.d. Substitutions.e. Other required submittals.

5. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.6. Procedures for maintaining contract closeout submittals.7. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.8. Notification procedures and extent of testing and inspection services.

1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule bimonthly progress meetings.

B. Location: Contractor’s project field office.

C. Attendance:1. Contractor.2. Owner.3. Architect and consultants as appropriate to agenda.4. Subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate to agenda.5. Others as appropriate to agenda.

D. Review and Discuss:1. Work progress since previous meeting, including:

a. Field observations, deficiencies, conflicts, and problems.b. Progress and completion date.c. Corrective measures needed to maintain quality standards, pro-

gress, and completion date.2. Status of:

a. Requests for information.b. Submittals.c. Contract modifications.

3. Coordination between various elements of Work.4. Maintenance of Project Record Documents.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3100

A. Where required in individual specification Section, convene a pre-installation conference at project site or other designated location.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting or affected by work of the specific Section.

C. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3100

SECTION 01 3216

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Construction progress schedule.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work.2. Section 01 2900 - Payment Procedures.

1.2 FORMAT

A. Prepare Progress Schedule as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.

B. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work.

C. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches.

1.3 CONTENT

A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for begin-ning and completion of each element of construction.

B. Identify each item by specification Section number.

C. Identify work of separate floors and other logically grouped activities.

D. Provide subschedules to define critical portions of the entire Progress Sched-ule.

E. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total per-centage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month.

F. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, including:1. Dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. 2. Decision dates for selection of finishes.3. Delivery dates for Owner furnished products.

G. Coordinate content with Schedule of Values specified in Section 01 2900.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3216

H. Revisions:1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected

completion date of each activity.2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in

scope, and other identifiable changes.

I. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Progress Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.

1.4 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit initial Progress Schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Pro-ceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 10 days.

B. Submit revised Progress Schedule with each Application for Payment.

C. Submit one copy in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

1.5 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of approved Progress Schedule to project site file, Subcon-tractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by pro-jections indicated in Progress Schedule.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3216

SECTION 01 3233

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Construction photographs.

1.2 PHOTOGRAPHY

B. Provide photographs taken each month just prior to date for each scheduled Application for Payment.

C. Photograph project from four different views at each specified time; views as directed by Architect.

D. After interior finish work is commenced, take four additional photographs of interior; views as directed by Architect.

E. At successive periods of photography, take photographs from same overall view as previously taken.

F. Utilize digital technology at minimum 1280 x 960 capture resolution.

G. Provide factual presentation.

H. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion.

1.3 DIGITAL FILES

A. Index digital files in chronological sequence.

B. Identify each view by listing:1. Name of Project.2. Orientation of view.3. Date taken.

1.5 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit digital files along with Project Record Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3233

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3233

SECTION 01 3300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Submittal procedures.2. Proposed Products list.3. Submittal schedule.4. Shop Drawings.5. Product Data.6. Samples.7. Quality control submittals.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Number each submittal with Project Manual section number and a sequen-tial number within each section. Number resubmittals with original number and an alphabetic suffix.

B. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier, pertinent Drawing sheet and detail numbers, and specification Section number, as appropriate.

C. Submit all submittals listed under “Submittals for Review” simultaneously for each Product or Specification Section.

D. Where multiple Products function as an assembly, group submittals for all re-lated Products into single submittal.

E. Architect will not review incomplete submittals.

F. Apply Contractor’s stamp, signed or initialed certifying that:1. Submittal was reviewed.2. Products, field dimensions, and adjacent construction have been veri-

fied.3. Information has been coordinated with requirements of Work and Con-

tract Documents.

G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordi-nate submittal of related items.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3300

H. For each submittal, allow 14 days for Architect’s review, excluding delivery time to and from Contractor.

I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.

J. Revise and resubmit submittals when required; identify all changes made since previous submittal.

K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties and to Project Record Documents file. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.

1.3 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit a complete list of ma-jor products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.

C. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit a submittal schedule showing all submittals proposed for project, including submittals listed as:1. Submittals for Review.2. Quality Control Submittals.3. Closeout Submittals.

B. Include for each submittal:1. Specification section number.2. Description of submittal.3. Type of submittal.4. Anticipated submittal date.5. For submittals requiring Architect’s review, date reviewed submittal will

be required from Architect.

C. Submit one copy, electronically in Adobe PDF format.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Present information in clear and thorough manner.

B. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers or room number shown on Drawings.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3300

C. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible. Architect will return one copy to Contractor for printing and distribution.

1.6 PRODUCT DATA

A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.

B. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.

C. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible. Architect will return one copy to Contractor for printing and distribution.

1.7 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Prod-ucts, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submit-tals for interfacing work.

B. Where so indicated, submit samples of finishes from the full range of manu-facturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection.

C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

D. Unless otherwise specified in individual specifications, submit two of each sample.

E. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of samples, or of se-lection of color, texture, or pattern if full range is submitted.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS

A. Quality control submittals specified in Section 01 4000 are for information and do not require Architect’s responsive action except to require resubmission of incomplete or incorrect information.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3300

SECTION 01 3546

INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan.2. During construction:

a. Protection of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.b. Reducing emissions through source control.c. Pathway interruption.d. Housekeeping.e. Scheduling.

3. Before occupancy: Flush-out.

3.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) (www.ashrae.org) 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size.

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Manufacturer’s Association International (SMACNA) (www.smacna.org) - IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction.

3.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan:1. Submit Indoor Air Quality Management Plan for review within 14 days

after date of Notice to Proceed. Include:a. Procedures for implementing requirements of SMACNA IAQ Guide-

line.b. Substitution procedures for products that are responsibility of Con-

tractor and proposed source control implementation measures to minimize building contamination.

c. Construction sequencing and storage plans for protection of stored on-site or installed absorptive materials against moisture absorption and contamination.

d. Filter media change schedule and Product Data for filters including MERV ratings.

2. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.3. If required, revise and resubmit plan within ten days after receipt of

comments.4. Distribute copies of approved Indoor Air Quality Management Plan to

concerned parties.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3546

3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Review and discuss Indoor Air Quality Management Plan implementation and progress at Preconstruction Conference and Progress Meetings.

3.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Designate specific storage areas to facilitate protection of stored absorptive materials.

B. Clearly identify storage area. Keep clean and orderly; prevent contamination of materials.

C. Monitor storage areas for contamination; correct problems and implement preventative measures.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Provide training of indoor air quality management methods to be used at appropriate stages of Project.

B. Require participation of all subcontractors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION - DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Meet or exceed SMACNA minimum requirements for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system protection, source control, pathway interruption, housekeeping, and scheduling.

B. Protect stored on-site or installed absorptive materials from moisture damage and volatile organic compound contamination through construction se-quencing and proper storage.

C. If air handlers are used during construction, use filtration media with Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 per ASHRAE 52.2.

D. Replace filtration media just prior to occupancy.

E. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning System Protection:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3546

1. Keep duct systems including supply air, return air, and exhaust air and associated equipment including air handlers, variable air volume boxes, silencers, fans, and filter boxes, clean and uncontaminated.

2. Seal taps and open ends not actively being worked on with plastic and tape.

3. Provide 1 inch polyester filter media over return and exhaust air inlets during construction and until Substantial Completion.

4. Ensure that temporary and permanent filters are in place and openings are closed before running fans.

F. Source Control: 1. For temporary and ancillary materials used in construction, follow re-

quirements of similar products to minimize indoor air quality impacts. 2. Use nontoxic formulations and implement other control measures to

minimize building contamination.

G. Pathway Interruption: Isolate areas where work is being performed to prevent contamination of clean and occupied spaces.

H. Housekeeping:1. Implement cleaning activities concentrating on heating, ventilating,

and air conditioning systems and building space to remove contami-nants prior to occupancy.

2. Protect materials from weather and store in clean area prior to unpack-ing..

3. Clean coils, air filters, and fans before performing testing and balancing.4. Provide temporary walkoff mats at entry points to construction areas;

replace or clean daily.

I. Scheduling:1. Sequence construction activities to reduce absorption of and volatile

organic compounds by materials. 2. Complete applications of wet and odorous materials before installing

absorptive materials.

3.2 IMPLEMENTATION - BEFORE OCCUPANCY

A. After completion of construction, prior to Owner occupancy, and after com-pletion of interior finishes, perform building flush-out:1. Supply total air volume of 14,000 CF of outdoor air per square foot of

floor area.2. Maintain minimum interior temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum

relative humidity of 60 percent during flush-out.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 3546

SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. References.2. Quality assurance and control of installation.3. Mockups.4. Manufacturer's field services and reports.5. Design data and calculations.6. Test reports and certifications.7. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to association, trade, or industry standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, re-quest clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Conform to edition of reference standard in effect as of date of Project Manual.

D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any ref-erence document.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in se-quence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 4000

E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified qual-ity.

F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.

1.4 MOCKUPS

A. Definition:1. Mockups are field samples constructed, applied, or assembled at the

project site for review by the Owner and Architect that illustrate materi-als, equipment, or workmanship.

2. Approved mockups establish the standard of quality by which the Work will be judged.

B. Construct, apply, or assemble specified items, with related attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Perform work in accordance with applicable specifications sections.

D. Erect at project site at location acceptable to Architect. Protect from dam-age.

E. Removal:1. Mockups may remain as part of the Work only when so designated in

individual specification sections.2. Do not remove mockups until removal is approved by Architect or upon

Final Completion.3. Where mockup is not permitted to remain as part of the Work, clear

area after removal of mockup has been approved by Architect.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Prod-uct suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, or startup of equipment, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when nec-essary.

B. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

C. Submit report to Architect within 10 days of observation.

1.6 DESIGN DATA AND CALCULATIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Prod-uct suppliers or manufacturers to provide design data and calculations.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 4000

B. Accuracy of design data and calculations is the responsibility of the Contrac-tor.

C. When so specified, prepare design data and calculations under the direction of a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the Project is located. Affix engineer’s seal to submittals.

D. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

1.7 TEST REPORTS AND CERTIFICATIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Prod-uct suppliers or manufacturers to provide test reports and manufacturers’ cer-tifications.

B. Indicate that material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified require-ments. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as ap-propriate.

C. Submittals may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect.

D. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that Products be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:1. Submit manufacturer's most recent printed instructions for delivery, stor-

age, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, as applica-ble.a. Submit in quantities specified for Product Data. b. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special

attention, and special environmental criteria required for applica-tion or installation.

c. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and require-ments of Contract Documents.

2. Perform installation of Products to comply with requirements of manu-facturer's instructions.

3. If installation cannot be performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, notify Architect and await instructions.

4. Submit one copy, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 4000

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 4000

SECTION 01 4523

TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Laboratory selection and payment.2. Laboratory duties.3. Contractor’s responsibilities.

B. Related Sections: Individual specifications sections contain specific tests and inspections to be performed.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org): 1. C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Con-

crete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

2. D3666 - Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials.

3. D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies En-gaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engi-neering Design and Construction.

4. E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction In-spection and/or Testing.

5. E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Include the following two paragraphs if the Owner will pay for the testing laboratory.

A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified testing and inspection.

B. [Contractor] shall cooperate with the Testing Laboratory to facilitate per-formance of its work.

C. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract for provisions related to special in-spections and testing.

D. Qualifications of Laboratory:1. Meet requirements of ASTM [C1077] [D3666] [D3740] [E329] [and] [E543].2. Authorized to operate in State in which project is located.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 4523

1.4 LABORATORY DUTIES

A. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice.

B. Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and meth-ods of construction:1. Comply with specified standards.2. Ascertain compliance or noncompliance of materials with requirements

of Contract Documents.

C. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or defi-ciencies of Work or products.

D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; submit one copy each to Owner and Architect, and two copies to Contractor, in electronic Adobe PDF format, if possible.

E. Each report to include:1. Date issued.2. Project title and number.3. Testing Laboratory name, address, and telephone number.4. Name of Inspector and signature of individual in charge.5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.6. Record of temperature and weather conditions.7. Date of test.8. Identification of product and specification section.9. Location of sample or test in project.10. Type of inspection or test.11. Results of tests and compliance or noncompliance with Contract

Documents.12. Interpretation of test results when requested by Architect or Contractor.

F. Perform additional tests when required by Architect or Contractor.G. Laboratory is not authorized to:

1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Docu-ments.

2. Approve or accept any portion of work.3. Perform any duties of Contractor.

1.5 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with Laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and to manu-facturer's operations.

B. When materials require testing prior to being incorporated into Work, secure and deliver to Laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 4523

C. Furnish copies of product test reports as required.

D. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:1. To provide access to work to be tested.2. To obtain and handle samples at site or at source of product to be

tested.3. To facilitate inspections and tests.4. For safe storage and curing of test samples.

E. Notify Laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for Laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.

F. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for Laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Con-tractor’s negligence.

G. Make arrangements with Laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor’s convenience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 4523

SECTION 01 5000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Temporary utilities.2. Field offices and sheds.3. Temporary controls.4. Protection of installed Work.5. Progress cleaning.6. Water, erosion, sediment, dust, and mold and mildew control.7. Access roads and parking areas.8. Removal.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Green Seal, Inc. (GS) 37 - Environmental Standard for Industrial and Institu-tional Cleaners.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Provide temporary electrical service of capacity and characteristics required for construction.

B. Existing electrical system may not be used during construction. Provide sepa-rate temporary electric service.

C. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and dis-tribution boxes located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required.

D. Maintain distribution system and provide routine repairs.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. Provide temporary lighting for construction and security purposes.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 5000

B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

C. Maintain lamps and provide routine repairs.

D. Provide portable lights when required to provide minimum lighting levels nec-essary for specific work.

3.3 TEMPORARY HEAT

A. Provide temporary heating devices required to maintain specified ambient temperatures for construction.

3.4 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to facilitate curing of materials, disperse humidity, and prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

B. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction.

3.5 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE, FACSIMILE, AND COMPUTER SERVICES

A. Contractor shall be accessible during normal business hours via mobile tele-phone with voice mail or an answering service.

B. Provide temporary telephone service required during construction.

C. Provide plain paper facsimile machine in Contractor’s field office [on sepa-rate telephone line from Contractor’s field telephone.

D. Provide computer in Contractor’s field office with printer, Internet access, scanner, and email service.

3.6 TEMPORARY WATER

A. Provide temporary water required for construction.

B. Extend branch piping and provide temporary hoses so that water is available at locations needed for work.

C. Protect from freezing.

D. Maintain distribution system and provide routine repairs.

3.7 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide chemical toilets for use during construction.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 5000

3.8 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. Provide temporary field offices and storage sheds required for construction.

B. Do not unreasonably encumber site or premises with excess materials or equipment.

C. Temporary Structures:1. Portable or mobile buildings, structurally sound, weathertight, with floors

raised above ground.2. Temperature transmission resistance: Compatible with occupancy and

storage requirements.3. Provide connections for utility services when required.4. Provide steps and landings at entrances.

D. Field Office:1. Size required for Contractor’s use and to provide space for project

meetings.2. Adequate electrical power, lighting, heating, and cooling to maintain

human comfort.3. Provide facilities for storage of Project Record Documents.4. Provide thermometer mounted at convenient outside location, not in

direct sunlight.

3.9 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect adjacent properties from construction operations.

B. Provide barricades required by governing authorities for public right-of-ways.

C. Fencing: 1. Provide temporary fencing for construction operations.2. Construction: Contractor’s option.3. Height: 6 feet.4. Locate as shown on Drawings, and to protect construction operations,

materials, and equipment.]5. Provide vehicular and pedestrian gates.

D. Tree and Plant Protection:1. Protect adjacent existing trees and plants at site that are designated to

remain.2. Provide temporary barriers to height of 6 feet around individual or

groups of trees and plants.3. Do not permit vehicular traffic, parking, storage of materials, dumping of

harmful chemicals or liquids, or standing or continuously running water within root zones.

4. Supervise earthwork operations to prevent damage to root zones.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 5000

5. Replace trees and plants that are damaged or destroyed due to con-struction operations.

3.10 EXTERIOR CLOSURES

A. Provide temporary weathertight closures for exterior openings to provide ac-ceptable interior working conditions, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of ambient temperatures required in individual specification sections, to protect the Work, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.

B. Provide access doors with locking hardware.

3.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from construction operations; provide special protec-tion when required in individual specification sections.

B. Minimize traffic, storage, and construction activities on roof surfaces. If traffic, storage, or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from roofing manufacturer.

C. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

3.12 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free from waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in clean and orderly condition.

B. Provide containers for collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish; re-move and dispose of off site as required by construction activities.

C. Periodically clean interior areas to provide suitable conditions for finish work.

3.13 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Water Control:1. Grade site to drain. Prevent puddling water.2. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain

pumping equipment.3. Provide water barriers to protect site from soil erosion.

B. Erosion and Sediment Control:1. Plan and execute methods to control surface drainage from cuts, fills,

borrow areas, and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimen-tation.

2. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at any one time.3. Provide temporary measures such as silt fences, dikes, berms, settlement

basins, and drainage systems to prevent water flow and sedimentation.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 5000

4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect erosion and sedimentation; promptly employ corrective measures.

C. Dust Control:1. Provide dust control materials and methods to minimize dust from con-

struction operations.2. Prevent dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

D. Mold and Mildew Control:1. Provide continuous measures to prevent formation of mold and mildew

in construction.2. Do not install materials sensitive to mold and mildew growth until protec-

tion can be provided.3. Promptly remove and replace materials exhibiting mold and mildew

growth.

3.15 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS

A. Existing roads designated by Owner may be used for construction purposes. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas.

B. Provide for access by emergency vehicles.

C. Keep fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and acces-sible for use.

D. Provide parking facilities for construction personnel. When parking needs ex-ceed on site capacity, provide additional off site facilities.

E. Maintain existing construction, and restore to original or specified condition at completion of Work.

3.16 REMOVAL

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, and services when construc-tion needs can be met by use of permanent construction or upon comple-tion of Project.

B. Remove foundations and underground installations; grade site as indicated.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

D. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to original or to speci-fied condition.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 5000

SECTION 01 5800

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Project identification sign.2. Maintenance and removal.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Project Sign:1. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 MPH wind velocity.2. Sign Painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum 3

years.3. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chip-

ping for duration of construction.

B. Do not erect other signs at site without Owner’s approval, except those re-quired by governing authorities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structure and Framing: New lumber, structurally adequate.

B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, nominally 3/4 inch thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints.

C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized steel or aluminum.

D. Paints: Latex type, exterior quality, semigloss sheen.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Provide one sign signs [of construction, design, and content shown on Draw-ings.1. Area: 32 square feet.2. Bottom edge of sign: 6 feet above ground.3. Content:

a. Project title.b. Owner’s name.c. Name and title of Architect.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 5800

d. Name of Contractor.4. Graphic design, colors, and lettering style: As designated by Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date of Notice to Pro-ceed.

B. Erect at designated location.

C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings.

D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.

E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.

3.2 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage.

3.3 REMOVAL

A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 5800

SECTION 01 6000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Products.2. Transportation and handling.3. Storage and protection.4. Product options.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures.

1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Provide interchangeable components by the same manufacturer for identi-cal items.

B. Do not use products containing asbestos or other known hazardous materials.

1.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate delivery of Products to prevent conflict with Work and adverse conditions at site.

B. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instruc-tions.

C. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with requirements of Contract Documents, are undamaged, and quantities are correct.

D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent damage.

1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with manufacturer's seals and labels intact and legible.

B. Store Products on site unless prior written approval to store off site has been obtained from Owner.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 6000

C. Store Products subject to damage by elements in weathertight enclosures. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Exterior Storage:1. Store fabricated Products above ground; prevent soiling and staining. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings;

provide ventilation to prevent condensation.3. Store loose granular materials in well drained area on solid surfaces; pre-

vent mixing with foreign matter.

E. Arrange storage areas to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect stored products to verify that products are undamaged and in acceptable condition.

1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products specified by reference standard only: 1. Select any Product meeting the specified standard.2. Submit Product Data to substantiate compliance of proposed Product

with specified requirements.

B. Products specified by naming two or more acceptable Products: Select any named Product.

C. Products specified by stating that the Contract Documents are based on a Product by a single manufacturer followed by the statement "Equivalent products by the following manufacturers are acceptable": 1. Select the specified Product or a Product by a named manufacturer

having equivalent or superior characteristics to the specified Product and meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. If the specified Product is not selected, submit Product Data to substan-tiate compliance of proposed Product with specified requirements.

3. The specified Product establishes the required standard of quality.

D. Products specified by naming one or more Products followed by "or ap-proved substitute" or similar statement: 1. Submit a substitution request under provisions of Section 01 2500 for

Products not listed.2. The specified Product establishes the required standard of quality.

E. Products specified by naming one or more Products or manufacturers fol-lowed by the statement "Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01": 1. Submit a substitution request under provisions of Section 01 2500 for

Products not listed.2. The specified Product establishes the required standard of quality.

F. Products specified by naming one Product followed by the statement "Substi-tutions: Not permitted": Substitutions will not be allowed.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 6000

G. Products specified by required performance or attributes, without naming a manufacturer or Product:1. Select any Product meeting specified requirements. 2. Submit Product Data to substantiate compliance of proposed Product

with specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 6000

SECTION 01 7123

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Survey and field engineering.2. Submittals.3. Records.

B. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for Project:1. Survey work required in execution of Work.2. Other professional engineering services specified or required to execute

Contractor’s construction methods.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Surveyor: Qualified land surveyor, licensed in State of Oregon.

B. Engineer: Registered professional engineer of discipline required for specific service on Project. Licensed in State of Oregon.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work upon Ar-chitect's request.

B. Submit certification that elevations and locations of improvements are in con-formance with Contract Documents.

1.4 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

A. Existing horizontal and vertical control points for project are those designated on Drawings.

B. Locate, verify, and protect control points prior to beginning Work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.

1.5 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to sur-vey control points. Record locations on Project Record Documents.

B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation:1. Site improvements:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7123

a. Stakes for grading, fill, and topsoil placement.b. Utility slopes and invert elevations.

2. Building foundation and column locations, floor elevations, and other controlling dimensions.

3. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades.

C. Verify property corners, easements, building setbacks, and horizontal control dimensions with information contained in Contract Documents.

D. Promptly notify Architect of any errors or discrepancies noted; await instruc-tions prior to proceeding with Work.

1.6 RECORDS

A. Maintain accurate log of control and survey work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7123

SECTION 01 7329

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of work.

B. Related sections:1. Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit request in advance of executing cutting or alteration that affects:1. Structural integrity of project.2. Integrity or effectiveness of weather exposed or moisture resistant ele-

ments or systems.3. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational ele-

ments.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

B. Include in Request:1. Identification of project.2. Description of work affected.3. Necessity for cutting or patching.4. Effect of cutting or patching on structural, weatherproof, or visual integ-

rity of project.5. Description of proposed work:

a. Scope of cutting and patching.b. Subcontractor and trades to execute work.c. Products proposed to be used.d. Extent of refinishing.

6. Alternate to cutting and patching.7. Cost proposal, if applicable.

C. If conditions of work or schedule necessitate a change of material from that originally installed, submit substitution request in accordance with Section 01 2500.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7329

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching.

B. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of new prod-ucts or performance of work.

C. Provide protection for other portions of project.

D. Provide protection from elements.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Execute cutting to include excavating, fitting, and patching of Work required to:1. Make several parts fit properly.2. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill timed work.3. Remove and replace defective work.4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract

Documents.5. Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of

piping and electrical conduit.

B. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances, and finishes.

C. Execute cutting and demolition by methods that will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work.

D. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods that will prevent damage to other Work, and will prevent settlement.

E. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for:1. Weather exposed or moisture resistant elements.2. Sight exposed finished surfaces.

F. Restore work that has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish:1. Continuous surfaces: To nearest intersections.2. Assembly: Refinish entirely.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7329

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7329

SECTION 01 7419

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Construction waste management goals, plan, and records.

1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS

A. Reuse, salvage, or recycle non-hazardous waste materials.

B. Minimize waste sent to landfills and incinerators.

C. Prioritize non-hazardous construction waste management in following order:1. Reduce amount of waste generated.2. Reuse material through on-site reuse or off-site salvaging, including sale

or donation.3. Recycle material including diverting materials for secondary uses when-

ever economically feasible.4. Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit at land-

fill.

1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Pro-actively manage construction [and demolition] waste:1. Practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and installing

products.2. Use all reasonable means to divert construction [and demolition] waste

from landfills and incinerators, and to facilitate recycling and reuse.3. Return unused products and overages to supplier, or donate to non-

profit group.4. Carefully install products; avoid removal of ill-timed and poorly installed

products.5. Use centralized cutting areas to facilitate waste collection.6. Deliver, store, and handle products to prevent damage.

B. Require subcontractors and suppliers to participate in waste management efforts.

C. Construction waste includes:

1. Products from demolition and removal, excluding excavated soil and land-clearing debris.

2. Excess and unusable construction products.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7419

3. Packaging materials for construction products.4. Other materials generated during construction process but not incorpo-

rated into the Work.

D. Give consideration to:1. Availability of viable recycling markets.2. Condition of materials.3. Ability to provide material in suitable condition and in quantities ac-

ceptable to available markets.4. Time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates.

E. Be responsible for implementation of special programs involving rebates and similar incentives related to recycling of waste.

F. Revenues and other savings obtained for salvage and recycling accrue to Contractor.

G. Ensure that firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse, and disposal have le-gal permits for intended uses.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan:1. Submit waste management plan within ten days after Notice to Pro-

ceed and prior to initiating site preparation. 2. Include:

a. Name of individual on Contractor’s staff responsible for waste pre-vention and management.

b. Actions proposed to reduce solid waste generation and achieve waste management goal.

c. Description of proposed methods for recycling and reuse of mate-rials generated, including areas and equipment for processing, sorting, and temporary storage.

d. Estimated types and quantities of waste to be generated.e. Name of landfills and incinerators to be used.f. Identification of local and regional reuse programs that will accept

waste materials.g. List of waste materials to be salvaged for resale, salvaged and re-

used, or recycled. Identify recycling facilities to be used.h. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled or reused, with

justification.3. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format.4. If required, revise and resubmit plan within ten days after receipt of

comments.5. Distribute copies of approved Waste Management Plan to concerned

parties.6. Update Waste Management Plan periodically through duration of Pro-

ject to reflect changed conditions.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7419

B. Sustainable Design Record Documents:1. Maintain records to document:

a. Quantities of waste generated, in tons or cubic yards.b. Types and quantities of materials diverted through sale, reuse, or

recycling, in tons or cubic yards, and diversion location.c. Quantities of waste sent to landfill or incinerator, in tons or cubic

yards.2. Submit summary of waste disposal and diversion to date along with

each Application for Payment.3. Submit hauling receipts or certificates for diverted and recycled materi-

als including material description, hauler name and location, and quan-tity (by weight) of diverted and recycled materials.

4. Deliver final summary of solid waste disposal and diversion to Architect upon completion of project.

5. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Review and discuss waste management plan implementation and progress at Preconstruction Conference and Progress Meetings.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Designate separate areas to facilitate separation of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse and return.

B. Clearly identify areas and receptacles.

C. Keep storage areas and receptacles clean and orderly; prevent contamina-tion of materials.

D. Monitor storage areas; correct problems and implement preventative meas-ures.

1.7 TRAINING

A. Provide training of waste management methods to be used at appropriate stages of Project.

B. Require participation of all subcontractors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 WASTE COLLECTION

A. Provide containers and storage areas to facilitate waste management, clearly identified.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7419

B. Handle recyclable materials to prevent contamination by incompatible products and materials.

C. Separate materials by:1. Placing into marked separate containers, then transporting to recycling

facility.2. Placing into single container, then transporting to recycling facility for

separation.

3.2 DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of nonhazardous waste materials that cannot be reused, recycled, or salvaged at licensed landfill or incinerator.

B. Handle, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes in accordance with applica-ble codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7419

SECTION 01 7700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Closeout procedures.2. Final cleaning.3. Adjusting.4. Project record documents.5. Operation and maintenance data.6. Warranties.7. Spare parts and maintenance materials.8. Starting of systems.9. Demonstration and instructions.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 01 1100 - Summary of Work.

1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Final Inspection:1. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been re-

viewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accor-dance with the Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspec-tion.

2. If Architect performs reinspection due to failure of Work to comply with claims of status of completion made by Contractor, Owner will compen-sate Architect for such additional services and will deduct the amount of such compensation from final payment to Contractor.

B. Submit final Application for Payment showing original Contract Sum, adjust-ments, previous payments , retainage withheld from previous payments, and sum remaining due.

C. Closeout Submittals:1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.2. Certificate of Occupancy.3. Project Record Documents.4. Operation and Maintenance Data.5. Warranties.6. Keys and keying schedule.7. Spare parts and maintenance materials.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7700

8. Evidence of payment of Subcontractors and suppliers.9. Final lien waiver.10. Certificate of insurance for products and completed operations.11. Consent of Surety to final payment.12. Sustainable Design Submittals.

1.3 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

B. Clean surfaces exposed to view:1. Clean glass.2. Remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances.3. Polish transparent and glossy surfaces.4. Vacuum carpeted surfaces; damp mop hard surface flooring.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.

D. Clean or replace filters of operating equipment.

E. Clean debris from roofs and drainage systems.

F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.

1.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain following record documents on site; record actual revisions to the Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.6. Material Safety Data Sheets.

B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

D. Make entries neatly and accurately.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7700

E. Label each set or volume with title "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS", project title, and description of contents.1. Organize contents according to Project Manual table of contents.2. Provide table of contents for each volume.

F. Drawings: Mark each item to record actual construction including:1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Drawings.

G. Specifications: Mark each Product section description of actual Products in-stalled, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

H. Shop Drawings: Mark each item to record actual construction including:1. Field changes of dimension and detail.2. Details not on original Shop Drawings.

I. Material Safety Data Sheets:1. Maintain copies of manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for each

Product incorporated into the Work.2. Indicate manufacturer name, product name, chemical composition,

hazards, and safety and health procedures.

J. [Submit [one copy.] [[____] copies.] [Submit electronically in Adobe PDF for-mat.]

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Identify as "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and title of pro-ject.

B. Contents: 1. Directory: List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,

[Contractor,] [Construction Manager,] Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Operation and maintenance instructions: Arranged by system and sub-divided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:a. Significant design criteria.b. List of equipment.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7700

c. Parts list for each component.d. Operating instructions.e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recom-

mended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Project documents and certificates including:a. Shop drawings and product data.b. Air and water balance reports.c. Certificates.d. Copies of warranties and bonds.

C. Submittal:1. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format at least 15 days prior to final

inspection. 2. Architect will notify Contractor of any required revisions after final in-

spection.3. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.4. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format within 10 days after final in-

spection.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manu-facturers.

B. Include Table of Contents.

C. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format along with final Application for Payment.

D. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of accep-tance as start of warranty period.

1.8 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.

B. Deliver to Project site in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

1.9 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

A. Notify Owner and Architect at least seven days prior to startup of each sys-tem or piece of equipment.

B. Prior to beginning startup verify that:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7700

1. Lubrication has been performed.2. Drive rotation, belt tension, control sequences, tests, meter readings,

and electrical characteristics are within manufacturer's requirements.3. Utility connections and support components are complete and tested.

C. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representa-tive or Contractor’s personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

D. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to startup, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

E. Submit written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion.

B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstra-tion for other season within six months.

C. Utilize Operation and Maintenance Manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

D. Demonstrate startup, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servic-ing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed upon times, at equipment location.

E. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 01 7700

SECTION 03 2000

CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Reinforcing bars, wire fabric, and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Division 01: Quality Control, for special inspection and independent test ing requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) (www.aci-int.org) 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Reinforce-

ment, Plain, for Concrete.2. A615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.3. A767 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement.

C. American Welding Society (AWS) (www.aws.org) D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) (www.crsi.org):1. Manual of Practice.2. Publication 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars.3. Publication 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Speci-

fications and Nomenclature.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings:

a. Include bar sizes, spacings, laps, locations, and quantities of rein-forcing bars, wire fabric, and accessories.

b. Provide bending and cutting schedules.c. Show complete layout plan for each layer of reinforcing.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 2000

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver reinforcing to project site in bundles marked with tags indicating bar size, length, and mark.

B. Store reinforcing above ground in dry, well drained area; protect from corro-sion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. ASTM A615/A615M, deformed billet steel, Grade 60, as indicated on

Drawings. 2. Finish: Plain or Galvanized if required as noted on the drawings in accor-

dance with ASTM A767, Class I.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. ASTM A185/A185M. Furnish in flat sheets.2. Finish: Plain.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Spacers, Chairs, Bolsters, and Bar Supports:1. Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during con-

crete placement.2. Galvanized or plastic coated steel for surfaces exposed to weather.

B. Tie Wire: Double annealed steel, minimum 16 gage, in accordance with ASTM A185.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in accordance with ACI 301 and CRSI Manual.

B. Bend bars cold; do not heat or bend by makeshift methods. Discard dam-aged bars. Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 for bending dimension.

C. Welding: AWS D1.4.

D. Fabrication Tolerances:1. Sheared length: Plus or minus 1 inch.2. Bends in stirrups and ties: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.3. All other bends: Plus or minus 1 inch.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 2000

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before placing in work, thoroughly clean reinforcing of loose rust, mill scale, dirt, oil, and other materials that could reduce bonding.

B. Inspect reinforcing left protruding for future bonding or following delay in work, and clean if necessary.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install reinforcing in accordance with ACI 301, and CRSI Manual and Publica-tions 63 and 65.

B. Accurately position reinforcing; securely tie at intersections. Stagger splices 36 inches minimum at alternate bars.

C. Welding: AWS D1.4. Install welded wire fabric in long lengths, lapping edges at least one mesh plus two inches, unless otherwise noted.

D. Install wire fabric reinforcing in longest practical lengths. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous lap.

E. Set wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

F. Minimum Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 318, Chap-ter 7, Paragraph 7.7 and as noted on the Structural drawings.

G. Notify Architect of items interfering, such as conduit, pipes, inserts, sleeves, etc., and obtain approval on procedure before placement of concrete.

H. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder.

I. Locate splices not indicated on Drawings at points of minimum stress.

J. Clean and re-protect galvanized surfaces cut or damaged during installa-tion.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 2000

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Cast-in-place concrete for foundations, footings, paving, slabs on

grade, and structural frame.2. Equipment pads.3. Bases for lighting fixtures.

4. Finishing concrete slabs and formed surfaces.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Division 01: Quality Control, for special inspection and independent test-

ing requirements. 3. Division 07: Waterproofing, for preparation requirements for concrete-

substrates to receive waterproofing. 4. Division 07: Vapor Retarders5. Division 32: Concrete Paving, for exterior paving not associated with

building concrete work.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) (www.aci-int.org):1. 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.2. 302.1 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.2. 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.3. 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.4. 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.5. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C31 - Standard Test Method for Method of Making and Curing Concrete

Test Specimens in the Field.2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.3. C39 - Standard Test Method for Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.4. C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.5. C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.6. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.7. C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.8. C172 - Standard Test Method for Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed

Concrete.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

9. C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.

10. C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review for each Mix Design:1. Concrete Mix Designs to include:

a. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and water.b. Combined aggregate gradation.c. Aggregate specific gravities and gradations.d. Water/cement ratio, design strength, slump, and air content.e. Type of cement and aggregates.f. Air dry density and split cylinder ratio for lightweight concrete.g. Type and proportion of admixtures.h. Special requirements for pumping.i. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is

valid.j. Special characteristics of mix requiring precautions in mixing, plac-

ing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Concrete Mix Design: In accordance with ACI 301, Method 1 or 2.

B. Concrete Mix Design: Free from admixtures and additives not specifically ap-proved by manufacturer. Provide concrete for 28-day compressive strengths as noted on structural drawings.

C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this Section.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready mixed in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Schedule delivery so that pours will not be interrupted for over 15 minutes.

C. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cold Weather Placement - Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low tem-peratures. Comply with ACI 306R and following requirements:1. Air temperature at or expected to fall below 40 degrees F, uniformly

heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

temperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 de-grees F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing anti-freeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

B. Hot Weather Placement - Place concrete in accordance with ACI 305R and following requirements:1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at

time of placement below 90 degrees F. Use chilled mixing water or chopped ice if water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water.

2. If required, cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap so that steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed.

4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high tem-peratures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Concrete Chemicals:1. Burke by Edoco. (www.burkebyedeco.com)2. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing. (www.conspecmkt.com)3. Dayton/Richmond. (www.daytonrichmond.com)4. BASF Admixtures, Inc. (www.masterbuilders.com)5. W. R. Meadows, Inc. (www.wrmeadows.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or III, gray color.

B. Aggregates:1. Fine: ASTM C33, clean, hard, durable, uncoated natural sand, free from

silt, loam, and clay.2. Coarse: ASTM C33, clean, hard, durable, uncoated crushed stone,

maximum size No. 467, Table No. 2. C. Water: ASTM C94, potable, clean, free of oils, acids and organic material.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

2.3 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms:

1. Wood, metal, glass fiber, or other approved material that will not ad-versely affect surface of concrete and will provide or facilitate obtaining specified surface finish.

2. Wood:a. Concealed surfaces:

1) Lumber, No. 2 Common or better, dressed to smooth contact surfaces, or:

2) APA Rated Plyform Class I.b. Exposed surfaces: Non absorptive medium density overlay ply-

wood.3. Metal: Minimum 16 gage steel, tight fitting, stiffened to support con-

crete. 4. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Curing Compound: Lithium silicate; Sinak Corporation - Sinak VC5.

B. Admixtures:1. Water reducing or water reducing/set retarding: ASTM C494, Type A or

D. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chlo-ride.

2. Air entraining: ASTM C260.

C. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1752, non asphaltic type.

D. Non Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107. Premixed, consisting of non-metallic aggre-gate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; minimum 7,000 psi compressive strength at 28 days.

E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C932. Two component modified epoxy resin.

F. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, water based type.

G. Curing Paper: ASTM C171, waterproof paper or polyethylene film.

H. Form Ties: Snap off or Removable type, adjustable length, 1 inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in con crete.

I. Construction Joints Forms: Formed galvanized steel, minimum 18 gage, with keyway.

J. Anchors and Fasteners: Size as required, sufficient strength to maintain forms in place while concrete is placed.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

K. Waterstops: Self-expanding rectangular strip, sodium bentonite or hydrophyl- lic material for adhesive bonding to concrete; Volclay Waterstop-RX or Con- seal CS-231.

2.5 MIXES

A. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 301.

B. Proportion Adjustments: 1. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, site condi-

tions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant.

C. Design concrete to yield characteristics indicated on Drawings.

D. Provide air entrained concrete for all concrete susceptible to freeze thaw ex-posures, typical throughout.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Notify Architect and Testing Laboratory minimum 24 hours prior to placing concrete.

B. Accurately position anchor bolts, sleeves, conduit, inserts, and accessories. Do not cut reinforcing steel to facilitate installation of inserts or accessories.

C. Remove water and debris from forms and excavations.

D. Close openings left in forms for cleaning and inspection.

E. Prepare previously placed [and existing] concrete surfaces by cleaning with steel wire brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufac-turer's instructions.

3.2 FORMWORK A. Construct formwork, shoring, and bracing to produce concrete of required shape, line, and dimension. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

B. Arrange and assemble formwork with minimum joints, located to allow dis-mantling without damage to concrete.

C. Make joints watertight.

D. Provide chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled external cor-ners.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

E. Camber formwork to compensate for deflection during concrete placement.

F. Adjust supports to take up settlement caused by concrete placement.

G. Construction Joints:1. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, each unit of construction is a

single unit; place concrete continuously to provide monolithic construc-tion.

2. Obtain Architect's approval of construction joint locations not indicated on Drawings.

3. Provide keys and dowels in joints as noted on drawings.4. Use construction joint form for joints in floor slabs. Set screed edge at re-

quired elevation. Secure to prevent movement.

H. Waterstops:1. Install waterstops at locations noted on drawings. 2. Install continuously without displacing reinforcement.

I. Inserts and Embedded Parts:1. Before concrete is placed, install inserts, anchor slots, anchor bolts, and

embedded parts required for attachment of work.2. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves,

and other work passing through concrete members.3. Maintain in position during concrete placement.

J. Form Removal:1. Do not remove formwork until concrete has attained sufficient strength

to resist dead loads plus applied live loads.2. Remove formwork in manner that will not damage surfaces of concrete;

patch work damaged during form removal operations.3. Provide shoring, reshoring, and bracing as required.

4. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in Work.

K. Anchor Bolts: 1. Set anchor bolts for structural plates with anchor bolts double nutted to

plywood or steel templates.

L. Installation Tolerances:1. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.2. Construct formwork for elevator hoistways in accordance with ASME

A17.1.

3.3 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318, in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts are not disturbed during concrete placement.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

C. Deposit concrete as nearly as possible in its final position to minimize handling and flowing.

D. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.

E. Do not place partially hardened, contaminated, or retempered concrete.

F. Do not allow concrete to free fall over 8 feet; provide tremies, chutes, or other means of conveyance.

G. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Hand compact in corners and angles of forms.

H. Screed slabs level, to flatness tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

3.4 PLACEMENT OF SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS

A. Prior to placing toppings as noted on drawings, remove deleterious material from concrete substrates; broom surfaces clean.

B. Apply bonding agent to concrete substrate; follow manufacturer's instruc-tions.

C. Place divider strips and reinforcing.

D. Place toppings to required lines and elevations; screed level, to tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.5 PLACEMENT OF GROUT

A. Remove loose and foreign matter from concrete; lightly roughen bonding sur-face.

B. Just prior to grouting, thoroughly wet concrete surfaces; remove excess wa-ter.

C. Mix grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not retemper.

D. Place grout continuously, by most practical means; avoid entrapped air. Do not vibrate grout.

3.6 FINISHING INTERIOR FLOOR SURFACES

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1.

B. Steel trowel surfaces to receive carpeting and laminate flooring.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

C. Steel trowel and fine broom finish surfaces to receive thin set tile.

D. Steel trowel and seal surfaces to be exposed. Apply sealer/hardener in ac-cordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Tolerances:1. Maximum variation of surface flatness for exposed concrete floors: 1/8

inch in 10 feet.2. Maximum variation of surface flatness under seamless resilient flooring:

1/8 inch in 10 feet.3. Maximum variation of surface flatness under carpeting: 1/8 inch in 10

feet.4. Correct defects by grinding or removal and replacement of defective

work. Re-measure corrected areas by same process.

3.7 FINISHING EXTERIOR SLAB SURFACES

A. Finish concrete slab surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Steel trowel and broom finish surfaces, for exterior walks and slabs.

C. Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation of surface flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2. Correct defects by grinding or removal and replacement of defective

work. Re-measure corrected areas by same process.

3.8 JOINTS A. Construction joints: Install at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise noted.

2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

B. Isolation joints in slabs-on-grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler

strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as foundation walls and other locations, as indicated.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, ex-cessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant tempera-ture for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of con-crete.

C. Provide artificial heat to maintain temperature of concrete above minimum specified temperature for duration of curing period.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

D. Keep forms sufficiently wet to prevent cracking of concrete or loosening of form joints.

3.10 CURING

A. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308:1. Horizontal surfaces:

a. Surfaces to receive additional toppings or setting beds: Use curing paper method.

b. Other surfaces: Use either curing paper or curing compound method.

2. Vertical surfaces: Use either wet curing or curing compound method.

B. Curing Compound Method:1. Spray compound on surfaces in two coats, applying second at right an-

gle to first, at minimum rate recommended by manufacturer.2. Restrict traffic on surfaces during curing.

C. Curing Paper Method:1. Spread curing paper over surfaces, lapping ends and sides minimum 4

inches; maintain in place by use of weights.2. Remove paper after curing.

D. Wet Curing Method: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days.

3.11 CLEANING AND REPAIRS

A. Remove efflorescence, stains, oil, grease, and foreign materials from exposed surfaces.

B. Surface Repairs for concrete surfaces to receive Waterproofing Membrane: 1. Fill cracks, pits, tie holes, and other voids detrimental to application of waterproofing system.

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspection Services:1. Certify each delivery ticket.2. Record time at which concrete was discharged from truck.3. Monitor and record amount of water and water reducing admixture

added to concrete at project site.4. Determine ambient temperature and temperature of concrete sample

for each set of test cylinders.5. Test cylinders:

a. Make test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C172; one set of 3 cylinders for each 75 cubic yards or fraction thereof placed in any one day, for each different class of concrete.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

b. Mold and cure cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31; test cylin-ders in accordance with ASTM C39; one at 7 days and two at 28 days.

6. Slump tests: Make slump tests at beginning of each day's placement and for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C143.

7. Air content: Determine total air content of air entrained concrete for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C231.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 3000

SECTION 03 5413GYPSUM CONCRETE UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Liquid applied, gypsum based, self leveling floor underlayment.2. Sound control mat.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Division 01: Quality Control, for testing and quality assurance. 3. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing, for plywood substrate

work.4. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C472 - Standard Test Method for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gyp-

sum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete.2. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.3. E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Air

borne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. 4. E492 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Im

pact Sound Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Manufacturer's mixing and application instructions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 0/0, tested to ASTM E84.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:1. Perform work at ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F.2. Provide ventilation to remove excess moisture.3. Close area to traffic during underlayment application and for time

period after application recommended by manufacturer.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 5413

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Hacker Industries, Inc. (www.hackerindustries.com)2. Maxxon Corp. (www.maxxoncorporation.com)3. United States Gypsum Co. (www.levelrock.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Concrete Floor Underlayment: 1. Self leveling, gypsum based.2. Firm-Fill 2010 by Hacker Industries, Gyp-Crete 2000, LevelRock 3500

by USG, or approved substitute.

B. Sound Control Mat: Sound Mat II by Hacker Industries, Acousti-Mat by Maxxon, or approved substitute.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, graded according to un-derlayment manufacturer's requirements.

B. Water: Clean, potable.

C. Primer: As recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

D. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based.

E. Sealer: Product of gypsum cement underlayment manufacturer suitable for specified floor finish.

2.4 MIXES

A. Follow manufacturer's instructions.

B. Mix to self leveling consistency.

C. Compressive Strength: Minimum 3500 psi at 28 days, tested to ASTM C472.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 5413

A. Fill cracks, voids and joints with joint filler; finish smooth.

B. Apply primer to surfaces to receive underlayment; follow manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Place sound control mat loose over substrate. 1. Overlap ends and edges. 2. Cut to fit at perimeter and around penetrations with maximum 1/8

inch gaps.

C. Place gypsum underlayment to thickness indicated.

D. Spread and float underlayment to smooth, level surface.

E. Place underlayment continuously without seams except at predeter-mined joints.

F. Provide continuous ventilation and heat as required to remove moisture from areas until underlayment sets.

G. Installation Tolerances:1. Maximum variation in subfloor surface: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10

feet, noncumulative.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 03 5413

SECTION 04 0513

MASONRY MORTARING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Mortar for masonry.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry.3. Section 04 0516 - Masonry Grouting.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.2. C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.3. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.4. C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.5. C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.6. C1329 - Standard Specification for Mortar Cement.

B. The Masonry Society (TMS) (www.masonrysociety.org):1. 402 - Building Code for Masonry Structures. 2. 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Samples: 1/2 x 1/2 x 3 inch long colored mortar samples.

B. Quality Control Submittals:1. Test reports: Indicating mortar compliance with ASTM C270.2. Delivery tickets: If mortar is delivered to site dry and pre-blended, furnish

delivery tickets indicating quantity, mortar type, and date of manufac-ture.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with TMS 402 and 602.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 0513

A. Deliver cement and lime in manufacturer's original, unopened packages or containers.

B. Protect materials from moisture absorption and damage; reject damaged containers.

C. Store aggregate to prevent inclusion of foreign matter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Cement:1. Essroc Cement Corp. (www.essroc.com)2. LaFarge North America, Inc. (www.lafarge-na.com)3. Lehigh Cement Co. (www.lehighcement.com)

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Lime:1. Chemical Lime Co. (www.chemicallime.com)2. Graymont Dolime (OH) Inc. (www.graymont-oh.com)3. Rockwell Lime Co. (www.rockwelllime.com)

C. Acceptable Manufacturers - Preblended Mortars and Grouts:1. Quikrete Companies. (www.quikrete.com)

D. Acceptable Manufacturers - Colorants:1. Davis Colors. (www.daviscolors.com)2. Solomon Colors. (www.solomoncolors.com)

E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. For exposed surfaces, provide cement from one source throughout project.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type S.

C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329, Types S.

E. Aggregate: 1. ASTM C144, standard masonry type.2. For exposed surfaces, provide aggregate from one source throughout

project.

F. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 0513

G. Colorant: Pure mineral oxide type; color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

H. Water: Clean and free from oils, acids, alkalies, organic matter, and other substances in amounts deleterious to mortar or metals in masonry.

2.3 MIXES

A. Mortar Mixes: To ASTM C270 using the Proportion Method.1. Concrete unit masonry: Type S, gray color

2.4 MIXING

A. Mix mortar in accordance with ASTM C270.

B. Jobsite Proportioning of Mortar: 1. Mix using mechanical mixer. Hand mixing not permitted.2. Mix approximately three-quarters of required water, all of cement and

lime, and one-half of aggregate for minimum of 2 minutes. 3. Add remainder of water and aggregate; mix for minimum of 3 minutes.

C. Dry Preblended Mortar: 1. Mix using continuous, self-cleaning mixer mounted at apex of silo cone.2. Set water flow valve to provide workable consistency.

D. Provide uniformity of color in exposed mortar.

E. Colorant may not exceed 9 pounds per 94 pound bag of cement for mineral oxides and 1-3/4 pounds per 94 pound bag for carbon black.

F. Thoroughly mix ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use.

G. Discard lumpy, caked, frozen, and hardened mixes.

H. Mortar may be retempered by adding water as required. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing at ambient temperatures below 80 degrees F and within 1-1/2 hours after initial mixing at ambient temperatures over 80 degrees

I. Do not add accelerators, retarders, water repellents, antifreeze compounds, or other additives without Architect's approval.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Follow requirements specified in referenced sections.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 0513

SECTION 04 0516

MASONRY GROUTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Grout for masonry.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry.

3. Section 04 0513 - Masonry Mortaring.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.2. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.3. C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.4. C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.5. C476 - Standard Specification for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Ma-

sonry.

B. The Masonry Society (TMS) (www.masonrysociety.org):1. 402 - Building Code for Masonry Structures. 2. 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals:1. Test reports: Indicating grout compliance with ASTM C476.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with TMS 402 and 602.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver cement and lime in manufacturer's original, unopened packages or containers.

B. Protect materials from moisture absorption and damage; reject damaged containers.

C. Store aggregate to prevent inclusion of foreign matter.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 0516

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Cement:1. Essroc Cement Corp. (www.essroc.com)2. LaFarge North America, Inc. (www.lafarge-na.com)3. Lehigh Cement Co. (www.lehighcement.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

B. Aggregate: ASTM C404.

C. Water: Clean and free from oils, acids, alkalies, organic matter, and other substances in amounts deleterious to mortar or metals in masonry.

D. Admixture: W.R. Grace DRY BLOCK Integral Water-Repellant Admixture for Masonry Grout.

2.3 MIXES

A. Grout Mix:1. ASTM C476, fine or coarse grout, dependent on job conditions for di-

mensions of grout spaces and pour height.2. Compressive strength: Minimum 2500 psi at 28 days.3. Slump: 7 to 8 inches.

2.4 MIXING

A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C476.

B. Thoroughly mix ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use.

C. Mix dry ingredients mechanically until uniformly distributed; add water to achieve workable consistency.

D. Discard lumpy, caked, frozen, and hardened mixes.

E. Use grout within 2-1/2 hours after initial mixing at ambient temperatures below 80 degrees F and within 1-1/2 hours after initial mixing at ambient tempera-tures over 80 degrees F.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 0516

F. Do not add accelerators, retarders, water repellents, antifreeze compounds, or other additives without Architect's approval.

PART 3 EXECUTION

.1INSTALLATION

A.Follow requirements specified in referenced sections. All Masonry grout to be installed with mechanical vibrator.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 0516

SECTION 04 2000

UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Concrete unit masonry.2. Integral flashings.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 04 0513 - Masonry Mortaring.3. Section 04 0516 - Masonry Grouting.4. Section 07 1900 - Water Repellants.

5. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 6. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware.2. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.3. A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.4. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

5. A951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement.6. C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.7. C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Concrete.8. C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.

B. National Concrete Masonry Association (www.ncma.org)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Provide information on reinforcing and anchors including

sizes, profiles, materials, and finishes.2. Product Data: Provide fabricated flashing information for corner units,

end-dam units, and other applications.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 2000

3. Samples: Concrete masonry samples in quantities showing full color and texture range.

B. Mockup:1. Size: 8 feet high x 8 feet wide.2. Show:

a. Masonry color and texture range.b. Mortar joint size, color, and profile.c. Each bond pattern.d. Anchors.e. Flashings and weeps.

3. Locate where directed.4. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work.

C. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with standards. 1. Masonry Units - include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C67.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store masonry off ground on level platforms in dry locations; prevent contact with materials that could cause staining or damage.

B. Protect reinforcement and anchors from corrosion.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Wall Protection:1. During erection, cover tops of partially completed walls with strong wa-

terproof membrane at end of each day or work stoppage. 2. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches down both sides; hold securely in

place.

B. Load Application:1. Do not apply uniform loads for at least 12 hours after building masonry

columns or walls.2. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building ma-

sonry columns or walls.

C. Environmental Requirements:1. Hot weather requirements: If ambient temperature is over 95 degrees F

or relative humidity is less than 50 percent, protect from direct sun and wind exposure for minimum 48 hours after installation.

2. Cold weather requirements: Do not use frozen materials or build on fro-zen work. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freez-ing conditions.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 2000

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers – Standard Concrete Masonry Units:1. Willamette Graystone. (www.willamettegraystone.com)

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Masonry Accessories:1. Blok-Lok Ltd. (www.blok-lok.com)2. Dur-O-Wal. (www.dur-o-wal.com)3. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. (www.h-b.com)

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Standard Concrete Masonry Units:1. ASTM C90, solid load bearing type, medium weight, Type I - Moisture

Controlled.2. ASTM C129, non-load bearing type, normal weight, Type I - Moisture

Controlled.3. Special shapes: Lintels and Bond beams.4. Unit Sizes: a. Load bearing - Nominally 8 inches high x 16 inches long x 8 inches

thick. b. Non-load bearing - Nominally 8 inches high x 16 inches long x 4

inches thick.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mortar: Specified in Section 04 0513.

B. Grout: Specified in Section 04 0516.

C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: 1. Ladder type; ASTM A951, hot-dip galvanized steel wire, 9 gauge side

rods with 9 gauge cross ties.2. Width: Nominal wall thickness less 1-1/2 inches.3. Corner and tee fittings: Type to match reinforcement.

E. Adjustable Veneer Anchors: Formed steel wire (3/16” minimum diameter), two

piece plate and pintle type, hot dip galvanized, ASTM A153/A153M, B2 finish. 1. Dur-O-Wal: DA 213S 2. Hohmann & Barnard: HB-200

F. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized, screws, minimum 1-1/2 inch penetration into framing.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 2000

G. Reinforcing Bars: 1. ASTM A615/A615M, deformed billet steel, Grade 60.

H. Flexible Flashings: 1. Thru wall: rubberiszed asphalt sheet, self adhering, composite of rubber-

iszed asphalt compund bonded to high density polyethylene film, with thickness of not less than .40 inch (40 mils); Perm-A-Barrier by W.R. Grace, PolyGuard 400 membrane by Polyguard Products, or approved substi-tute.

2. Termination mastic: Type recommended by flashing manufacturer.

I. Sheet Metal Flashings: Provide stainless steel metal flashing, complying with SMACNA standards and ASTM A240, Type 304, at 0.019 inches thick.

J. Flashings: Drip Edge, stainless steel, 26 gauge.

K. Weeps: Mortar-Net preformed polyester mesh weep vents.

L. Mortar Dropping Control at veneer: Preformed plastic mesh, Mortar Net by Dur-O-Wal, or approved substitute.

M. Admixtures: W.R. Grace DRY BLOCK Integral Water-Repellant Admixture for Concrete Masonry Units.

N. Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use prod-uct expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Remove dirt, loose rust, and other foreign matter from reinforcement and an-chors.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Establish lines, levels and courses indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimensions. Form horizontal and vertical joints of uniform thickness.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 2000

C. Lay concrete masonry in running bond. Course one masonry unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

D. Lay masonry plumb and level. Do not adjust masonry units after mortar has set.

E. Lay solid masonry units in full mortar bed, with full head joints. Lay hollow ma-sonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

F. Do not butter corners or excessively furrow joints.

G. Machine cut masonry with straight cuts and clean edges; prevent oversized or undersized joints. Discard damaged units. Do not expose cut cells.

H. Isolate masonry from structural members with compressible filler.

I. When joining fresh masonry to partially set masonry, remove loose masonry and mortar; clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry.

J. Stop horizontal runs by racking back normal bond unit in each course. Tooth-ing not permitted.

K. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

L. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness.

M. Secure masonry to structural members with anchors spaced maximum 16 inches on center. Fasten each anchor with 2 screw fasteners of type indi-cated on drawings.

N. Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.

O. Horizontal Reinforcement:1. Place reinforcement at maximum 16 inches on center vertically, at top-

most course, and at first two courses above and below openings.2. Extend minimum 24 inches each side of openings. 3. Center reinforcing in wall.4. Lap ends 6 inches minimum; use fabricated tee and corner fittings at

corners and intersections.

P. Veneer Ties:1. Space ties to provide one tie per 2 square feet at maximum spacing of

16 inches on center horizontally. 2. Locate ties within 3 inches of ends of masonry walls and openings.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 2000

Q. Reinforcing Bars:1. Position reinforcing accurately and hold securely in place to prevent

displacement. Maintain minimum 1 inch space between masonry and reinforcing.

2. Grout at intervals of not more than 60 inches in 6 to 8 inch lifts.3. Vibrate grout during and after placement to ensure complete filling.4. Stop grout 1-1/2 inch below top of masonry if grouting is stopped for 1

hour or more, except where completing grouting of finished wall.

R. Flashings:1. Install flashing with outer edge flush with outside face of masonry; ex-

tend up 8 inches minimum, behind air infiltration barrier.2. Lap end joints 4 inches minimum and seal 3. At heads and sills, extend flashing to form end dams and turn up 2 inches to form a pan, or use preformed end dams if available from

membrane manufacturer.4. Apply trowel coat of mastic along flashing at top edge, seams, cuts,

and penetrations. 5. Install metal flashing where indicated.

S. Weeps: 1. Locate in head joints in first course above flashings at maximum 32

inches on center. 2. Set weeps flush with exterior face of masonry.

T. Install mortar dropping control continuously in cavities above flashings.

U. Installation Tolerances; Maximum variation from:1. Alignment face to face of adjacent units: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.2. Vertical alignment of head joints: Plus or minus 1/2 inch in 10 feet.3. True plane of wall: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet

or more.4. Plumb: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet noncumulative; 1/2 inch in 20

feet or more.5. Level coursing: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2

inch in 30 feet.6. Joint thickness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.7. Cross sectional thickness of walls: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspection Services: 1. Masonry units: Inspect masonry units prior to and during installation for

compliance with specified requirements.2. Masonry assemblies:

a. Determine compressive strength of masonry by the prism method, ASTM C1314.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 2000

b. Verify dimensions and condition of grout spaces and type, quantity, and placement of reinforcement during installation and just prior to closing of cleanouts.

c. Verify type, quantity, and installation of reinforcement, anchors, and ties.

d. Inspect placement of grout.3. Grout: Mold and test one set of compressive strength cubes in accor-

dance with ASTM C1019 for each 5,000 square feet of masonry wall area or fraction thereof.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces. Protect work of others from dam-age.

B. Apply masonry cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Thoroughly rinse surfaces with clean water after completion of cleaning; re-move all traces of cleaning solution. Rinse cleaning solution with low pressure water (120 psi maximum).

D. Do not use muriatic acid cleaning solutions.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 04 2000

SECTION 05 1200

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Structural steel framing members.2. Grouting base plates.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 05 5000: Metal Fabrications, for related steel fabrications.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) (www.aisc.org) - Specifications for Structural Steel for Buildings.

B. American Welding Society (AWS) (www.aws.org) D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.3. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,

Standard Quality.4. A307 - Standard Specification for Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Inter-

nally Threaded Standard Fasteners.5. A325 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel

Joints, Including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers.6. A490 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel

Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.7. A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.8. A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.9. A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in

Building Framing.10. C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Ce-

ment Mortars (Using 2-In. or 50-mm Cube Specimens).

D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) (www.sspc.org) - Painting Manual.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 1200

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and location of struc-

tural members, openings, attachments, embedments, and fasteners, and connections not detailed.

2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and filed welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 3. Manufacturer’s Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 4. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis. 5. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experi-ence in work of this Section.

B. Welder Qualifications: AWS D1.1.

C. Design Requirements: Design connections not detailed on Drawings under supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in this work and as indicated in OSSC Chapter 22 ‘Steel’.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store steel above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports; separate with wooden separators.

B. Protect steel from corrosion.

C. Prevent damage to prime coat; use wooden protectors to prevent damage from chain or cable cinches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Steel:1. Shapes, bars, and plates: ASTM A36/A36M.2. Hollow structural sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. 3. Rolled Wide Flanges: ASTM A992, Grade 50.3. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.4. Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015, through 1020, forged steel,

headed, unfinished.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 1200

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307.

B. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325, Type 1, plain finish.

C. Standard Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A.

D. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36. finish Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A153 Class C.

E. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grad 1035, cold-finished carbon steel.

F. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel.

G. Primer Paint: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.

H. Nonmettalic, Non-shrink Grout: Premixed, consisting of non-metallic aggre-gate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; minimum 7,000 PSI compressive strength at 28 days, ASTM C1107.

1. Burke: Nonmettalic Grout 2. W.R. Meadows; Seatight 588 Precision Grout. 3. Five Star Products, Inc.: Five Star Grout.

I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC Manual.

B. Welding: AWS D1.1. Stress relieve welded assemblies by heat treatment.

C. Where collection of water inside structural tubing could occur, provide drain hole at lowest point.

D. Cap open ends of tubes and seal weld. Wherever practical, weld connec-tions all around. Seal seams that cannot be practically welded with joint sealer.

E. Shop Painting:1. Shop prime steel surfaces except:

a. Surfaces to be welded.b. Contact surfaces of high strength friction type bolted connections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 1200

A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications.

B. Accurately assemble to lines and elevations indicated, within specified erec-tion tolerances.

C. Align and adjust members forming parts of complete frame or structure after assembly but before fastening.

D. Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of suffi-cient strength to resist imposed loads.

E. Align column bases with leveling plates.

F. Align bearing plates with wedges or shims.

G. Fasten splices of compression members after abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact.

H. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces that will be in permanent contact be-fore members are assembled.

I. Locate splices only where indicated.

J. Tighten erection bolts and leave in place or remove bolts and fill holes with plug welds.

K. Do not correct fabrication by gas cutting on major members.

L. Remove temporary shoring and bracing members after permanent members are in place and final connections have been made.

M. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plumb: 1/4 inch per story, noncumulative.2. Maximum variation from level: 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative.3. Maximum offset from alignment of adjacent members: 1/4 inch.

N. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifica- tions, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.

3.2 PLACEMENT OF GROUT

A. Remove loose and foreign matter from concrete; lightly roughen bonding sur-face.

B. Remove foreign materials from steel surfaces; align and level members in final position.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 1200

C. Just prior to grouting, thoroughly wet concrete surfaces; remove excess wa-ter.

D. Mix grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not retemper.

E. Place grout continuously, by most practical means; avoid entrapped air. Do not vibrate grout.

F. Do not remove leveling shims for at least 48 hours after grouting. After remov-ing shims, fill voids with sand-cement grout.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspection Services:1. Inspect steel elements for conformance to specified requirements in-

cluding:a. Location and adequacy of bracing.b. Location and set of anchor bolts and other inserts.c. Alignment, plumb, camber, and other required attributes.

2. Inspect high strength bolted construction in accordance with AISC Specification and as follows:a. Visually inspect high strength bolted connections.b. Check at least two bolts of every third connection with calibrated

torque wrench for proper torque.3. Inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1 and as follows:

a. Visually inspect welds.b. Test full penetration welds by ultrasonic method in accordance

with ASTM E164.4. Make one set of six test cubes for each 1/3 cubic yard of grout placed

or fraction thereof:a. Mold and test cubes in accordance with ASTM C109; three at 7

days and three at 28 days.b. Restrain grout from expansion by use of top plate.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Touch up bolt heads, nuts, field welds, and abrasions in shop coating with same primer used in shop.

B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanized repair paint accord ing to ASTM A780 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 1200

SECTION 05 5000

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Shop fabricated metal components.2. Gratings.3. Ladders.4. Guard rails and handrails.5. Shop fabricated steel stairs with concrete pan treads.

6. Elevator hoist beams and elevator doorsill support angles.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 03 3000: Cast-in-place Concrete, for items embedded in con- crete. 3. Section 04 2000: Unit Masonry, for loose lintels installed in CMU veneer. 4. Section 07 7233: Roof Hatches, for ships ladder. 5. Section 09 9100: Painting, for metal finishes. 6. Section 14 2423: Hydraulic Passenger Elevators, for pit access ladder.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org):1. 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.2. 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Pro-

cedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

3. 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Pro-cedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extru-sions and Panels.

B. American Welding Society (AWS) (www.aws.org):1. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.2. D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.3. D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,

Standard Quality.3. A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 5000

4. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

5. A283 - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars.

6. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.

7. A354 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners.

8. A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

9. A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

10. A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

11. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Ex-truded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

12. B241 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.

13. E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

14. C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) (www.sspc.org) - Painting Manual.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Minimum design loads:1. Pedestrian loading:

a. Uniform load of 100 PSF.b. Concentrated load of 300 pounds.c. Maximum deflection under loading: L/360.

2. Guard rails and handrails:a. 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction at top, trans-

ferred via attachments and supports to building structure.b. Concentrated 200 pound load applied in any direction at any

point along top, transferred via attachments and supports to build-ing structure.

c. Maximum deflection under loading: L/120.

3. Stair assembly: a. Design stair assembly to support a uniform live load of 100 PSF and

a concentrated load of 300 pounds, with maximum deflection of L/360.

4. Concentrated and uniform loads do not need to be applied simultane-

ously.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 5000

5. Contractor to provide design for stair treads, stringers, and all connec- tions in accordance with the configurations noted on the drawings. Per- form design under direct supervision of Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Oregon.

B. Fabricate guard rails and handrails in accordance with ASTM E985.

C. Fabricate stair assembly to NAAMM AMP 510, Architectural Class.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Show dimensions, metal thicknesses, finishes, joints, at-

tachments, and relationship of work to adjacent construction.2. Provide calculations for all contractor design items to submit with the

shop drawings for review by the design team.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Rolled Wide Flanges: ASTM A992, Grade 50

B. Misc. Plate, Bar, Channel, Angle: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.

E. Hollow Structural Steel: ASTM A500, Grade B.

2.2 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM

A. Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper.

B. Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy and temper best suited to application.

C. Pipe: ASTM B241, extruded, anodizing quality, 6063 aluminum pipe, Schedule 40.

2.3 MATERIALS - STAINLESS STEEL

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 5000

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304, rollable temper.

B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A354.

C. Perforated Panel (at balcony guardrails): C.R. Laurence Perforated 1/2” Round, brushed finish, with edge trim channel.

2.4 MATERIALS - CONCRETE

A. Concrete: Specified in Section 03 3000; ASTM C94; 3,500 psi 28 day strength, 2 to 3 inch slump.

B. Concrete Reinforcement: Mesh type, unfinished. 2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Exposed Screws: Same material as metal being fastened; Phillips flat head, countersunk, unless noted otherwise.

B. Bolts: ASTM A307, hexagonal head type.

C. Primer Paint: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.

D. Anchoring Cement: Non-metallic, non-shrink cementitious type.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make ex-posed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uni-form radius.

D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts, unobtru-sively located, consistent with design of component except where specifi-cally noted otherwise.

E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate an-chors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

F. Conceal fastenings where possible.

G. Treads and Landings:1. Fabricate from minimum 14 gage steel sheet, shaped to receive con-

crete.2. Fabricate stairs with closed steel sheet risers.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 5000

3. Reinforce underside with steel angles when required to resist design loads.

4. Secure pans to stringers with clip angles, welded in place.

H. Guard Rails and Handrails:1. Fabricate from steel pipe or tube stock. 2. Make bends uniform and free from buckles and other defects.3. Where length exceeds that suitable for shipping and handling, fabricate

in sections with concealed internal sleeves forming slip joints. Extend sleeves minimum 2 inches on both sides of joint; field weld and grind smooth.

I. Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs, landings, and railings to each other and to building structure. J. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate an- chors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

K. Welding to conform to AWS D1.1, D1.2, or D1.6.1. Use welds for permanent connections where possible. Grind exposed

welds smooth.2. Tack welds prohibited on exposed surfaces.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Ferrous Metal: Galvanized; ASTM A123/A123M, to 2.0 ounces per square foot.

B. Interior Ferrous Metal:1. Shop painted except steel to be encased in concrete and surfaces to

be welded.2. Surface preparation: SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning or SP3 - Power Tool

Cleaning.3. Application: One coat; follow coating manufacturer's instructions.4. Minimum dry film thickness: 2.0 mils.

C. Steel:1. Surface preparation: SSPC SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning or SP3 - Power Tool

Cleaning.2. Application: One coat; follow coating manufacturer's instructions.3. Minimum dry film thickness: 2.0 mils.4. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field

welding is required.

D. Aluminum: AAMA 611; Architectural Class I and II anodized, clear.

E. Stainless Steel: NAAMM AMP 503; No. 4 satin.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 5000

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install items in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

B. Install components plumb, level, accurately fitted, free from distortion and defects.

C. Welding: AWS D1.1, D1.2, or D1.6. Grind and fill exposed welds; finish smooth and flush.

D. Install sleeved components with anchoring cement.

E. Prevent contact of exterior aluminum and dissimilar metals by use of zinc rich paint, bituminous coating, or non-absorptive gaskets.

F. Provide anchors, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure.

G. Field bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. H. Mechanically fasten joints butted tight, flush, and hairline. Grind welds smooth and flush.

I. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent at-tachments.

J. Fill treads and landings with concrete. Consolidate concrete, strike off flush with perimeter frame, and apply light broom finish with striations parallel to long dimension of tread.

K. Installation Tolerances:1. Maximum variation from plumb: 1/4 inch per story, noncumulative.2. Maximum offset from true alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Clean and touch up damaged primer paint with same product as applied in shop.

B. Clean and touch up galvanized coatings at welded and abraded surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780, Annex A2.

3.3 SCHEDULE

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 5000

A. This Schedule includes principal items only; refer to Drawings for additional items not listed.

B. Guard Rails and Handrails:1. Fabricate from steel pipe or tube stock of sizes and types indicated.2. Make bends uniform and free from buckles and other defects.3. Cut intersections square to within 2 degrees and to length within 1/8

inch. Remove burrs from cut ends.4. Miter and cope intersections within 2 degrees, fit to within 1/8 inch.5. Continuously weld connections.6. Where length exceeds that suitable for shipping and handling, fabricate

in sections with concealed internal sleeves forming slip joints. Extend sleeves minimum 2 inches on both sides of joint; field weld and grind smooth.

C. Treads and Landings:1. Shop cast treads and landings from concrete with integral reinforce-

ment, non-slip finish, and radiused nosings. Cast in angles for securing to stringers.

2. Fabricate stairs with closed steel sheet risers.3. Reinforce underside with steel angles when required to resist design

loads.4. Weld treads and landings to stringers.

D. Nosings for Exterior Concrete Tread Steps: Cast aluminum, cross hatched abrasive surface, 1 inch nosing, 3 inches deep x step width less 6 inches.

E. Aluminum Ships Ladder:1. Capacity: Unit shall support a 500 lb total load without failure. 2. Ladder Stringer: 5 inch by 2 inch by 3/16 inch extruded 6005-TS alumI-

num channel. Pitch: 60 to 75 degrees.3. Ladder Tread: 5-3/16 inch. a. Standard Tread Material: Extruded 6005-TS aluminum channel with

deeply serrated top surface on top tread. b. Standard Clear Tread Width: ladder width, 30 inches. 4. Ladder Mounting Brackets: a. Floor Bracket: 2 inch by 3 inch by 1/4 inch aluminum angle.

b. Top Bracket: 4-3/4 inch by 5 inch by 1/4 inch aluminum angle. 5. Handrails: 1-1/4 inches Schedule 40, 6005-TS aluminum pipe provided with internal aluminum fittings. 6. Finishes: Mill finish on all ladder components.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 05 5000

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Wood blocking and furring.2. Telephone and electrical panel backboards.3. Roof curbs.4. Preservative treatment of wood.5. Temporary elevator platform assembly.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 06 1100: Framing and Sheathing. 3. Section 07 5400: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing, for requirements for blocking and nailers. 4. Section 07 6200: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Section 14 2100 : Electric Traction Passenger Elevators.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) (www.awpa.com) U1 - Use Category System - User Specification for Treated Wood.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware.2. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build-ing Materials.

4. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs.

C. Engineered Wood Association (APA) (www.apawood.org) PRP-108 - Perform-ance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels.

D. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) (www.wclib.org) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.

E. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) (www.wwpa.org) G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1000

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum

allowable unit stresses. 1. Indicate species and grade for each use and design values. B. Data for wood preservative treatments from chemical treatment manufac-

turer. 1. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative re- tained. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to site.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified to NIST PS 20.

B. Identify lumber and panel products by official grade mark.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials minimum 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation.

B. Do not store seasoned or treated materials in damp location.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber:1. Grading rules: WCLIB or WWPA.2. Species: Douglas Fir3. Grade: No. 2.4. Surfacing: Surfaced four sides S4S, unless otherwise indicated.5. Maximum moisture content: 19 percent.

B. Panel Products:1. Type: APA Plywood.2. Panel grade: APA Rated Sheathing.3. Exposure:

a. Exterior applications: Exterior.b. Interior applications: Exposure 1.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1000

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 1. Type and size: As required by conditions of use.2. Exterior locations and treated products: Stainless steel, ASTM F593, Type

304 or 316.3. Other interior locations: Plain steel.

2.3 GRADE AND TREATMENT STAMPS A. Stamp each preservative treated wood piece with AWPB treatment stamp or

furnish certificate of inspection with each shipment.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Preservative Treatment:

1. Treat lumber and panel products in accordance with AWPA U1:a. Interior locations protected from moisture sources: Category UC1 -

Interior/Dry.b. Interior locations subject to sources of moisture: Category UC2 -

Interior/Damp.c. Exterior locations above ground: Category UC3A - Above Ground/

Protected.d. Exterior locations in contact with ground: Category UC4B - Ground

Contact/Heavy Duty.2. Treatment process: Type ACQ - Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary

(ACQ); free from arsenic, chromium, and other EPA classified hazardous preservatives.

3. Treatment of wood: a. Nailers, blocking, cubs, equipment support bases, and similar items in associated with roofing, flashing and waterproofing. b. Floor plates, sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar items in con- tact with concrete or masonry. c. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide blocking, nailers, grounds, furring, and other similar items required to receive and support work.

B. Set members level, plumb, and rigid.

C. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1000

D. Install telephone and electrical panel backboards where indicated. Oversize panel by 12 inches on all sides.

E. Provide minimum 2 inch nominal thick blocking as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, trim, toilet accessories, cabinets, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical and electrical equipment.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1000

SECTION 06 1100

FRAMING AND SHEATHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Floor, roof and wall framing.2. Floor decking.3. Roof and wall sheathing.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 06 1000: Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06 1733: Wood I-Joists. 4. Section 06 1753: Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses 5. Section 07 5400: Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) (www.awpa.com) U1 - Use Category System - User Specification for Treated Wood.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware.2. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build-ing Materials.

4. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs.

5. F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105 KSI Yield Strength.

C. Engineered Wood Association (APA) (www.apawood.org) PRP-108 - Perform-ance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels.

D. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) (www.wclib.org) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.

E. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) (www.wwpa.org) G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1100

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum

allowable unit stresses. 1. Indicate species and grade for each use and design values.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified to NIST PS 20.

B. Identify lumber and panel products by official grade mark.

C. Comply with OSSC, Chapter 23, with special inspections required in OSSC Chapter 17.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials minimum 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation.

B. Do not store seasoned or treated materials in damp location.

C. Protect edges and corners of sheet materials from damage.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Provide manufacturer’s 10 year warranty against rot and termite damage for composite wood.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Laminated Veneer Lumber:1. Boise Cascade Corporation. (www.bc.com)2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. (www.gp.com)3. LP Corp. (www.lpcorp.com)

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Composite Lumber: 1. Boise Cascade Corporation. (www.bc.com)

2. Roseburg Forest Products. (www.rfpco.com)

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1100

A. Dimension Lumber:1. Grading rules: WCLIB. WWPA.2. Species: Douglas Fir3. Grade: No. 24. Surfacing: Surfaced four sides S4S, unless otherwise indicated.5. Maximum moisture content: 19 percent.

B. Laminated Veneer Lumber: 1. Fabricated by laminating wood veneers under pressure using exterior

type adhesive complying with ASTM D2559, with grain of veneers parallel with length.

2. Veneer: Douglas Fir.

C. Composite Joists and Headers: 1. Fabricated by laminating wood veneers to narrow oriented strand

board to produce rectangular members with veneers making up not less than 32 percent of total cross section.

D. Panel Products:1. Type: APA Plywood.2. 2. Panel grade:

a. Floor, wall and roof sheathing: APA Structural I Rated Sheathing. b. Combination subfloor/underlayment: APA Sturd-I-Floor.c. Underlayment: APA Underlayment.

3. Exposure:a. Exterior applications: Exterior.b. Interior applications: Exposure 1.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554.

B. Fasteners: 1. Type and size: As required by conditions of use.2. Exterior locations and treated products: Stainless steel, ASTM F593, Type

304 or 316.3. Other interior locations: Plain steel.

4. Securely attach framing by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with OSSC Table 2304.9.1 ‘Fastening Schedule’.

C. Metal Connectors and Joist Hangers:1. Galvanized steel, ASTM A653/A653M, G185 coating class.2. Size and shape: To suit framing conditions.

D. Sill Gasket: Glass-fiber resilient insulation, 1 inch nominal thickness, compressi-ble to 1/32 inch, width of sill members.

1. Damp locations: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell polyethylene from continuous rolls.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1100

E. Constructive Adhesive/Glue: Per Industry Standard APA AFG-01.

2.4 GRADE AND TREATMENT STAMPS

A. Identify each piece of framing lumber by grade stamp of WWPA.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set members level, plumb, and rigid.

B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Place beams, joists, and rafters with crown edge up. Provide and locate fur-ring, nailers, blocking and similar supports to comply with requirements for at-taching to other construction.

D. Construct load bearing framing members full length without splices.

E. Sills:1. Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementi-

tious foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inches.2. Place sill gasket directly on cementitious foundation. Fit tight to protrud-

ing foundation anchor bolts.3. Anchor sills to foundation with anchor bolts.

F. Joist Framing:1. Provide minimum 1-1/2 inches of bearing.2. Lap members framing from opposite sides minimum 4 inches.3. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under

wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists. Frame rigidly into joists.4. Bridge joists at mid span for spans in excess of 8 feet.

G. Stud Partition Framing:1. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates for load bearing par-

titions.2. Provide single bottom and top plates for non load bearing partitions.3. Anchor bottom plates to concrete structure with anchor bolts or power

driven fasteners.4. Triple studs at corners and partition intersections.5. Anchor studs abutting masonry or concrete with toggle or expansion

bolts.6. Frame openings with double studs and headers. Space short studs over

and under opening to stud spacing.7. At corners, provide diagonal 1 x 4 inch bracing; notch studs to fit.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1100

H. Beams:1. Provide minimum end bearing of 4 inches.2. Nail built-up members with two rows of nails spaced 6 inches on center

maximum.

I. Composite Wood Decking:1. Place decking to span two or more supports, with ends occurring over

supports.2. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows.3. Secure to each support with 2 fasteners.

J. Roof Sheathing:1. Place panels perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered

and sheet ends over firm bearing. 2. If tongue-and-groove panels are not used, Install sheathing clips be-

tween adjacent sheets between roof framing members.3. Leave 1/8 inch expansion space at panel ends and edges.4. Secure to supports with 8d nails spaced maximum 6 inches on center

along edges and maximum 12 inches on center in field of panels. 5. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing, including weather barriers so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation. 6. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through assembly.

K. Wall Sheathing:1. Place panels perpendicular to framing members, with ends over firm

bearing and staggered.2. At corners, place sheathing for a horizontal distance of 48 inches.3. Leave 1/8 inch expansion space at panel ends and edges.4. Secure to supports with 8d nails spaced maximum 6 inches on center

along edges and maximum 12 inches on center in field of panels.

L. Floor Decking:1. Place panels perpendicular to framing members, with ends over firm

bearing and staggered.2. Leave 1/8 inch expansion space at panel ends and edges.3. Secure to supports with 10d nails spaced maximum 6 inches on center

along edges and 12 inches on center in field of panels.

M. Provide blocking, nailers, furring, and other similar items required to receive and support work.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove split and warped framing prior to installation of finish materials.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1100

B. Do not conceal wood framing until independent testing agency has evalu- ated moisture content of framing lumber.

C. Independent Testing Laboratory will evaluate moisture content of framing

lumber at time of delivery to site. D. Independent Testing Laboratory will evaluate moisture content of framing

lumber after framing is installed and before start of drywall product installa- tion.

E. Framing lumber delivered to site found to have a moisture content higher

than specified shall be rejected and removed from building site.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1100

SECTION 06 1643

GYPSUM SHEATHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Exterior gypsum floor and roof sheathing.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum

Wallboard.2. C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application

of Gypsum Board.3. C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate

for Use as Sheathing.4. C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing

Board.5. C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.6. D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the

Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Illustrate panel product types, thicknesses, and installa-

tion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. GP Gypsum Corporation. (www.gp.com)2. National Gypsum Co. (www.nationalgypsum.com)3. Temple Inland. (http://www.greenglassinfo.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1643

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Exterior Sheathing: 1. Type: ASTM C1396; 24 inches wide x thickness indicated, maximum prac-

tical length, ends square cut, tongue and groove edges.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S screws, hot-dip galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel, minimum 5/8 inch penetration into framing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with ASTM C1280 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Accurately cut panels to fit around openings and projections.

C. Apply panels horizontally, tongue edge up, with ends occurring over sup-ports. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1643

SECTION 06 1733

WOOD I-JOISTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Wood chord and plywood and steel web joists for roof and floor framing.2. Bridging and bracing.3. Framing for openings.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) A653/A653M - Standard Specifica-tion for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Gal-vannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. Engineered Wood Association (APA) (www.apawood.org) PRP-108 - Perform-ance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels.

C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) (www.nist.gov) - Prod-uct Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of joists,

loads, bearing and anchorage details, bridging and bracing, and framed openings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Identify lumber and panel products by official grade mark.

C. Design Requirements: Design joists under supervision of Professional Structural Engineer with experience in work of this Section, licensed in State of Oregon.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1733

A. Transport and store joists in upright position resting on bearing ends.

B. Protect from moisture, warpage, and distortion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Roseburg Forest Products. (www.rfpco.com)2. Boise Cascade. (www.bcewp.com)3. Trus Joist. (www.trusjoist.com)4. RedBuilt (www.redbuilt.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber and wood-based structural panel webs:1. Lumber graded in accordance with NIST PS 20.2. Plywood APA PRP-108, grade as dictated by design, Exposure 1.

B. Rim Boards: Product complying with APA PRR-401; all-veneer panels, com- posite panels, glu-lam or structural composite lumber.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, type suited to conditions.

B. Joist Bridging: Type and size required by joist manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cut members accurately to length to achieve tight fit.

B. Provide single top and bottom chords.

C. Jig joists during fabrication to obtain tight joint connections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Place level and true to line.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1733

C. Provide temporary bracing to hold joists in position until permanently secured.

D. Prior to inducing loads, place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain joists straight and in correct position.

E. Do not field cut joists.

F. Place headers and supports to frame openings as specified in Section 06 1100.

G. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.

H. Installation Tolerances: Maximum 1/2 inch variation from true position.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Joist manufacturer to inspect joists after they have been erected, and sheathing, bridging, blocking are in place. B. Joist manufacturer to submit certificate to Architect certifying that the in- spection was made and that joists are in acceptable condition and meet the manufacturer’s design and installation requirement.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1733

SECTION 06 1753

SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing.2. Bridging and bracing.3. Framing for openings.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) A653/A653M - Standard Specifica-tion for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Gal-vannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. Engineered Wood Association (APA) (www.apawood.org) PRP-108 - Perform-ance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels.

D. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) (www.nist.gov) - Prod-uct Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

E. Truss Plate Institute (TPI) (www.tpinst.org) - Design Specifications for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of trusses,

loads, bearing and anchorage details, bridging and bracing, and framed openings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Trusses: Design in accordance with TPI requirements.

C. Identify lumber and panel products by official grade mark.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1753

D. Design Requirements: Design trusses under supervision of Professional Struc-tural Engineer with experience in work of this Section, licensed in State of Oregon.

E. Structural Performance: Provide metal plate connected wood trusses capa- ble of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements indicated in Structural Drawings.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Transport and store trusses in upright position resting on bearing ends. Provide air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Protect from moisture, warpage, and distortion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Pacific Lumber & Truss. (www.paclumber.com)2. Trus Joist. (www.trusjoist.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Lumber: Graded in accordance with NIST PS 20.

B. Steel Connectors: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Quality, G90 coating class, die stamped with integral teeth.

C. Gussets: Plywood, APA PRP-108, species optional, grade as dictated by de-sign, Exterior Exposure.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, type suited to conditions.

B. Wood for Blocking and Framed Openings: Specified in Section 06 1100.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cut members accurately to length to achieve tight fit.

B. Jig trusses during fabrication to obtain tight joint connections.

C. Press connectors into lumber to full depth.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1753

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Place level and true to line.

C. Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in position until permanently se-cured.

D. Prior to inducing loads, place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in correct position.

E. Do not field cut trusses.

F. Place headers and supports to frame openings. Frame openings between trusses with lumber as specified in Section 06 1100.

G. Install solid blocking at ends and at bearing points.

H. Installation Tolerances: Maximum 1/2 inch variation from true position.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Truss manufacture to inspect trusses after they have been erected, and sheathing, bridging, blocking are in place.

B. Remove and replace defective and damaged trusses, stiffeners and block- ing.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1753

SECTION 06 1800

GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Glued-laminated wood beams.2. Steel hardware and attachment devices.3. Preservative treatment of wood.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC) (www.aitc-glulam.org):1. 117 - Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of

Softwood Species, Design and Manufacturing Requirements.2. A190.1 - American National Standard, Structural Glued Laminated Tim-

ber.

B. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) (www.awpa.com) U1 - Use Category System - User Specification for Treated Wood.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.2. A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings

on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.

3. A325 - Standard Specification for High Strength Joints for Structural Steel Joints.

4. D2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions.

5. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Mate-rials.

D. Engineered Wood Association (APA) (www.apawood.org) - Certification pro-cedures.

E. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) (www.nist.gov) - Prod-uct Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1800

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing systems, sizes and spacing of members,

bearing and anchorage details, bracing, and framed openings.2. Product Data: Manufacturer's data including load tables.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section and certified by AITC

or APA in accordance with ANSI A190.1.2. Design and laminate members to AITC 117.

B. Design members under direct supervision of Professional Structural Engineer with experience in work of this Section, licensed in State of Oregon.

C. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units pro- duced by an AITC or APA licensed firm. 1. Factory mark each unit with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver beams individually wrapped in plastic coated paper covering, with water-resistant seams.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Boise Cascade Corporation. (www.bc.com)2. iLevel, by Weyerhaeuser. (www.weyerhaeuser.com)

3. Rosboro Lumber. (www.rosboro.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Lumber: 1. Refer to Structural Drawings. 2. Graded in accordance with NIST PS 20 and Structural Drawings.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives: ASTM D2559.

B. Steel Connectors and Brackets: ASTM A36/A36M, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, G90 coating class.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1800

C. Bolts: ASTM A325 galvanized steel.

D. Sealer: Manufacturer’s standard, penetrating type, clear, containing water repellent.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate in accordance with ANSI A190.1, with connections to greatest ex-tent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes.

B. Fabricate beams with camber built in. Do not camber cantilevered beams.

C. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated on Drawings.

D. Surface Finish: Satin Finish, manufacturer’s standard, dry appearance.

E. After trimming, apply sealer in accordance with AITC requirements.

F. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints fitted, welded, and ground smooth.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Erect members in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

B. Beams: 1. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.2. Provide temporary bracing to hold members in place until permanently

secured.3. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or unauthor-

ized modifications.4. Anchor securely in place with installed connectors, anchors and acces-

sories as indicated.

C. Installation Tolerances:1. Beams:

a. Maximum variation from true position: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.b. Maximum variation from plumb: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet,

noncumulative.c. Maximum variation from level or from indicated slopes: Plus or mi-

nus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 1800

SECTION 06 4000

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Interior door casings, window sills and aprons, and running base trim.2. Shop finishing.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 07 4646 - Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding. 4. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants. 5. Section 09 9100 - Painting.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) (www.awinet.org) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings:

a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, elevations, and details, includ-ing interface with adjacent work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver materials until proper protection can be provided, and until needed for installation.

B. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. C. Stack material and allow for air circulation within and around stacks.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4000

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: HVAC system complete and operational for minimum 7 days prior to installation of interior trim.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Interior Trim:1. Medium density fiberboard, pre-laminated, both sides.

2. Grade: Interior. 3. Finish: Faces pre-sanded, ready for opaque paint. 4. Content: made from recycled wood fiber with no urea formaldehyde

resins.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Type and size as required by conditions of use; plain steel for inte-rior use.

B. Adhesives: Waterproof, water based type, compatible with trim materials.

C. Sealant: Comply with requirements of Section 07 9200 for materials required for sealing.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Where field fitting is required, provide ample allowance for cutting.

B. Groove back of trim applied to flat substrate, except do not groove exposed ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation toler-ances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry.

B. Prior to installation, condition wood to average humidity that will prevail after installation.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4000

C. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated of finished or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrange- ments.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with AWI Section 1700, Premium Grade requirements.

B. Install in longest practical lengths.

C. Set plumb and level.

D. Miter ends, corners, and intersections. Refinish and seal cuts as recom-mended by manufacturer.

E. Scribe to adjacent construction with maximum 1/8 inch gaps.

F. Fasten to supporting construction, countersinking nails and fill surface flush and sans where face nailing is unavoidable.

G. Anchor woodwork to blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Se- cure to blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with wood- work.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4000

SECTION 06 4100

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Fabricated cabinet units.2. Plastic laminate countertops.3. Shop finishing.4. Cabinet hardware.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry.3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.4. Section 11 3100 - Appliances.

5. Division 22 - Plumbing: work incorporated in casework. 6. Division 26 - Electrical: work incorporated in casework.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) (www.awinet.org) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings:

a. Include dimensioned plan, sections, elevations, and details, includ-ing interface with adjacent work.

b. Designate wood species and finishes.2. Samples:

a. 3 x 3 inch plastic laminate samples showing available colors and finishes.

b. Each hardware component.c. 12 x 12 inch wood panel product samples.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.2. Cabinets certified under Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association

(KCMA) A161.1. 3. Plastic-Laminate Countertops certified under KCMA A161.2.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4100

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver materials until proper protection can be provided, and until needed for installation.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: HVAC system complete and operational for minimum 7 days prior to installation of cabinets.

B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construc- tion, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate con- struction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimen- sions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions by filed measure- ments after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Plastic Laminate:1. Wilsonart International, Inc. (www.wilsonart.com) 2. Formica Corp. (www.formica.com)2. Nevamar Co. (www.nevamar.com)

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Base and Upper Cabinet Units: 1. Lanz Cabinets. (www.lanzcabinets.com) 2. Huntwood Industries. (www.huntwood.com) 3. Brian’s Cabinets. (www.brianscabinets.com)

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Base and Upper Cabinet Units (Basis of Design): 1. Hearthstone series, “Whitehall” (Natural Alder). Euro Recessed Panel

cabinets with molded integrated finger pull.

B. Panel Products:1. Graded in accordance with AWI Section 200 requirements for quality

grade specified.2. Exposed and semi-exposed veneers: Natural Alder species, of quality

suitable for transparent finish.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4100

3. Panel core: Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, manufactured using low-emitting, urea formaldehyde-free binders.

C. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder; Class I tempered grade, AHA A135.4, minimum 1/8 inch thick,

D. Plastic Laminate Countertops (Basis of Design): High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL), NEMA LD-3. Wilsonart “Antique Topaz” 4863K-07.1. Horizontal surfaces:

a. Backing sheet: Grade BGF.b. Post-formed surfaces: Grade HGP.c. Acid resisting: Grade LGP.d. Other surfaces: Grade HGS.

2. Vertical surfaces:a. Backing sheet: Grade BLF.b. Cabinet liner: Grade CLS.c. Other surfaces: Grade VGP.

E. Plastic Laminate Shelving: 1. Melamine laminate: Grade VGL.

2. Melamine Colors: White.3. Finish: Matte.

F. Hardwood Lumber:1. Graded in accordance with AWI Section 100 requirements for quality

grade specified, average moisture content of 7 percent.2. Exposed and semi-exposed locations: Natural Alder species, of quality

suitable for transparent finish. a. Do not use two adjacent exposed faces that are noticeable dis- similar in color, grain, or natural character markings.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Type and size as required by conditions of use.

B. Adhesives: 1. Waterproof, water based type, compatible with backing and veneer or

laminate materials.

C. Hinges: Adjustable, concealed, self-closing.

D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated metal, full extension, self-closing guides; de-signed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; ball-bearing rollers complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011.

E. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.

2.4 FABRICATION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4100

A. Cabinets - Plastic Laminate Finish:1. Quality: AWI Section 400, Premium Grade.2. Type: Reveal overlay with 5/8 inch horizontal and vertical reveals.3. Semi-exposed surfaces: Plastic laminate.4. Fit exposed and semi-exposed panel edges with matching laminate

edging.5. Fabricate drawer bodies to full depth of drawer fronts less 1/2 inch.

B. Cabinets - Transparent Wood Finish:1. Quality: AWI Section 400, Premium Grade.2. Type: Reveal overlay with 5/8 inch horizontal and vertical reveals.3. Semi-exposed surfaces: Wood to match exposed surfaces.4. Fit exposed and semi-exposed panel edges with matching wood edges.5. Fabricate drawer bodies to full depth of drawer fronts less 1/2 inch.

C. Plastic Laminate Countertops:1. Quality: AWI Section 400, Premium Grade.2. Substrate: Particleboard not less than 3/4 inch thick.3. Locate end joints centered or symmetrical. Join sections with concealed

clamp fasteners. Locate plastic laminate butt joints minimum 2 feet away from sinks.

4. Sinks and Lavatories: Use Grade M-2 Exterior Glue particleboard or exte-rior grade plywood.

5. Provide holes and cutouts for mounting of sinks, trim, and accessories. 6. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic laminate backer sheet on underside of countertop substrate.

D. Cabinet Face Style: Frame and panel, 3/4 by 1-5/8 inch solid wood.

E. Cabinet Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch thick, with 1/4 inch thick veneer faced plywood center panels.

F. Cabinet Shelves: 3/4 inch thick particleboard or 5/8 inch thick plywood.

G. Shop assemble and finish for delivery to project site in units easily handled.

H. Prior to fabrication, field verify dimensions to ensure correct fit.

I. Apply plastic laminate in full uninterrupted sheets; fit corners and joints to hair-line. Slightly bevel arises. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of laminate faced surfaces.

J. Rabbet joinery: 1. Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed me-

chanical fasteners. 2. Rabbet tops, bottoms, and backs into end panels.

K. Where field fitting is required, provide ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site conditions.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4100

L. Provide cutouts and reinforcement for plumbing, electrical, appliances, and accessories. Prime paint surfaces of cut edges.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Transparent Finish System: 1. Finish system: AWI Section 1500, Premium Grade, CAB and Water Acrylic

Lacquer.2. Stain color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full color range.3. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installation, condition cabinets to average humidity that will prevail after installation.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of casework.

C. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or back- splashes.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with AWI Section 1700, Premium Grade requirements.

B. Set plumb, rigid and level, with a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.

C. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use con-cealed shims. Scribe and cut for accurate fit of cabinets abutting other work.

D. Install cabinets without distortion so door and drawers fit opening and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.

E. Adhere countertops, splashes, and skirts with beads of adhesive.

F. Fill joints between tops and splashes with sealant as specified in Section 07 9200; finish flush.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 06 4100

SECTION 07 1800

TRAFFIC COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Fluid applied polyurethane traffic coating over exterior plywood sub-

strate.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing. 3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C957 - Standard Specification for High-Solids Content, Cold Liquid-

Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing membrane With Integral Wearing Surface. 2. C1028-07e1 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coeffi- cient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build- ing Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Samples: 3 x 3 inch coating samples showing available colors.2. Product Data: Include product description and performance character-

istics.3. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

B. Mockup:

1. Size: at least 100 sq.ft. including surface profile, sealant joint, crash, flash-ing and juncture details, and slip resistance.

2. Show coating types with other components listed.3. Locate where directed.4. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 1800

1. Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.2. Licensed or certified by coating system manufacturer.

B. Pre-Installation Conference:1. Convene at site prior to beginning work of this Section.2. Attendance: Contractor, waterproofing applicator, waterproofing

manufacturer's representative, and related trades.3. Review and discuss Contract Documents, waterproofing system manu-

facturer's literature, job conditions, scheduling, and other matters affect-ing application as appropriate.

4. Tour representative areas of waterproofing substrates, and discuss sub-strate construction, related items, work conditions, and materials com-patibility.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials at minimum 60 degrees F; prevent damage to containers. Do not store for long periods in direct sunlight.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:1. Do not apply coating when surface temperature is less than 50 degrees

F or if precipitation is imminent.2. Do not apply unless surfaces to receive coating are dry.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s 5 year warranty providing coverage against water leakage through coating system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Pli-Dek Systems, Inc., ICC-ES ESR-2097. (www.plidek.com)2. BASF Building Systems, Sonoguard. (www.buildingsystems.basf.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Coating System: 1. Sheet flashing: Elastomeric mat material, as recommended by coating

manufacturer.2. Admixture: As required by coating manufacturer.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 1800

3. Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand, uniformly graded, minimum 6.5 hardness on Moh's scale.

4. Coating System: Moisture curing polyurethane or composite mixture, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

5. Sealer: As recommended by coating system manufacturer.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Lath: Expanded metal, hot dipped, or as required by coating manu- facturer. B. Flashing: Galvanized sheet metal, 26 gauge minimum. C. Joint Sealants: Refer to manufacturer for compatible products.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces; remove loose and foreign matter that could impede adhe-sion or performance of coating.

B. All seams to be caulked. Reinforce seams between plywood sheets and be-tween flashing and deck with reinforcing fabric.

C. All surfaces shall be sloped for positive drainage, 1/4 inch per linear foot, minimum, sloped away from building.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply coating system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install flashing at intersection of horizontal and vertical planes.

C. Apply base coats and top coats to minimum thickness required by manufac-turer.

D. Before first top coat cures, broadcast aggregate uniformly at rate of 10 to 15 pounds per square, then backroll into the coating to fully encapsulate. Se-lect proper amount of aggregates to promote slip resistance.

E. After curing, remove excess aggregate and apply second top coat.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Clean area around damaged or leaking coatings; apply additional coating material per manufacturer’s requirements.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 1800

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not allow traffic on coated surfaces until cured.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 1800

SECTION 07 1900

WATER REPELLENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Clear water repellent coating applied to exterior cast-in-place con-

crete, concrete masonry surfaces.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.2. D4261 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry

for Coating.3. E96/E96M - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Mate-

rials.4. E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage

Through Masonry. 5. C140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units, Absorption.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Include product description and performance character-

istics.2. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section, and approved by manufacturer for application of manufacturer’s products.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply coating if:1. Ambient or surface temperature is below freezing.2. Possibility of entrapped or frozen water exists.3. Rain is expected during next 72 hours.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 1900

B. Do not apply during high winds.

C. Prevent overspray onto adjacent materials, including glass, metal, plastic, and other non-porous substrates.

1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Allow joint sealants to cure minimum 48 hours after their application before applying coating.

B. Allow water repellent to cure minimum 5 days after application before apply-ing joint sealers to coated surfaces.

C. Allow concrete and masonry mortar joints to cure for minimum of 28 days.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s 10 year warranty providing coverage against failure of coating to repel water.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Protectosil. (www.protectosil.com); Chem-Trete PB VOC.2. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. (www.lmcc.com); Hydroblock for

CMU, Petrotex for concrete floors. 3. Pecora Corp. (www.pecora.com); KlereSeal 910.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Water Repellent:1. Water based.2. Contain minimum 40 percent silane/ siloxane by weight.3. Produce water repellent effect without altering color or texture of sub-

strate.4. Water repellency: Minimum 80 percent reduction in water absorption

from control sample, tested to ASTM E514/E514M.5. Water vapor transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction from control

sample, tested to ASTM E96/E96M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 1900

A. Clean surfaces; remove loose and foreign matter that could impede pene-tration or performance of coating. Test for moisture content according to re-pellent manufacturer’s instructions to ensure dry surface.

B. Cover adjoining surfaces and plantings if there is a possibility of water repel- lent being deposited on surfaces.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Follow manufacturer's instructions, and comply with manufacturer’s instruc-tions for limitations on drying time between coats.

B. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise determined by testing of mockup.

C. Apply in two uniform, continuous coats.

D. Apply to following surfaces: cast-in-place concrete, concrete unit masonry.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. After coating has dried, test surfaces with water spray; reapply to any areas showing water absorption.

3.4 CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces solid or damaged by application, as work progresses, complying with manufacturer’s written cleaning instructions.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 1900

SECTION 07 2113

BOARD INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Board insulation at exterior walls and at perimeter of foundation walls.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insu-

lation.2. C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation.3. C1303 - Standard Test Method for Estimating the Long-Term Change in

Thermal Resistance of Unfaced Rigid Closed Cell Plastic Foams by Slicing and Scaling Under Controlled Laboratory Conditions.

4. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build-ing Materials.

5. E96/E96M - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Mate-rials.

6. E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C.

B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) (www.nrca.net) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

C. Factory Mutual Insurance Co. (FM) (www.fmglobal.com) Property Loss Pre-vention Data Sheet 1-28 - Design Wind Loads.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing

laboratory that insulation meets fire hazard classification requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2113

A. Store insulation in clean, dry, sheltered area, off ground or floor, until used. Protect against wetting and moisture absorption.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Polystyrene Insulation:1. Owens Corning. (www.owenscorning.com)

2. Dow Chemical Co. (www.dowbuildingmaterials.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Under-slab and Wall Board Insulation:1. ASTM C578, Type IV, closed cell extruded polystyrene foam.2. Minimum compressive strength: 25 PSI. 3. Thermal resistance: Minimum R value of 5, per inch, calculated in ac-

cordance with ASTM C1303.4. Water vapor permeance: Maximum 1.5 perms, tested to ASTM E96.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: 1. Type recommended by insulation manufacturer.

B. Tape: Minimum 2 inches wide, pressure sensitive, waterproof.

C. Impale Fasteners: 1. Steel impaling fasteners on metal base with lock washers, length to suit

insulation thickness.2. Adhesive: Type recommended by fastener manufacturer.

D. Metal Clips: Galvanized steel, L-shaped, 2 inches long.

E. Fasteners: Type best suited to application, hot-dip galvanized or fluoropoly-mer coated steel. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel, type and length suited to project conditions, with galvanized steel plates.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Substrate:1. Remove protrusions flush with adjacent surface.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2113

2. Remove dirt, dust, oil, grease, and other materials that could impair ad-hesion.

3.2 INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION

A. Apply adhesive in full bed 1/8 inch thick.

B. Install boards on foundation wall perimeter, horizontally.

C. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding.

D. Stagger end joints.

E. Butt edges and ends to adjacent boards and at perimeter.

F. Extend boards over control joints, unbonded to foundation on one side of joint.

G. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

3.3 INSTALLATION AT WALLS

A. Place impale fasteners within 4 inches of edges of boards and maximum 24 inches on center.

B. Apply insulation and secure with lock washers.

C. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent boards and at pe-rimeter.

D. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.

E. Tape seal to perimeter and at joints between insulation pieces.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Surface Flatness of Insulation: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2113

SECTION 07 2115

BATT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Batt insulation in exterior wall and roof assemblies.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation

for Wood Frame and Light Construction Buildings.2. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build-

ing Materials.3. E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube

Furnace at 750 Degrees C.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing

laboratory that insulation meets fire hazard classification requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Hazard Classification:1. Noncombustible, tested to ASTM E136.2. Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less, tested to ASTM

E84.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store insulation in clean, dry, sheltered area, off ground or floor, until used. Protect against wetting and moisture absorption.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install until insulation until building is substantially water and weather tight.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2115

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Johns Manville. (www.jm.com)2. Knauf Insulation. (www.knaufusa.com)3. Owens Corning. (www.owenscorning.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Thermal Batt Insulation:1. Type: ASTM C665, glass fiber composition.2. Facing: Unfaced.3. Thermal resistance:

a. 3-1/2 inches thick: R-value of 11.00.b. 3-5/8 inches thick: R-value of 13.00.c. 6-1/4 inches thick: R-value of 19.00.d. 6-1/2 inches thick: R-value of 22.0.e. 8-1/2 inches thick: R-value of 25.0.f. 9 inches thick: R-value of 26.0.g. 10 inches thick: R-value of 30.00.h. 12 inches thick: R-value of 38.00.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Minimum 2 inches wide, pressure sensitive, waterproof.

B. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel staples or nails, type best suited to appli-cation, minimum 5/8 inch penetration into framing.

C. Impale Fasteners: Steel impaling fasteners on metal base with lock washers, length to suit insulation thickness.

D. Wire Mesh: Hexagonal steel wire, galvanized.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Friction fit between framing members.

B. Staple or nail in place at maximum 12 inches on center.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2115

C. Apply with vapor barrier facing towards exterior of structure.

D. Tape seal lapped flanges, butt ends, and tears and holes in facings.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2115

SECTION 07 2600

VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sheet and sealant materials for controlling vapor diffusion at slab on-

grade.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheet-

ing.2. D1709 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by

the Free-Falling Dart Method.3. E96/E96M - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Mate-

rials.4. E154 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact

with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover.5. E1745 - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Con-

tact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Include product description and performance character-

istics.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Raven Industries; VaporBlock. (www.ravenefd.com)2. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Perminator. (www.wrmeadows.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2600

A. Under-slab Vapor Retarder:1. Exceed requirements of ASTM E1745, Class A.2. Description: Reinforced three ply polyethylene film.3. Thickness: 15 mils.4. Water vapor permeance: Maximum .003, tested to ASTM E96.5. Tensile strength: Minimum 80 pound-force per inch dry and minimum 90

pound-force per inch after soak, tested to ASTM D882.6. Puncture resistance: Minimum 4000 grams, tested to ASTM D1709.8. Chemical resistance: Unaffected, tested to ASTM E154.9. Life expectancy: Indefinite, tested to ASTM E154.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: 1. Compatible with vapor retarder and substrate, permanently non hard-

ening.

B. Joint Tape: Minimum 2 inches wide, pressure sensitive, waterproof, compati-ble with vapor retarder, and as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - UNDER SLABS ON GRADE

A. Remove sharp rocks and objects that could puncture vapor retarder.

B. Install vapor retarder without tears, voids, and holes.

C. Lap ends and edges minimum 6 inches over adjacent sheets.

D. Seal all protrusions with boot or collar material over initial layer of vapor retar- der, sealed to main material with continuous tape.

E. Tape seal lapped joints, tears, holes, perimeter, and penetrations through va-por retarder.

3.2 REPAIR

A. Inspect vapor retarder for damage just prior to covering.

B. Clean damaged areas and cover with additional vapor retarder material cut minimum 6 inches larger than damaged area on all sides. Seal to main vapor retarder with continuous tape.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2600

SECTION 07 2800

WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sheet materials for controlling air or moisture movement at exterior wall

assemblies.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. D41 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Properties in Tension.2. D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Saturated Organic Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing.3. D412 - Standard Test Method for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.4. D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bitu-

minous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

5. E96/E96M - Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Mate-rials.

6. E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.7. E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier

Assemblies.8. E1677 - Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Build-

ing Walls

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide continuous barrier to moisture infiltration, air infiltration and exfiltration, flashed to discharge incidental condensation and water penetration.

B. Mockup:1. Construct mockup of typical exterior wall, minimum 8 feet wide x 8 feet

high.2. Incorporate back-up construction, weather barrier, typical opening,

flashings, and critical junctions.3. Locate where directed.4. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2800

C. Pre-Installation Conference:1. Convene at site 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this Section.2. Attendance: Architect, Contractor, weather barrier installer, and related

trades whose work follows or affects moisture barrier.3. Review and discuss:

a. Surface preparation, minimum substrate curing period, and installa-tion procedures.

b. Special details and flashings.c. Sequence of construction, responsibilities, and schedule for subse-

quent operations.d. Mock-up requirements.e. Inspection, protection, and repair procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data.2. Samples: 6 x 6 inch weather barrier samples.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Sheet Moisture Barriers:1. DuPont. (www.tyvek.com) 2. Griffolyn, Division of Reef Industries. (www.reefindustries.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Weather Barrier: 1. Type: Non-perforated, nonwoven, non-absorbing, breathable mem- brane that resists air flow, bulk water and wind driven rain and channels water and moisture to the outside of the building envelope.

2. Description: Spunbonded polyolefin membrane.3. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. 4. Water vapor transmission: 28 perms when tested in accordance to ASTM

E96. 5. Water penetration resistance: Minimum 280 cm when tested in

accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 6. Air resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in

accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460 7. Tensile Strength: Minimum 38/35 lbs/inch, when tested in accordance

with ASTM D882, Method A. 8. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2800

D1117.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Minimum 2 inches wide, pressure sensitive, waterproof, compatible with weather barrier.

B. Flashing Sheet: Type recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

C. Primer: Type recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive weather barrier; remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion or performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION - SHEET WEATHER BARRIERS

A. Provide complete and continuous barrier.

B. Apply primer when required by manufacturer.

C. Install barrier without tears, voids, and holes.

D. Begin application at low point; weatherlap succeeding courses minimum 4 inches.

E. Lap ends 6 inches minimum. Tape seal lapped ends and edges.

F. Press to full bond with substrate without voids, wrinkles, bridging, or fishmouths.

G. Seal to door and window frames, around penetrations, and at perimeter.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect weather barrier for damage just prior to covering.

B. Clean damaged areas and cover with additional weather barrier material minimum 6 inches larger than damaged area on all sides.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 2800

SECTION 07 4213

METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Preformed metal wall panel system.2. Preformed column cover panel system.3. Flashings, trim, anchorage, and accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) (www.asce.org) 7 - Minimum De-sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org):1. 620 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings

on Coil Coated Architectural Aluminum Substrates.2. 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings

on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.

3. 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Pro-cedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extru-sions and Panels.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

2. A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

4. E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Win-dows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Design system to withstand:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4213

1. Live loads in accordance with Building Code.2. Minimum wind pressures in accordance with 2010 OSSC Building Code,

with maximum allowable deflection, tested in accordance with ASTM E330.

3. Movement caused by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F and a surface temperature range of 160 degrees F.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Show configuration of panels, trim members, and clo-

sures.2. Product Data: Show system components including panels, trim, and ac-

cessories.3. Samples:

a. 3 x 3 inch finish samples showing available colors on representative backing.

b. After color selection, submit 6 inch long panel samples in selected color.

4. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect panels from contact with materials that could cause staining or dis-coloration of finish.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install panels on wet or frozen substrate.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish minimum manufacturer’s 20 year warranty providing coverage against chipping, cracking, fading, or delamination of painted panel finish.

B. Furnish minimum manufacturer's 20 year warranty providing coverage against rupture, perforation, or structural failure of aluminum-zinc alloy coated panels.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4213

1. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp. (www.metalsales.us.com) 2. Petersen Aluminum Corp. (www.pac-clad.com) 3. AEP-Span. (www.aep-span.com) 4. Centria Architectural Systems. (www.centria.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Quality, G90 coating class.

B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A792, Commercial Quality, AZ55 aluminum-zinc alloy coating.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 300 Series stainless steel, type best suited to application; head color to match panels where exposed, with neoprene gasketed washers.

B. Panel Clips: Hot-dip galvanized steel, thermally responsive, designed to fit be-tween two adjacent panels and secure both panels.

C. Panel End Closures: Sponge neoprene, cut to fit panel configuration, mini-mum 1 inch depth.

D. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate panels from minimum 24 gage galvanized coating steel sheet, 0.032 inch.

B. Wall Panel Profile: flush panel, 12 inches wide x 1 inch minimum depth with interlocking edges.

C. Column Wrap Profile: 20 gage minimum, 1 inch deep column cover or wall panel with fully-sealed, interlocking edges.

D. Trim: Profiles as indicated or as required, fabricated from same material as panels.

E. Roll form panels and trim to required profiles in longest practical lengths.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Panels and Trim: fluoropolymer coating containing minimum 70 percent PVDF resins applied to sheets in coil form, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4213

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Install aligned, level, and plumb.

C. Fasten panels to supports in concealed locations.

D. Locate panel joints over supports.

E. Lap end joints 4 inches minimum.

F. Install trim to maintain visual continuity of system.

G. Install joint sealers and gaskets to prevent water penetration.

H. Installation Tolerances:1. Variation from location: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.2. Variation from plane: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Touch up field cuts and abrasions on finished surfaces to match factory finish.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4213

SECTION 07 4646

MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Mineral-fiber cement siding, trim, and soffits. 2. Trim, anchorage, and accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.4. Section 09 9100 - Painting.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C1186 - Standard Specification for Flat, Non-Asbestos, Fiber-Cement

Sheets.2. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build-

ing Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Indicate profiles, sizes, fastening methods, surface texture,

and finish.2. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

B. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing

laboratory that siding meets fire hazard classification requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s 25 year warranty providing coverage against crack-ing, rotting, or delamination of siding.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4646

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. CertainTeed Corp. (www.certainteed.com) 2. James Hardie Building Products. (www.jameshardie.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Mineral-Fiber Cement Siding:1. ASTM C1186, Grade II, Type A; formulated from portland cement,

ground sand, cellulose fibers, additives, and water; formed under pres-sure to required profile.

2. Finish: Factory prime painted.3. Fire hazard classification: Class A, tested to ASTM E84.4. Lap siding:

a. Profile: 6 inchesb. Size: 7.25 inches high x 12 feet long.c. Thickness: 5/16 inch.d. Surface texture: Smooth.

5. Soffits:a. Profile: 12 inchesb. Size: Soffit width x maximum practical length.c. Thickness: 1/4 inch.d. Surface texture: Smooth.e. Venting: Vented.

6. Trim:a. Profile: Variesb. Size: 4 inches wide x maximum practical length.c. Thickness: 3/4 inch.d. Surface texture: Smooth.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Type recommended by siding manufacturer; hot-dip galvanized steel.

B. Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim: Specified in Section 07 6200.

C. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - LAP SIDING

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4646

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install siding with 6 inch exposure.

C. Lap siding for natural water shed.

D. Butt joints tight.

E. Set plumb and level.

F. Cut siding to fit at perimeter and around penetrations with maximum 1/4 inch gaps. Smooth cut edges.

G. Position cut ends over bearing surfaces.

H. Install corner strips, closures, and trim.

I. Fasten at maximum 12 inches on center. Blind nail except trim.

J. Install metal flashings at internal and external corners, sills, and heads of wall openings. Fasten at 12 inches on center maximum.

K. Apply joint sealer between siding and trim and adjacent surfaces as speci-fied in Section 07 9200. Ensure watertight condition.

3.2 INSTALLATION - SOFFITS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install sheets vertically with edges and ends over firm bearing.

C. Butt joints tight.

D. Set plumb and level.

E. Cut siding to fit at perimeter and around penetrations with maximum 1/4 inch gaps. Smooth cut edges.

F. Install corner strips, closures, and trim.

G. Fasten at maximum 12 inches on center in orderly fastening pattern.

H. Install metal flashings at internal and external corners, sills, and heads of wall openings. Fasten at 12 inches on center maximum.

I. Apply joint sealer between siding and trim and adjacent surfaces as speci-fied in Section 07 9200.

3.3 INSTALLATION - TRIM

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4646

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Butt joints tight.

C. Set plumb and level.

D. Cut to fit at perimeter and around penetrations with maximum 1/4 inch gaps. Smooth cut edges.

E. Fasten at maximum 16 inches on center.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 4646

SECTION 07 5400

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Rigid roof insulation.2. Mechanically fastened single ply membrane roofing.3. Base flashings.4. Walkway pads.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing.3. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) (www.asce.org) 7 - Minimum De-sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.2. C578 - Standard Specification for Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation.3. C1303 - Standard Test Method for Estimating the Long-Term Change in

Thermal Resistance of Unfaced Rigid Closed Cell Plastic Foams by Slicing and Scaling Under Controlled Laboratory Conditions.

4. C1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.

5. D4434 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing.6. D6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet

Roofing.7. E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.8. E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of

Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

C. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) (www.nrca.net) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Design roofing system to resist minimum wind loads in accordance with 2010 OSSC Building Code.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 5400

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate:

a. Setting plan for insulation.b. Roof slopes.c. Layout of seams.d. Base flashing, termination, and special details.e. Fastener types and locations.

2. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications, installation instruc-tions, and general recommendations for each product.

3. Samples:a. Fastener plate, 12 inches long.b. Walkway pad.

4. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

B. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing

laboratory that roofing system meets fire hazard and windstorm classifi-cation requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum 10 years experience in work of this Section.2. Licensed or certified by roofing materials manufacturer.

B. Roofing System: 1. Class A Fire Hazard Classification, tested to ASTM E108.

C. Pre-Installation Conference:1. Convene at site prior to beginning work of this Section.2. Attendance: Contractor, roofing applicator, roofing manufacturer's rep-

resentative, and related trades.3. Review and discuss: Contract Documents, roofing system manufacturer's

literature, project conditions, scheduling, and other matters affecting application.

4. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates; discuss substrate con-struction, related work, work conditions, and materials compatibility.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials, other than membrane, in protected, dry area, between 60 and 80 degrees F until used; provide proper ventilation.

B. Protect sheet goods from damage and wetting.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 5400

A. Do not apply roofing to damp or frozen substrate.

B. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather or at temperatures below 40 degrees F, or above 100 degrees F or if freezing weather is anticipated within 24 hours after application. Do not use frozen materials.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s 5 year warranty providing coverage against water leakage through roofing system including flashings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - TPO Roofing:1. Carlisle Syntec, Inc. (www.carlisle-syntec.com) 2. Firestone Building Products Co. (www.firestonebpco.com) 3. GAF Materials Corp. (www.gaf.com) 4. Genflex Roofing Systems. (www.genflex.com) 5. Durolast Roofing, Inc. (www.duro-last.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Rigid Insulation: 1. Type: ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 1, rigid polyisocyanurate faced both

sides with aluminum foil facings.2. Provide board tapered as indicated on plans.

B. Roof Membrane: 1. Type: ASTM D6878, thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO), ultraviolet resistant,

reinforced.2. Size: Maximum sheet size permitted by application and job conditions.3. Thickness: 60 mils.4. Color: White.

C. Flashing Sheet: Manufacturer's standard flashing sheet, color to match mem-brane.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Batten Strips or Fastener Plates: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Accessories: By manufacturer of roofing system, including adhesives, tapes, solvents, sealants, water cutoff mastic, and prefabricated pipe flashings.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 5400

C. Walkway Pads: Preformed resilient pads, recommended by roofing manufac-turer, 1/4 inch thick.

D. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel, approved by roofing system manufacturer, type and length suited to project conditions.

E. Insulation Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel, ap-proved by FM and roofing system manufacturer, type and length suited to project conditions, with plastic plates.

F. Nailers and Curbs: 1. Preservative treated wood, specified in Section 06 1100.2. Nailers: 3-1/2 inch face dimension x insulation thickness.

G. Metal Flashings: Specified in Section 07 6200.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove projections that could puncture membrane from substrate.

B. Clean substrate of loose and foreign material, oil, and grease.

C. Complete roof penetrations and preparation for drains, flashings, and other penetrations prior to beginning roofing.

D. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install roofing system in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's in-structions, NRCA Manual, and approved Shop Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. Apply [base layer] with long edges continuous to deck. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ROOF MEMBRANE

A. Position sheets without stretching; minimize wrinkles. Allow membrane to relax before proceeding.

B. Provide minimum 5-1/2 inch lap at joints between adjacent sheets.

C. Splice sheets by solvent welding or heat welding method.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 5400

D. Attach membrane to decking with batten strips or fastener plates.

E. Fasten membrane to perimeter nailers with fasteners spaced 6 inches on cen-ter maximum.

F. Daily Seal: 1. Ensure that water does not flow beneath completed sections of roof. 2. Temporarily seal loose edge of membrane with night seal when weather

is threatening.3. When work is resumed, pull sheet free before continuing installation.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLASHINGS

A. Construct in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's standard details.

B. Juncture of Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces:1. Use longest practical length flashing to minimize joints.2. Complete splice between flashing and main roof sheet before bonding

flashing to vertical surface. Extend splice 3 inches beyond fasteners that attach membrane to horizontal surface.

3. Adhere flashing to substrate with full bed of adhesive.4. Fasten top of flashing at 12 inches on center maximum, under metal

flashing.

C. Penetrations through Membrane:1. Flash pipe with premolded pipe flashings wherever possible.2. Where molded pipe flashings cannot be installed, use field fabricated

pipe seals.3. Seal clusters of pipes and unusually shaped penetrations with minimum 2

inch high flashing containing pourable sealer.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAY PADS

A. Clean underside of pad; set pads in full adhesive bed.

B. Leave 2 inch space between pieces.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 5400

SECTION 07 6100

SHEET METAL ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Galvanized steel roofing.2. Underlayment.3. Flashings, trim, and accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 06 1100 - Framing and Sheathing.3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) (www.asce.org) 7 - Minimum De-sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.2. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

3. A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

4. E1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Manufacturer’s Association International (SMACNA) (www.smacna.org) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements; design roof system to withstand:1. Live and dead loads in accordance with Building Code.2. Minimum wind pressures in accordance with 2010 OSSC Building Code,

with maximum allowable deflection tested in accordance with ASTM E1592.

3. Movement caused by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F and a surface temperature range of 160 degrees F.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6100

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned layout showing locations of seams,

accessories, gage of metal, fastening methods, provisions for expansion and contraction, and details of joints.

2. Samples: Each profile proposed for use.3. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not form sheet metal at ambient temperatures less than 50 degrees F.

B. Do not apply underlayment at ambient or surface temperatures less than 40 degrees F or on wet or frozen substrate.

C. Do not install roofing on wet or frozen substrate.

1.7 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s warranty providing coverage against water leakage through roofing system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp. (www.metalsales.us.com) 2. Petersen Aluminum Corp. (www.pac-clad.com) 3. AEP-Span. (www.aep-span.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Precoated Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Quality, G90 coating class, gage core

steel unless noted otherwise.2. Finish: Precoated with fluoropolymer coating containing minimum 70

percent PVDF resins, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6100

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Underlayment: ASTM D226, asphalt impregnated, non perforated.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.

C. Solder: ASTM B32.

D. Fasteners: Same material and finish as sheet metal, with neoprene gasketed washers where exposed.

E. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components in accordance with SMACNA Manual.

B. Form roofing to provide 1-3/4 inch minimum height, single locked standing seams spaced nominally 12 inches on center.

C. Turn up sides of panels and extend 1 inch above finished seam height.

D. Form cross seams with 3/4 inch fold under on lower end and 2 inch fold on upper end.

E. Form panels and caps in longest practical length.

F. Pre tin edges of sheet.

G. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet metal.

H. Hem exposed edges on underside1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

I. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion and defects.

J. Solder shop formed metal joints. After soldering, remove flux and excess sol-der and clean joints.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT

A. Starting at low edge, apply one ply of underlayment horizontally over sub-strate.

B. Weather lap each strip 6 inches minimum over previous strip.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6100

C. Lap ends 6 inches minimum.

D. Fasten top of each strip under overlapping strip to hold strip in position until roofing panels are installed.

E. Provide 18 inch weave pattern at valleys.

F. Lap underlayment minimum 12 inches over hips and ridges from both sides. Apply 36 inch wide strip centered lengthwise over ridge. Nail at 12 inches on center on each side.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING

A. Conform to SMACNA Manual.

B. Apply roofing panels beginning at low edge of roof.

C. Extend edge strip up under panels 4 inches minimum and secure at maxi-mum 4 inches on center, located 1 inch down from upper edge of strips. Hook lower end of first panels over edge strip.

D. At end joints between panels, hook fold on lower end of upper pan into fold on upper end of underlying pan.

E. Stagger end joints of adjacent panels.

F. Form seams to single locked flat seam profile.

G. Fit flashings with square corners and surfaces true, aligned, and accurate to required profiles.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6100

SECTION 07 6200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Copings.2. Edge flashings.3. Downspouts and scuppers.4. Counterflashings over membrane roof base flashings.6. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and utility penetrations.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 07 1800 - Traffic Coatings. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org):1. 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.2. 620 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings

on Coil Coated Architectural Aluminum Substrates.3. 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings

on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.

4. 2604/5 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Ex-trusions and Panels.

B. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI) (www.spri.org) ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.2. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

3. A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

4. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6200

5. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Manufacturer’s Association International (SMACNA) (www.smacna.org) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Show locations, types and thicknesses of metal, profiles,

dimensions, fastening methods, provisions for expansion and contrac-tion, and joint details.

2. Samples: a. Each flashing and trim profile, minimum 12 inches long. Include

corners where applicable.b. 3 x 3 inch prefinished metal samples showing available colors.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Design, fabricate, and install copings and/or edge flashings in accordance with ANSI/SPRI ES-1.

C. Conform to SMACNA Manual for nominal sizing of scuppers and downspouts for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 50 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Sheet:1. ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Quality, G90 coating class, 26 gage core

steel unless noted otherwise.2. Where sheet metal is to be painted, apply phosphate film at factory.

B. Precoated Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Quality, G90 coating class, 26 gage core

steel unless noted otherwise.

2. Finish: Precoated with fluoropolymer coating, containing minimum 70 percent PVDF resins, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

C. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A792/A792M, Commercial Quality, AZ50 aluminum-zinc alloy coating, 26 gage core steel unless noted otherwise.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6200

D. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, 2D conventional annealed finish, 0.015 inch thick.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Solder: ASTM B32.

B. Fasteners: Same material and finish as sheet metal, with neoprene gasketed washers where exposed.

C. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components in accordance with SMACNA Manual.

B. Profiles:1. Downspouts: SMACNA, rectangular or square.2. Fabricate end caps, downspout outlets and headers, straps, brackets,

and downspout strainers in profile to suit gutters and downspouts.

C. Solder shop formed joints except at prefinished metal. After soldering, remove flux and wash clean.

D. Fabricate corners in single units with minimum 18 inch long legs.

E. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.

F. Form sections accurate to size and shape, square and free from distortion and defects.

F. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction in sheet metal:1. Sheet metal:

a. Provide expansion joints in sheet metal exceeding 15 feet in run-ning length.

b. Place expansion joints at 10 feet on center maximum and maxi-mum 2 feet from corners and intersections.

2. Joint width: Consistent with types and sizes of materials, minimum width 1/4 inch.

G. Fabricate expansion joints in edge flashings with cover plates formed to flash-ing profile and minimum 4 inches long.

H. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum 3/4 inch wide flat lock seams; lap in direction of water flow.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6200

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install flashing and sheet metal as indicated and in accordance with SMACNA Manual.

B. Install cleats and starter strips before starting installation of sheet metal.

C. Expansion Joints in Edge Flashings:1. Seal expansion space between ends of flashing sections.2. Apply continuous bead of joint sealer between cover plate and flashing

sections at each end.

D. Secure flashings with concealed fasteners where possible.

E. Apply plastic cement between metal and bituminous flashings.

F. Fit flashings tight, with square corners and surfaces true and straight.

G. Seam and seal field joints.

H. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous coating or non-absorptive gaskets.

I. Reglets:1. Install reglets true to line and level. Seal top of surface mounted reglet

with joint sealer.2. Install flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure with lead or plastic

wedges at 9 inches on center maximum. Seal remaining space with joint sealer.

J. Downspouts:1. Secure with straps spaced maximum 8 feet on center and within 2 feet

of ends and elbows.2. Flash downspouts minimum 3 inches into gutters or conductor heads

and fasten.3. Flash upper sections into lower sections minimum 2 inches at joints; fas-

ten sections together.

K. Apply joint sealers as specified in Section 07 9200.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean sheet metal; remove slag, flux, stains, spots, and minor abrasions with-out etching surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 6200

SECTION 07 8400

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Firestopping perimeter of and penetrations through fire and smoke rated

assemblies.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration

Firestops.2. E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.3. E2307 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perime-

ter Fire Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-Story Test Appara-tus.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) (www.ul.com):1. 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.2. 2079 - Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide continuous protection against passage of heat, fire, smoke, and gases at perimeter of and penetrations through rated assemblies.

B. Joint systems in and in between Fire-Resistance Rated Constructions shall have assembly ratings equalling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of the construction that they join.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data:

a. Firestopping schedule; prepare in tabular format and identify:1) Type of assembly receiving firestop and required fire rating.2) Type of penetrating item.3) Proposed firestop system.

b. Include UL or equivalent details for each firestop system.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 8400

2. Test Reports: Indicate conformance with ASTM E814, ASTM E1966, ASTM E2307, UL 1479, or UL 2079.

B. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Indicate conformance of installed systems

with specified requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Firestopping: Fire resistance rating equivalent to adjacent construction; tested to ASTM E814, ASTM E1966, ASTM E2307, UL 1479, or UL 2079.

C. Sealers: Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content as follows:1. Sealers: 250 grams per liter.2. Primers for non-porous substrates: 250 grams per liter.3. Primers for porous substrates: 775 grams per liter.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply sealants, mortars, or putties when temperature of substrate ma-terial and surrounding air is below 40 degrees F or is anticipated to drop be-low that temperature within 24 hours after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Hilti, Inc. (www.us.hilti.com) 2. 3M Fire Protective Products. (www.3m.com) 3. Tremco, Inc. (www.tremcosealants.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping: One or more of the following:1. Silicone elastomer compound: Single or multiple component, low modu-

lus, moisture curing silicone sealant.2. Ceramic sealant: Single component, moisture curing ceramic sealant.3. Intumescent sealant: Single component, water based intumescent seal-

ant.4. Acrylic sealant: Single component acrylic sealant, suitable for painting.5. Putty: Single component ceramic fiber base putty or intumescent elas-

tomer putty that expands on exposure to surface heat gain.6. Mortar: Hydraulic cementitious mortar.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 8400

7. Pillows or blocks: Formed intumescent or mineral fiber pillows or blocks.8. Intumescent strips: Solvent free intumescent wrap strips.9. Mechanical devices: Incombustible fillers or silicone elastomer covered

with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.

10. Cast-in-place devices: Containing intumescent material and smoke/water seals.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Forming and Damming Materials: As recommended by firestopping manu-facturer for intended use.1. Permanent: Mineral fiber board, mineral fiber matting, or mineral fiber

putty.2. Temporary: Plywood, particle board, or other.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare openings to receive firestopping as directed by manufacturer:1. Remove incidental and loose materials from penetration opening.2. Remove free liquids and oil from involved surfaces and penetration

components.3. Install damming materials to accommodate and ensure proper thick-

ness and fire rating requirements and provide containment during instal-lation.

4. Remove combustible materials and materials not intended for final penetration seal system.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install firestopping at perimeter of and penetrations through fire and smoke rated assemblies.

B. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required ratings.

D. Compress fibered material to achieve a density of 40 percent of its uncom-pressed density.

E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimi-lar materials.

F. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 8400

G. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.

H. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, flush appearance.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 8400

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Joint backup materials.2. Joint sealers.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 04 2000 - Concrete Masonry Units. 3. Section 08 1114 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 4. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 5. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C510 - Standard Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single- or

Multicomponent Joint Sealants.2. C719 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric

Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement.3. C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint

Sealants.4. C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds.5. C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.6. C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.7. C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.8. C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint

Sealants.9. C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use

with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.10. C1472 - Standard Guide for Calculating movement and Other Effects

When Establishing Sealant Joint Width.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Indicate sealers, primers, backup materials, bond break-

ers, and accessories proposed for use.2. Samples:

a. 1/2 x 1/2 x 3 inch long joint sealer samples showing available colors.b. 6 inch long joint backup material samples.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 9200

3. Warranty: Sample warranty form. 4. SWRI Validation Certificate: Evidence that each exterior elastomeric sealant has been validated by the Sealant Weatherproofing Restoration Institute’s program.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Laboratory Pre-Construction Testing:1. Obtain representative samples of actual substrate materials.2. Test sealers and accessories for following:

a. Adhesion: Test to ASTM C794 and ASTM C719; determine surface preparation and required primer.

b. Compatibility: Test to ASTM C1087; determine that materials in con-tact with sealers do not adversely affect sealant materials or seal-ant color.

c. Staining: Test to ASTM D2203, ASTM C510, or ASTM C1248; determine that sealants will not stain joint substrates.

d. Pre-construction testing is not required when sealant manufacturer furnishes data acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for materials matching those of this Project.

D. Field Pre-Construction Testing: Test each joint sealer and joint substrate before beginning work of this Section:1. Install sealers in mockups using joint preparation methods and materials

recommended by sealer manufacturer.2. Install field-test joints in an inconspicuous location.3. Test sealers using manufacturer's standard field adhesion test; verify joint

preparation and primer required to obtain optimum adhesion of seal-ants to joint substrate.

4. When test indicates sealant adhesion failure, modify joint preparation, primer, or both and retest until joint passes sealant adhesion test.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply sealers at temperatures below 40 degrees F unless approved by sealer manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s 10 year warranty providing coverage for exterior seal-ers and accessories that fail to provide air and water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 9200

B. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance requirements specified in this Section, including joint sealant failure to provide air and wa- tertight seal, loss of adhesion or cohesion, or failure to cure. 1. Duration of warranties from date of Substantial Completion: a. 5 years for Polyurethane sealants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. BASF Building Systems, Sonneborn. (www.buildingsystems.basf.com)2. Dow Corning Corp. (www.dowcorning.com) 3. GE Silicones. (www.gesealants.com) 4. Pecora Corp. (www.pecora.com) 5. Tremco, Inc. (www.tremcosealants.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealer Type 1: 1. ASTM C920, Grade P, multiple component polyurethane type, self-

leveling.2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 50 percent in compression.3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

B. Joint Sealer Type 2:1. ASTM C920, Grade NS, multiple component polyurethane type, non sag.2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 50 percent.3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

C. Joint Sealer Type 3:1. ASTM C920, Grade NS, single component polyurethane type, non sag.2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 25 percent.3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

D. Joint Sealer Type 4:1. ASTM C834, single component acrylic latex, non sag.2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 12-1/2 percent.3. Color: White.

E. Joint Sealer Type 5: 1. ASTM C920, Grade NS, single component silicone, non sag, mildew resis-

tant.2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 25 percent.3. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 9200

F. Joint Sealer Type 6: 1. ASTM C834, single component acrylic latex, non sag, non-hardening,

recommended by manufacturer for acoustical applications.2. Movement capability: Plus or minus 12-1/2 percent.3. Color: White.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primers and Solvents: As recommended by sealer and backing manufactur-ers.

B. Joint Backing:1. ASTM C1330, closed cell polyethylene foam, preformed round joint filler,

non absorbing, non staining, resilient, compatible with sealer and primer, recommended by sealer manufacturer for each sealer type.

2. Size: Minimum 1.25 times joint width.

C. Bondbreakers: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.

2.4 MIXES

A. Mix multiple component sealers in accordance with manufacturer's instruc-tions.1. Mix with mechanical mixer; prevent air entrainment and overheating.2. Continue mixing until color is uniform.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion. If surface has been subject to chemical contamination, contact sealer manufacturer for recommendation.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces with masking tape or protective coverings.

D. Remove laitance and mortar from masonry joint cavities. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding or mechanical abraiding. Remove loose particles from cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 9200

B. Install sealers and accessories in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Install acoustical sealers and accessories in accordance with ASTM C919.

D. Install joint backing to maintain required sealer dimensions. Compress back-ing approximately 25 percent without puncturing skin. Do not twist or stretch.

E. Use bondbreaker tape where joint backing is not installed.

F. Fill joints full without air pockets, embedded materials, ridges, and sags.

G. Tool sealer joints to smooth profile with slightly concave surface, flush at edges with adjacent surface, according to ASTM C1193, unless otherwise in-dicated.

H. Apply sealer within manufacturer’s recommended temperature range.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove masking tape and protective coverings after sealer has cured.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealant as installation progresses, using cleaning agent recommended by manufacturer of sealant used.

3.4 SCHEDULE

JOINT LOCATION OR TYPE SEALER TYPE

Exterior Joints:

Joints in horizontal surfaces subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic

1

Joints in above-grade surfaces at door and win-dow frames, metal and masonry

2

Joints in above-grade surfaces in siding and where painting of sealant allowed

3

Interior Joints:

Joints in horizontal surfaces subject to pedestrian or vehicular traffic

1

5

Joints in acoustical assemblies 6

Other joints 4

Joints in bathrooms, countertops, kitchens

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 07 9200

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Hollow steel doors and frames.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) (www.ansi.org): 1. A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames.2. A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

2. A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (www.nfpa.org) 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) (www.ul.com):1. 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.2. 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Show locations, elevations, dimensions, model designa-

tions, preparation for hardware, and anchoring details.2. Product Data: Show elevations, dimensions, gages of metal, hardware

reinforcing gages and locations, and anchor types.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 1113

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Doors: ANSI A250.8.1. Grade: II - Heavy Duty.2. Model: 1 - Full Flush. 3. Exterior doors: Minimum R value of 12.0.

B. Frames: ANSI A250.8, Grade II - Heavy Duty.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Ship door frames with removable angle spreader; do not remove until frame is installed.

B. Store doors upright in protected, dry area, off ground or floor, with at least 1/4 inch space between individual units.

C. Do not cover with non vented coverings that create excessive humidity.

D. Remove wet coverings immediately.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Ceco Door Products. (www.cecodoor.com) 2. Curries Company. (www.curries.com)3. Steelcraft. (www.steelcraft.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A1008/1008M, cold rolled.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, hot dipped, Structural Quality, Class G90 galvanized.

C. Galvannealed Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A924, Class A40 galvannealed.

D. Door Core: 1. Exterior doors: Rigid polystyrene insulation

E. Batt Insulation: Mineral wool type.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 1113

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Glass, Glazing Sealers, and Accessories: Specified in Section 08 8000.

B. Primer: Zinc rich type.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Fabricate exterior doors and frames from galvanized steel sheet.

C. Doors:1. Fabricate from minimum16 gage sheets.2. Close top and bottom edges of doors with steel channel, minimum 16

gage, extending full width of door, and spot welded to both faces, with top channel flush and bottom channel recessed.

D. Frames:1. Fabricate from minimum 14 gage sheets.

2. Close corner joints tight with trim faces mitered, continuously welded, and ground smooth.

3. Anchors:a. Provide one anchor at each jamb for each 30 inches of door

height.b. Design anchors to provide positive fastenings to adjacent construc-

tion.c. Provide one floor anchor welded to each jamb.

4. Where frames will be filled with concrete or grout, install silencers in frames before erection.

E. Accurately form to required sizes and profiles.

F. Grind and dress exposed welds to form smooth, flush surfaces.

G. Do not use metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects.

H. Fabricate with internal reinforcement for hardware specified in Section 08 7100; weld in place.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Dress tool marks and surface imperfections to smooth surfaces.

B. Chemically treat and clean.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 1113

C. Touch up damaged metallic coatings.

D. Apply baked enamel, color to be selected from manufacturer's standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11.

B. Set plumb and level.

C. Secure to adjacent construction using fastener type best suited to applica-tion.

D. Install hardware in accordance with Section 08 7100.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions in baked enamel to match factory finish.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 1113

SECTION 08 2100

HOLLOW CORE INTERIOR DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Hollow core interior molded panel doors.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 04 4000 - Architectural Wood Trim.3. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada/Woodwork Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI) (www.awinet.org) (www.awmac.com) (www.woodworkinstitute.com) - Architectural Woodwork Standards.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) E90 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Show locations, elevations, dimensions, and preparation

for hardware.2. Samples:

a. 6 x 6 inch door samples showing edges, core, and faces.

3. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Package doors in heavy plastic with identifying marks; slit plastic wrap on site to permit ventilation, but do not remove from plastic until ready to install.

B. Do not deliver doors until building is substantially water and weather tight.

C. Store doors upright with at least 1/4 inch between doors, in protected, dry area.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 2100

D. Environmental Requirements: Maintain following conditions in building for minimum 7 days prior to, during, and after installation of doors: 1. Temperature: 60 to 80 degrees F.2. Humidity: 17 to 50 percent.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Acoustic Rated Doors: Tested by independent testing laboratory in accor-dance with ASTM E90 and certified for STC Class of 27.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s one year warranty providing coverage against de-fects in materials and workmanship and warpage beyond specified amount.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Masonite Corporation. (www.masonite.com) 2. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. (www.marshfielddoors.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Doors:1. AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 9.2. Basis of Design: Masonite Anniversary Series “Saddlebrook”, smooth fin-

ish.3. Panel type:

a. Fabricated using loose lay up assembly that includes molded wood fiber facings, wood or MDF stiles, wood or MDF rails and corrugated cell core. Door facings are to be bonded to stiles, rails and core forming a 3-ply structural attachment. Water based latex primer used on door facings unless factory pre-finished.

b. Bifold Panel: Fabricated using loose lay up assembly which in-cludes molded wood fiber facings with optional flush facings on backside, wood or MDF stiles, wood or MDF rails and corrugated cell. Bifold facings are to be bonded to stiles, rails and core form-ing a 3-ply structural attachment.

c. Acoustic Panel: Basis of Design is Masonite ‘Safe and Sound’ as-sembly.

4. Frame: Wood jambs shall be fabricated as a flat jamb with door stop applied or 2-piece split jamb. Hinge jamb preparations for 1-3/8” thick doors to be machined for standard weight radius mortise hinges. Strike jamb preparations are to be machined for full lip cylindrical strike plate.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 2100

5. Finish: Paintable.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Wood-work Standards, Section 9.1. Grade: Premium.2. Edge Type: Manufacturer’s option.3. Number of plies: 3.

B. Prefitting; fit doors to frames at factory with following clearances:1. Non-rated doors:

a. Width: Cut hinge and lock edges equally.b. Height: Cut bottom edge only; maximum 3/4 inch.

2. Edge clearances:a. Jambs and head: 1/8 inch maximum between door and frame.b. Sills without thresholds: 1/8 inch maximum between door and top of

finish floor.

C. Premachining: Machine doors at factory to receive hardware specified in Section 08 7100.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition doors to average humidity that will be encountered after installa-tion.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.

B. Install doors plumb and level.

C. If field cutting for height is necessary, cut bottom edge only, 3/4 inch maxi-mum.

D. Apply sealer to field cut surfaces.

E. Install door hardware in accordance with Section 08 7100.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 2100

SECTION 08 2200

FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Fiberglass Door Assemblies.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 04 4000 - Architectural Wood Trim.3. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada/Woodwork Institute (AWI/AWMAC/WI) (www.awinet.org) (www.awmac.com)

B. Association of Electrical and Medical Imaging Equipment Manufacturers (NEMA) (www.nema.org) LD-3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) E90 - Standard Test Method for-Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.

D. ASTM E331 (www.astm.org) Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pres-sure Difference.

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (www.nfpa.org) 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) (www.ul.com):1. 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.2. 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Show locations, elevations, dimensions, fire and acousti-

cal ratings, and preparation for hardware.

2. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 2200

B. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Manufacturer's certification that doors

comply with specified acoustical requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to UL 10B.

B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80.

C. Acoustic Rated Doors: Tested by independent testing laboratory in accor-dance with ASTM E90 and certified for STC Class of 22.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Package doors in heavy plastic with identifying marks; slit plastic wrap on site to permit ventilation, but do not remove from plastic until ready to install.

B. Do not deliver doors until building is substantially water and weather tight.

C. Store doors upright with at least 1/4 inch between doors, in protected, dry area.

D. Environmental Requirements: Maintain following conditions in building for minimum 7 days prior to, during, and after installation of doors: 1. Temperature: 60 to 80 degrees F.2. Humidity: 17 to 50 percent.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s lifetime warranty providing coverage against defects in materials and workmanship beyond specified amount.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Masonite Corporation. (www.masonite.com) 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. (www.marshfielddoors.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Door Assemblies:1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44mm).2. Basis of Design: Masonite “Barrington” Wood-grain Textured

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 2200

3. Core type: a. CFC-free polyurethane.b. Door Plates: Molded in one piece, resin reinforced with hand-laid

glass fiber mat, minimum 15 ml gel-coated surface.c. Fabricated using 6-piece construction that includes fiberglass rein-

forced facings, featuring variable depth wood-grain texturing, MDF or wood stiles and rails.

4. Frames: Fabricated as a single rabbet jamb design. Hinge jamb, strike jamb, and head jamb shall be machined to accept a kerf applied weather seal. Hinge jamb preparations are to be machined for stan- dard weight full mortise butt hinges. Strike jamb preparations are to be machined for full lip cylindrical strike plate. Inswing or bumper outswing threshold shall be high-dam design. Low profile threshold shall be re- quired for handicap accessible openings. 5. Weather Seal: Door frame shall be fabricated featuring a vinyl wrapped foam filled compression design that is kerf installed. Corner seals shall be installed to the rabbet section of the door frame at the bottom of the hinge and lock jamb. Door bottom sweep shall be sealed and securely attached to the door panel.

6. Flashing, Insulating & Trimming: Exterior of installed unit shall be flashed, trimmed & sealed to prevent air infiltration and/or water penetration. Interior of installed unit shall be insulated & trimmed to prevent thermal and/or acoustical transmission.7. Finishes: shall be sealed in accordance with manufacturer’s specifica tions to protect against various environmental conditions. Make sure to seal and inspect all 5-surfaces (top, hinge side, lock side, exterior face and interior face). Finishing and/or refinishing must be completed within 45-days from the time the protective packaging was removed and/ or the installation was performed. Conduct periodic inspections of all coated surfaces to insure that door components are not exposed. In- spections should occur at least once a year. Reseal the surface as needed.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Wood-work Standards, Section 9.1. Edge Type: Manufacturer’s option.

B. Prefitting; fit doors to frames at factory with following clearances:1. Fire and Acoustic rated doors:

a. Width: Cut lock edge only; 3/16 inch maximum.b. Height: Cut bottom edge only; 3/4 inch maximum.

2. Edge clearances:a. Jambs and head: 1/8 inch maximum between door and frame.b. Sills with thresholds: 1/4 inch maximum between door and top of

threshold.3. Lock edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 2200

D. Premachining: Machine doors at factory to receive hardware specified in Section 08 7100.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition doors to average humidity that will be encountered after installa-tion.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards.

B. Install doors plumb and level.

C. Do not puncture pre-finished surfaces.

D. Install door hardware in accordance with Section 08 7100.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 2200

SECTION 08 3613

SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sectional doors.2. Operating hardware, controls, and supports.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org) 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) (www.asce.org) 7 - Minimum De-sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Gal-

vanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Proc-ess.

2. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

3. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Ex-truded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Design doors to withstand:1. Positive and negative design wind loads in accordance with OSSC 2010

Building Code without permanent deformation or damage.2. Movement caused by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F

and a surface temperature range of 160 degrees F.

B. Design Cycle Life: 25,000 cycles.

C. Panels: Flush steel, sandwich construction. Flush steel, pan style.

D. Track and Operating Hardware: Standard lift type.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 3613

E. Operation: Electric.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances,

connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and instal-lation details.

2. Product Data: Provide information on component construction, anchor-age method, and hardware.

3. Samples: 3 x 3 inch paint samples showing available colors.

C. Closeout Submittals:1. Operation and Maintenance Data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Overhead Door Corp. (www.overheaddoor.com) 2. Raynor. (www.raynor.com) 3. Wayne-Dalton Corp. (www.wayne-dalton.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Quality, G90 coating class.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: 1. ASTM B221, 6063 alloy, T5 or T6 temper.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Sections: 1. Type: Flush steel, panel type.2. Construction: 20 gage, groove profile.3. Rails: Tongue-and-groove.4. End caps: Wrap-around box style, galvanized steel, full height of section.

B. Track: 3 inches wide, roll formed galvanized steel, continuous one piece per side, with galvanized steel mounting brackets.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 3613

C. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel, with floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side.

D. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided steel lift ca-bles.

E. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient vinyl strip, one piece, fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact.

F. Head and Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section, fitted with resil-ient weatherstripping.

G. Lock: side mounted type, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain in locked or retracted position. Interior and exterior handle, locks keyed differently.

H. Door Bottom Safety Edge: Full door width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, to reverse door without striking object.

I. Electric Operator: 1. Center mounted draw bar assembly.2. Sufficient power to operate door at average speed of 12 inches per

second. 3. Manually operable in case of power failure.4. Electrical characteristics: 208 VAC, single phase.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Galvanized Steel: Powder coat, color to be selected from manufacturer’s full color range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install door assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Anchor to adjacent construction without distortion or stress.

C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to struc-tural members only.

D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware, level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 3613

E. Position head and jamb weatherstripping to contact door sections when closed; secure in position.

F. Make connections between power supply, operator, and controls as speci-fied.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust to operate smoothly throughout full operating range.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 3613

SECTION 08 5300

VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Tubular extruded windows with fixed and operating sash.2. Tubular extruded glass sliding doors and frames.3. Shop glazing.4. Operating hardware and insect screens.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org):1. 303 - Voluntary Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Exterior Pro-

file Extrusions.2. 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensa-

tion Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window and Doors Manu-facturers Association (AAMA/WDMA) (www.wdma.com) - 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) (www.asce.org) 7 - Minimum De-sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

D. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. D3656 - Standard Specification for Insect Screening and Louver Cloth

Woven from Vinyl-Coated Glass Yarns.2. E2112 - Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors and

Skylights.3. F588 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Window Assemblies to

Forced Entry Excluding Glazing.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Windows and Glass Doors: AAMA/WDMA - 101/I.S.2.1. Product type:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 5300

a. Sliding windows: See Window Schedule.c. Fixed windows: See Window Schedule.e. Doors: Sliding. See Door Schedule.

2. Thermal transmittance of window assembly: Maximum U-value of 0.65 BTU/square foot per hour per degree F, tested to AAMA 1503.

3. Condensation resistance factor: Minimum 45,50, tested to AAMA 1503.4. Forced entrance resistance: Conform to ASTM F588.

B. Design Requirements; design windows and glass doors to withstand:1. Wind loads in accordance with ASCE 7.2. Movement caused by an ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F

and a surface temperature range of 160 degrees F.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Include locations, elevations, sections, materials, finishes,

and attachments.2. Samples:

a. 3 x 3 inch vinyl samples showing available colors.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating hardware.

C. Mockup:1. Size: One full sized window unit.2. Locate where directed.3. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Jeld-Wen Windows and Doors. (www.jeldwen.com) 2. Pella Corporation. (www.pella.com)3. Milgard Windows and Doors. (www.milgard.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Extruded PVC: AAMA 303; hollow, multi-chambered sections of extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with integral ultraviolet inhibitors.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 5300

B. Glass and Glazing Accessories: Specified in Section 08 8000.

C. Operating Hardware: 1. Aluminum, stainless steel, plated steel, or other noncorroding material

compatible with aluminum.2. Casement windows: Lever action handle operator, projecting sash arms

with limit stops, and cam type lock.3. Sliding doors: Stainless steel bottom rollers, extruded aluminum threshold,

pulls, resilient limit stops, and hookbolt lock.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or fluoropolymer coated steel; type best suite to application.

B. Weatherstripping: Nylon pile, permanently resilient, profiled for weather seal.

C. Insect Screens: Nylon, ASTM D3656, Class 2, 18 x 14 mesh.

D. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate to AAMA/WDMA - 101/I.S.2.

B. Fabricate with minimum clearances and shim spaces around perimeter, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement.

C. Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with fusion welded corners and joints, in rigid jig. Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for rigidity.

D. Form sills and stools in one piece. Slope sills for wash.

E. Accurately fit and secure joints and intersections. Make joints flush, hairline, and weathertight.

F. Fabricate in largest practical units.

G. Weatherstrip operable sash.

H. Conceal fasteners and attachments from view.

I. Provide internal drainage weep holes and channels to route moisture to exte-rior.

J. Form snap-in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of ex-truded PVC for tight fit into window frame section.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 5300

K. Form weather stop flange to perimeter of unit.

L. Mount screens in removable, rewireable aluminum frame.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Exterior Surfaces: Color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

B. Interior Surfaces: Color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

C. Screens: Black color.

D. Hardware: Baked enamel, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install windows and glass doors in accordance with ASTM E2112, manufac-turer's instructions, and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Set plumb, level, and rigid, free from warpage.

C. Anchor to supporting construction.

D. Installation Tolerances:1. Maximum variation from plumb or level: 1/8 inch in 3 feet or 1/4 inch in

any 10 feet, whichever is less. 2. Maximum misalignment of members abutting end to end: 1/32 inch.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for smooth operation.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 5300

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Door hardware for hollow core, fiberglass and metal doors.1. Provide hardware not described herein but otherwise required for proper completion of the project, conforming to size, function, quality, and finish of other specified hardware.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.2. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames3. Section 08 2100 - Hollow Core Interior Doors 4. Section 08 2200 - Fiberglass Entry Doors

1.2 REFERENCES A. International Codes Council (ICC)/American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings / Facilities B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Butts and Hinges 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls - Closers 3. ANSI/BHMA A156.5 Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 4. ANSI/BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim 5. ANSI/BHMA A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions 6. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials & Finishes 7. ANSI/BHMA A156.21 Thresholds 8. ANSI/BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems 9. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 Recommended Practices for Keying Systems 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 Hardware Preparations in Steel Doors 11. ANSI/BHMA A156.115w Hardware Preparations in Wood Doors 12. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC) 13. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): a. DHI Keying Systems and Nomenclature b. DHI Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 14. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Fire Windows b. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code c. NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 15. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests Of Door Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, for information purposes, manufacturer's technical product data / catalog cut sheets, clearly marked for each hardware item, including

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 7100

installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.B. Submit, for information purposes, Keying Schedule: Detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. Format shall conform to DHI “Keying Systems and Nomenclature.”

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers, Hardware Supplier, and Installer shall have no less than five years experience in the provision of Door Hardware for projects similar in size, complexity and type to this Project. Supplier shall be factory direct with listed manufacturers and have an architectural hardware consultant (AHC) on staff.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with all applicable accessibility guidelines as set forth in Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) -- Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG); and Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC). B. Latching and locking doors that are hand-activated and that are in a path of travel shall be operable with a single effort by lever-type hardware, panic bars, push-pull activating bars, or other hardware designed to provide passage without requiring the ability to grasp the opening hardware (except for R occupancies where more than one function to release is permitted.) 1. All hand-activated hardware shall be mounted between 30 inches (762 mm) and 44 inches (1117 mm) above finished floor. C. Latches, locks, and exit devices shall require no more than 15 lbf to release latch; from egress side shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Door closing devices shall comply with the following maximum opening- force requirements: 1. Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door at latch. 2. Exterior Hinged Doors: 8.5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door at latch. 3. Fire Doors: Minimum force necessary to reliably close and latch door. E. Where door closers are provided, adjust sweep speed so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (76 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 087100

F. Electrified door hardware shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Each article of hardware shall be delivered individually packaged in the manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and shall be properly marked or labeled to be readily identifiable with the approved hardware schedule. B. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions, fasteners, and special tools shall be included in each package. C. Hardware shall be stored in a dry, secure locked area, complete with shelving for unpacking and sorting of the door hardware. D. Deliver all master keys by restricted, receipted delivery directly from the manufacturer to the Owner.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Provide hardware templates to the parties involved in manufacturing and supplying doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory reinforced and prepared for door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. When required by door or frame fabricator, furnish physical samples of each mortised and recessed hardware item required. C. Furnish as required any hardware items or accessories requiring factory or shop installation. D. Electrical System Rough-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, and security system as applicable.

1.8 WARRANTY A. In addition to, and not precluding, other warranty requirements in the Contract Documents, the following hardware items shall carry extended minimum warranties as indicated: 1. Locks: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Bifold Hardware: Stanley BFC50 series. Equivalents by Henderson, Johnson are acceptable. B. Hinges: Ives 5PB & 5BB series. Equivalents by Bommer, Hager are acceptable. C. Locks: Schlage AL & B500 series as specified. No substitutions.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 7100

D. Keying: Schlage Everest C. No substitutions. E. Pulls: Trimco wire pulls. Equivalents by Hager, Tice are acceptable. F. Stops: Ives WS407CVX/CCV series. Equivalent by Hager, Trimco are acceptable. G. Seals: NGP 5050 series. Equivalent by Pemko, Zero, Steelcraft are acceptable.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Requirements for grade, materials, size, design, function, finish, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated for specific openings in the Hardware Sets listed at the end of Part 3. Furnish items in types, sizes or weight in accordance with each manufacturer's standards, appropriate for the conditions of installation and service, unless otherwise indicated. B. Door hardware units shall be produced of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 BUTT HINGES

A. Butt hinges shall meet BHMA A156.1 requirements. B. Hinge dimensions shall conform to BHMA A156.7. C. Base Metal shall be steel plated. D. Provide hinges with anti-friction bearings for doors with closers. E. Unless otherwise indicated, size hinges as follows: 1. 1-3/4 inch thick doors to 36 inches width: 4-1/2 inch height; standard weight. G. Provide in minimum width sufficient to clear trim when door swings 180 degrees, whether or not shown on Drawings to swing 180 degrees. Where Wide Throw hinges are indicated, provide minimum width required to clear adjacent wall coverings and any material applied to the face of the door. Wide Throw hinges shall be furnished as heavy weight hinges.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 087100

H. Number of hinges per leaf shall be as follows: 1. Doors over 60 to 90 inches in height: 3 hinges. 2. Screws: Flat head wood screws not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long for hinges for wood doors; flat head machine screws elsewhere. 3. Hinges for reverse bevel doors with locks shall have pins that are made non-removable when the door is in the closed position by means of a set screw in the hinge pin barrel.

2.5 CYLINDERS, KEYING AND KEY STORAGE

A. Cylinders and keying shall be a Schlage Everest C master key system. Meet with Owner to determine specific keying requirements.

2.6 AUXILIARY HARDWARE A. Auxiliary hardware shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements. B. Door Stops: 1. All doors are to be provided a door stop or other means of stopping the door to prevent damage to the door, door hardware, door frame, and/or all adjacent finishes. C. Stops shall be of heavy duty construction, provided in finish indicated. Wall bumpers shall have no visible fasteners. Floor stops shall be of height required by floor conditions. Unless otherwise indicated, provide stops at all doors as follows: 1. At all other doors: a. Provide wall bumper Ives WS407CVX/CCV or Ives 061 spring stop where scheduled. D. Silencers: Gray rubber, non-marring configured for metal or wood frames as scheduled. Provide 3 per single door and 2 per pair of doors. Silencers shall be tamper resistant once installed in door frame.

2.7 GASKETING

A. Shall be a compression type product for use with wood or steel doors where indicated.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Provide hardware in finishes as indicated. B. Unless otherwise indicated, finishes shall conform to those identified in BHMA A156.18. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel, brass or bronze base metal. 2. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, stainless-steel base metal. 3. BHMA 652: Satin chromium plated over nickel, steel base metal.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 7100

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine rough-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements 1. Install each door hardware item according to manufacturer's written instructions, utilizing proper fasteners provided by manufacturer. 2. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in other Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 3. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. B. Door Stops 1. Floor stops in concrete floors are to be installed utilizing metal expansion shields and machine screws. 2. Reinforce all gypsum board/stud walls for wall mounted door stops/bumpers. Use metal or wood backing sized and placed as directed. Installation in hollow walls without adequate backing is not acceptable.

C. Hardware Locations 1. Unless otherwise indicated install hardware as follows: a. Bottom Hinge or Pivot: 10 inches from door bottom to bottom of hinge. b. Top Hinge or Pivot: 5 inches from door top to top of hinge. c. Center Hinge(s) or Pivot(s): Spaced equidistantly between top and bottom hinges/ pivots. d. Lockset / Latchset: 38 inches from finished floor to center of lever/ trim. e. Wall Bumper: Centered at point on wall where lever, or other operating trim, first makes contact with wall.

D. Adjusting 1. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. 2. Follow-up Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 087100

a. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of door hardware. b. Consult with and instruct Port's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. c. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units.

3.3 COMPLETION A. At point of Substantial Completion, all hardware shall be properly secured in place and all exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, paint, and other defects and damages. B. Contractor shall demonstrate that all keys properly operate the locks as identified in the approved Keying Schedule. C. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect products "As Installed". D. Copy of final keying schedule.

3.4 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The following is a listing of hardware requirements. Provide hardware items required by established standards and practices to meet state and local codes, whether or not specifically indicated in the following sets. B. Silencers and gasketing, where listed in Hardware Sets, may be omitted at openings where door frames are provided with integral seals if integral seals satisfy all applicable Codes and Regulations. C. Refer to Door Schedule and/ or Drawings for door opening information, hardware set assignment, and related requirements.

HW SET: 01 DOOR NUMBER:A01 C01 D01 E01

EACH TO HAVE:3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA OFFICE LOCK AL50RD NEP 626 SCH

1 EA DEADBOLT B560R 626 SCH

1 EA DOOR STOP 061 645 IVE

1 EA THRESHOLD/BOTTOM PROVIDED BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

1 EA WEATHERSTRIP PROVIDED BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

1 EA VIEWER U698B 626 IVE

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 7100

HW SET: 02 DOOR NUMBER:A02 B02 C02 C03 D02 D03

E02

EACH TO HAVE:

ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER

HW SET: 03 DOOR NUMBER:A03 B03 D05 E03

EACH TO HAVE:1 SET BIFOLD HARDWARE BFC50 626 STA

1 EA 4" PULL 562-4 626 TRI

FURNISH HINGES WITH FRAME SET- 626/652 FINISH.

HW SET: 04 DOOR NUMBER:A04 B04 B07 B10 C07 C10

D08 E04 E07

EACH TO HAVE:3 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 652 IVE

1 EA PASSAGE SET AL10S NEP 626 SCH

1 EA DOOR STOP 061 645 IVE

3 EA SILENCER SR66 GRY IVE

DELETE STOP WHERE NOT PRACTICAL.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 087100

HW SET: 05 DOOR NUMBER:A05 A06 A11 B05 B09 C05

C06 C08 C12 D04 D06 D10

E05 E09

EACH TO HAVE:1 SET BIFOLD HARDWARE BFC50 626 STA

2 EA 4" PULL 562-4 626 TRI

FURNISH HINGES WITH FRAME SET- 626/652 FINISH.

HW SET: 06 DOOR NUMBER:A07 A08 A09 A10 B06 B08

C09 C11 D07 D09 E06 E08

EACH TO HAVE:3 EA HINGE 5PB1 3.5 X 3.5 652 IVE

1 EA PRIVACY SET AL40S NEP 626 SCH

1 EA DOOR STOP 061 645 IVE

3 EA SILENCER SR66 GRY IVE

HW SET: 07 DOOR NUMBER:B01

EACH TO HAVE:3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE

1 EA OFFICE LOCK AL50RD NEP 626 SCH

1 EA DEADBOLT B560R 626 SCH

1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE

1 EA THRESHOLD/BOTTOM PROVIDED BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

1 EA WEATHERSTRIP PROVIDED BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

1 EA VIEWER U698B 626 IVE

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 7100

HW SET: 08 DOOR NUMBER:B11

EACH TO HAVE:

EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80RD NEP 626 SCH

1 EA WALL STOP WS407CVX 630 IVE

1 EA THRESHOLD/BOTTOM PROVIDED BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

1 EA WEATHERSTRIP PROVIDED BY FRAME MANUFACTURER

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 087100

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Glass for other sections referencing this Section.2. Unframed mirrors.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 08 5300 - Vinyl Windows and Patio Doors.

3. Section 10 2813 - Toilet Accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

In the following paragraphs, retain only those reference standards that are used else-where in this section.

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org) 800 - Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) (www.ansi.org) Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) (www.asce.org) 7 - Minimum De-sign Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

D. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C509 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket

and Sealing Material.2. C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal

Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.3. C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.4. C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.5. C1115 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber

Gaskets and Accessories.6. C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants.7. C1281 - Standard Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing

Applications.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 8000

8. C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants.

9. E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Win-dows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

10. E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings.

11. E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.

E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) (www.cpsc.gov) 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.

F. Glass Association of North America (GANA) (www.glasswebsite.com):1. Engineering Standards Manual.2. Glazing Manual.

G. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA) (www.igmaonline.org):1. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

H. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) (www.nfrc.org):1. 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties.2. 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain

Coefficients at Normal Incidence.3. 300 - Procedures for Determining Solar Optical Properties of Simple Fen-

estration Products.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass meeting specified performance properties, based on manufacturer's published test data for units of thickness indicated:1. U-factor: Per NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/square foot x hour x degree F.2. Solar heat gain coefficient: Per NFRC 200.3. Solar optical properties: Per NFRC 300.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Descriptive data and performance attributes for insulated

glass.2. Samples:

a. 12 x 12 inch glass samples.3. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 8000

1. Provide safety glass for locations subject to human impact as required by Building Code.

2. Safety glass: Tested and labeled to CPSC 16 CFR 1201.

C. Perform Work in accordance with SIGMA TM-3000 and IGMA TB-3001.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F.

B. Perform glazing on dry surfaces.

1.7 WARRANTIESA. Insulating Glass Units: Provide manufacturer’s 10 year warranty against mate-

rial obstruction of vision through unit due to:1. Intrusion of dust or moisture.2. Internal condensation.3. Film formation on internal glass surfaces caused by failure of hermetic

seal except failure caused in whole or in part by breakage or fracturing of any portion of glass surface.

B. Glass Coatings: Provide manufacturer’s 10 year warranty against peeling, cracking, or deterioration of coating under normal conditions.

C. Mirrors: Provide manufacturer’s 10 year warranty against silver spoilage result-ing from manufacturing defects.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Glass:1. Pilkington Architectural. (www.pilkington.com) 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (www.ppgglazing.com) 3. Oldcastle Building Envelope. (www.oldcastlebe.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS - GLASS

A. Clear Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select.

B. Tinted Glass: 1. Type: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 2 tinted heat absorbing

and light reducing, Quality q3 glazing select.2. Color: To be selected by Architect.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 8000

C. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select, Kind FT fully tempered.

D. Clear Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select, Kind HS heat strengthened.

E. Tinted Tempered Glass:1. Type: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 2 tinted heat absorbing

and light reducing, Quality q3 glazing select, Kind FT fully tempered.2. Color: To be selected by Architect.

F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q1mir-ror select.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone; 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.

B. Spacers: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone; 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness.

C. Glazing Gaskets:1. Dense compression gaskets: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or

ASTM C1115, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, molded or ex-truded shape to fit glazing channel retaining slot; black color.

2. Soft compression gaskets: ASTM C509, Type II, black, molded or ex-truded, neoprene, EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; black color.

D. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; single component silicone, low modulus, non sag, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

E. Sealant Backing: ASTM C1330, Type O, size and density to control glazing sealant depth and produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

F. Primer: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer.

G. Glazing Tape: AAMA 800; closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, maximum 2 percent water absorption by volume, designed for 25 percent compression percent for air barrier and vapor retarder seal, black color, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides; widths required for installation.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Tempered Glass:1. Comply with ASTM C1048.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 8000

2. Process in horizontal position so that inherent roller distortion will run par-allel to building floor lines after installation.

B. Sealed Insulating Glass:1. Comply with ASTM E2190.2. Fabricate spacer bar frame of tubular aluminum filled with desiccant.3. Bond spacer bar frame to glass panes with twin primary seals.4. Fill space outside frame to glass edge with elastomeric sealant.

C. Low-E Coated Glass: Apply low-emissivity coating to scheduled glass surface.

D. Mirror Glass:1. Apply one coat of silver, one coat of electroplated copper, and one

coat of organic mirror backing compound to back surface of glass.2. Arise and polish edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing rabbets; remove loose and foreign matter.

B. Remove protective coatings on metal surfaces.

C. Clean glass just prior to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's instructions.

B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended edge and face clearances be-tween glass and frame members.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GASKET GLAZING METHOD

A. Fabricate gaskets to fit openings; allow for stretching of gaskets during instal-lation.

B. Set soft compression gasket against fixed stop or frame with bonded miter cut joints at corners.

C. Set glass centered in openings on setting blocks.

D. Install removable stops and insert dense compression gaskets at corners, working toward centers of glass, compressing glass against soft compression gaskets to produce weathertight seal.

E. Seal joints in gaskets.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 8000

F. Allow gaskets to protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 INSTALLATION - SEALANT AND TAPE GLAZING METHOD

A. Apply tape to permanent stops, projecting slightly above sight line.

B. Press glass into contact with tape.

C. Install removable stops with spacer shims between stop and glass.

D. Fill gap between removable stop and glass with glazing sealant.

E. Trim protruding tape edges.

3.5 INSTALLATION - MIRRORS

A. Set mirrors with channels. Anchor rigidly to wall construction.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. After installation, mark glass with an 'X' using removable plastic tape.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 08 8000

SECTION 09 2200

METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Metal resilient channel at ceiling.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board. 3. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A591/A591M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-

Coated, for Light Coating Weight (Mass) Applications.2. A641 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon

Steel Wire.3. A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metal-

lic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members.4. C645 - Standard Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs,

Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.

5. C754 - Standard Practice for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wall board, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Illustrate framing types, gages, and locations.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Deflection Limits:1. If partition height exceeds stud manufacturer's limiting height for appli-

cable loading and deflection, install bracing above ceiling, or decrease stud spacing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2200

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. The Steel Network. (www.steelnetwork.com) 2. Dietrich Metal Framing, Inc. (www.dietrichmetalframing.com) 3. USG Interiors, Inc. (www.usg.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel: ASTM A1003/1003M, Class G40 hot dip galvanized, 25 gage minimum.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 1-5/8 inch long drywall screws, or as recommended by manufac-turer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CEILING FRAMING

A. Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Space resilient channels 16 inches on center maximum, perpendicular to joists and within 6 inches of abutting construction. 1. Double at each wallboard end joist extending to the next joist.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2200

SECTION 09 2615

VENEER PLASTERING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Gypsum veneer plaster on gypsum base.2. Trim.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum

Wallboard.2. C587 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Veneer Plaster.3. C588 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Base for Veneer Plasters.4. C843 - Standard Practice for Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster.5. C844 - Standard Practice for Application of Gypsum Base to Receive

Gypsum Veneer Plaster.6. C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application

of Gypsum Board.7. C1047 - Standard Specifications for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard

and Gypsum Veneer Base.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data and application instruc-

tions.2. Samples: 12 x 12 inch samples showing finish coat in proposed texture.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply plaster when ambient or substrate temperature is less than

50 degrees F nor more than 85 degrees F.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2615

2. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during and af-ter application of plaster.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. National Gypsum Co. (www.nationalgypsum.com) 2. United States Gypsum Co. (www.usg.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Backing Board: 1. ASTM C588, Type X, 5/8 inch thick, maximum practical length, tapered

edges.

B. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: 1. ASTM C587.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: ASTM C1047.1. Material: Formed steel, minimum 26 gage core steel, hot dip galvanized

finish, expanded flanges.2. Corner reinforcement: Type CB-100 x 100.3. Casing: Type LC.4. Control joint.

B. Reinforcing Tape and Joint Compound: GA 216.

C. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S screws, minimum 5/8 inch penetration into framing.

D. Water: Potable.

2.4 MIXES

A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BASE

A. Install in accordance with ASTM C844 and GA 216.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2615

B. Do not locate joints to align with edges of openings unless a control joint is installed.

C. Exercise care during cutting and installation to avoid tearing face paper or breaking gypsum core.

D. Apply panels in most economical direction with ends and edges occurring over supports.

E. Cut panels around openings and projections.

F. Mechanically fasten panels to framing. Place fasteners minimum 3/8 inch from edges of panels; drive heads slightly below surface.

G. Tape, fill, and sand joints between panels, fastener depressions, corners, and edges:1. Apply taping compound approximately 3 inches wide.2. Apply tape to internal angles and joints, centered and seated into

compound, leaving sufficient compound under tape to provide proper bond. Apply skim coat of taping compound over tape. Feather out on each side of tape.

3. Apply taping compound to fastener depressions; feather out onto adja-cent surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Install casing beads where plaster abuts dissimilar material or stops with edge exposed.

B. Install corner beads at external corners.

C. Install control joints at ceilings:1. At maximum 50 feet on center.2. Where ceiling framing changes direction.

D. Install control joints at walls:1. At changes in backup material.2. At maximum 30 feet on center.3. Above one jamb of openings in partitions.

E. Set level and true to line.

3.3 APPLICATION OF PLASTER

A. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C843.

B. Apply two coats of plaster:1. Apply base coat to a thickness of 1/8 inch.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2615

2. Apply final coat over slightly green, almost dry base coat, to a thickness of 1/16 inch.

3. Total thickness: Minimum 3/16 inch.

C. Finish wall and soffit surfaces to textured skip trowel finish, with neat, sharp corners and intersections.

D. Finish ceiling surface to smooth, hard trowel finish.

E. Complete application of each panel formed by intersections, corners, trim and accessories in one operation to ensure uniformity of texture and finish.

F. Installation Tolerances:1. Flatness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet.2. Thickness for two coats: 3/16 inch plus or minus 1/64 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Repair or replace damaged, discolored and defective plaster. Match patched areas to surrounding plaster.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2615

SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Acoustical insulation.2. Gypsum board.3. Taping and bedding of gypsum board.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) (www.ansi.org):1. A108.11 - Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.2. A118.9 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for

Finishing Gypsum Board.2. C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum

Wallboard.3. C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation

for Wood Frame and Light Construction Buildings.4. C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application

of Gypsum Board.5. C1047 - Standard Specifications for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard

and Gypsum Veneer Base.6. C1178 - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum

Backing Panel.7. C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.8. D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the

Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.

C. Gypsum Association (GA) (www.gypsum.org):1. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.2. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing

of Gypsum Board.3. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2900

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) (www.ul.com) - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Illustrate panel product types, thicknesses, and locations;

acoustical insulation; and accessories.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire Resistance Ratings:1. Construct assemblies to achieve fire resistance ratings indicated on

Drawings, in accordance with referenced GA or UL design number.2. If requirements of assembly numbers referenced conflict with Contract

Document requirements, conform to assembly requirements.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install gypsum board until building is substantially weathertight.

B. Maintain temperature in spaces in which work is being performed above 50 degrees F during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Gypsum Panels:1. GP Gypsum Corporation. (www.gp.com)2. United States Gypsum Co. (www.usg.com)3. CertainTeed Gypsum, Inc. (www.certainteed.com)

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Cementitious Panels:1. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. (www.jameshardie.com)2. United States Gypsum Co. (www.usg.com)

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS - GYPSUM PANELS

A. Regular Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 48 inches wide x thickness indicated, maximum practical length, tapered edge.

B. Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396, Type X; 48 inches wide x thickness indicated, maximum practical length, tapered edge; apply to fire rated as-semblies.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2900

C. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 48 inches wide x thickness indi-cated, maximum practical length, water resistant; apply to walls at bath-rooms.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type W screws, minimum 5/8 inch penetration into framing.

B. Acoustical Insulation: 1. ASTM C665, Type I, glass fiber composition, unfaced2. Free from urea-formaldehyde resins, phenol, acrylics, and artificial col-

ors.

C. Adhesive: 1. Type recommended by gypsum panel manufacturer.

D. Trim Accessories: ASTM C1047.1. Material: Formed steel, minimum 26 gage core steel, hot dip galvanized

finish, expanded flanges.

E. Acoustical Sealer: Specified in Section 07 9200.

F. Joint Treatment Materials: 1. Reinforcing tape and joint compound; ASTM C475.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM PANELS

A. Install panels and accessories in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Accurately cut panels to fit around openings and projections. Do not tear face paper or break gypsum core.

C. Apply panels at non fire-rated assemblies in most economical manner, with ends and edges occurring over supports.

D. Apply panels at fire-rated assemblies as required by design assembly.

E. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

F. Do not locate joints to align with edges of openings unless a control joint is installed.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2900

G. Mechanically fasten panels to framing. Place fasteners minimum 3/8 inch from edges of panels; drive heads slightly below surface. Stagger fasteners at abutting edges.

H. Apply face layer of double layer applications with joints offset from those in base layer; secure with mechanical fasteners to framing or with adhesive to base layer.

I. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with joint sealer.

J. Where recessed items occur in fire rated partitions, box item on all sides with gypsum board as required to maintain continuity of fire rating.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS

A. Install acoustical insulation:1. Butt to framing members and adjacent construction. 2. Carry around pipes, wiring, outlets, and other construction without voids.3. Press against one gypsum board surface to form slight air space on op-

posite side.

B. Seal acoustical partitions at perimeter and around penetrations:1. Apply continuous bead of sealer between gypsum panel edges and

adjacent construction. 2. Seal space between gypsum panels at control joints, prior to installing

metal control joint.3. Apply sealer to penetrations through partitions.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL INSULATION ABOVE CEILINGS

A. Install acoustical insulation in continuous layer. Butt tightly to adjacent insula-tion and to other construction.

B. Carry over pipes, wiring, boxes, and other construction without voids.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install corner reinforcement at outside corners. Use single lengths where length of corner does not exceed standard length.

C. Install casings where indicated and where gypsum board abuts dissimilar ma-terials or stops with edge exposed.

D. Install control joints at walls and partitions:1. At changes in backup material.2. At maximum 30 feet on center.3. Above one jamb of openings in partitions.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2900

3.5 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Treat joints and fasteners in gypsum board in accordance with GA-214.

B. Levels of Finish:1. Surfaces to receive eggshell paints: Level 4 finish.2. Surfaces to receive semigloss paints: Level 5 finish.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 2900

SECTION 09 3000

TILING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Floor finish in kitchens, entry hallways and bathrooms (optional to lami-

nate flooring).2. Floor finish in passenger elevator.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

3. Section 14 2100 - Electric Traction Passenger Elevators, for cab flooring.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): (www.ansi.org) 1. A108/A118/A136.1 - American National Standard for Installation of Ce-

ramic Tile.2. A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Re-

inforcement.2. A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Reinforce-

ment, Plain, for Concrete.3. C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.4. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.5. C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.6. C1028 - Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Ce-

ramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method.

C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) (www.tileusa.com) - Handbook for Ce-ramic Tile Installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Manufacturer's installation, cleaning, and maintenance

instructions.2. Samples:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 3000

a. Tile: 3 x 3 inch samples showing available colors.b. Grout: 1/2 x 1/2 x 3 inch long samples showing available colors.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Tile and Trim Units: Meet ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade.

C. Static Coefficient of Friction for Floor Tile: Minimum 0.60, tested to ASTM C1028 in dry condition.

D. Mockup:1. Size: 4 x 4 feet.2. Show: Tile colors and patterns, joint profile, and control joint.3. Locate where directed.4. Approved mockup may remain as part of the Work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver mortar, adhesive, and grout containers bearing hallmark certifying compliance with reference standards.

B. Protect adhesive containers from freezing and overheating according to manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during and after installation.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: 2 percent of each tile.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Tile:1. Shaw Floors. (www.shawfloors.com)2. Dal-Tile Corp. (www.daltileproducts.com)

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Setting and Grouting Materials: 1. Laticrete International, Inc. (www.laticrete.com)2. Mapei Corp. USA. (www.mapei.com)

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 3000

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Tile (Basis of Design):1. Type: Shaw Floors Ceramic Solutions “Matrix 18”2. Size: 12 x 12 inches x 3/8 inch thick.3. Edge: Square.4. Color: “Element” 003005. Surface finish: Matte glazed.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, polymer modified dry set type.

B. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1, polymer modified dry set type.

C. Epoxy Adhesive: 1. ANSI A118.3, thin set bond type.

D. Organic Adhesive: 1. ANSI A136.1, Type 1, thin set bond type.

E. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, white color.

F. Sand: ASTM C144, clean, free of organic matter.

G. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, hydrated.

H. Water: Clean, potable.

I. Grout:1. ANSI A118.6, polymer modified dry set type, sanded.2. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

J. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.

K. Crack Suppression Membrane:1. Type: ANSI A118.12, load bearing, reinforced self-adhering sheet type.

L. Joint Tape: Waterproof, perforated bedding tape.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhe-sion.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 3000

B. Remove ridges and projections. Fill voids and depressions with patching compound compatible with setting materials.

C. Allowable Substrate Tolerances:1. Thin set method:

a. Maximum variation in substrate surface: 1/8 inch in 8 feet.b. Maximum height of abrupt irregularities: 1/32 inch.

D. Test concrete substrate to ASTM D4263; do not install tile until surfaces are suf-ficiently dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install crack suppression membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s in-structions.

B. Methods:1. Floors: ANSI A108.5, thin set with latex-portland cement mortar.

C. Minimize pieces less than one half size. Locate cuts to be inconspicuous.

D. Lay tile to pattern furnished by Architect. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

E. Joint Widths:1. Ceramic and ceramic mosaic tile: 1/8 inch, plus or minus 1/16 inch.

F. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. Align joints in wall and floor of same-sized tile.

G. Fit tile around projections and at perimeter. Smooth and clean cut edges. En-sure that trim will completely cover cut edges.

H. Install Trim:1. Exposed tile ends: Bullnose units.

I. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours before grouting.

J. Grout tile joints in accordance with ANSI A108.10 without excess grout.

K. Control Joints:1. Provide control joints at:

a. Changes in backup material.b. Changes in plane.c. Over joints in substrate.

2. Form joints per TCNA Method EJ-171. 3. Install joint backing and joint sealer as specified in Section 07 9200.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 3000

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Remove and replace pieces that have been damaged during installation.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection for completed work using nonstaining sheet coverings.

B. Prohibit traffic on tile floors for minimum 3 days after installation.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 3000

SECTION 09 6270

LAMINATE FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Cushion.2. Vapor Barrier.3. Molding and Trim.4. Accessories.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.3. Section 03 5413 - Gypsum Concrete Underlayment.4. Section 07 2600 - Vapor Retarders.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chlo-ride.

B. NALFA LF 01-2008 - North American Laminate Floor Association, Lami-nate Flooring Specifications and Test Methods.

C. ISO 105-B02 - Textiles; Tests for Color Fastness.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Laminate Performance Standards: Decorative laminate flooring shall conform with the following:1. Static Load / Static Indentation

a. NALFA Method: NALFA LF 01-2008 3.1.b. Heavy Commercial NALFA Class 4: Greater or equal to 8

MPa (1160 psi).c. EN Method: EN 433.d. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: No visible change.

2. Thickness Swella. NALFA Method: NALFA LF 01-2008 3.2.b. Heavy Commercial NALFA Class 4: Less than or equal to 12

percent.c. EN Method: EN 13329 Annex G.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6270

d. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: Less than or equal to 18 percent

3. Lightfastness a. EN Method: EN ISO 105-B02.b. Blue Wool Scale: Greater than or equal to 6.c. EN 20105-A02d. Grey Scale: Greater than or equal to 4.

4. Cleanability / Stain Resistance a. NALFA Method: NALFA LF 01-2008 3.4.b. Heavy Commercial NALFA Class 4: Score, less than 20. No

more than slight effect.c. EN Method: EN 438.d. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: Groups 1 & 2: 5 - Group 3:

5. Impact resistance a. EN Method: EN 13329 Annex F.b. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: IC3.

6. Wear Resistance / Abrasion Resistancea. NALFA Method: NALFA LF 01-2008 3.7.b. Heavy Commercial NALFA Class 4: IP Greater than or equal

to 6,000 cycles.c. EN Method: EN 13329 Annex E.d. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: Greater than or equal to

6,000 revs, AC5.7. Surface Bonding / Surface Soundness

a. NALFA Method: NALFA LF 01-2008 3.10.b. Heavy Commercial NALFA Class 4: 1.5 N/mm2.c. EN Method: EN 13329 Annex D.d. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: 1.00 N/mm2.

8. Resistance to Cigarette Burnsa. EN Method: EN 438.b. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: Rating: Greater than or

equal to 4.9. Effect of a Furniture Leg.

a. EN Method: EN 424.b. Heavy Commercial EN Class 33: No damage or visible

change.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings: Installation details including location and layout of each type of flooring and accessory. Include layout data for each location with consideration for expansion control.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6270

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed speci-fied requirements.

F. Provide manufacturer's standard non-proated 15 year commercial warranty for wear through, stain, and fade.

G. Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that include recommendations for periodic cleaning and mainte-nance.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years docu-mented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in installation or applica-tion of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, including specific requirements indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry.

C. Store materials in a flat in a dry, warm, ventilated and weather tight location.

D. Protect flooring products from damage.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that floor layouts and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6270

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and venti-lation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum re-sults. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Spaces must be enclosed and dry with normal design humidity levels and temperatures between 65 and 85 degrees F (18 and 29 degrees C) for a minimum of 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installa-tion of finished flooring. After installation, maintain design humidity and temperature levels.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Extra materials for Owner's use in maintenance as follows.1. Decorative Laminate: An amount equal to 10 percent of quan-

tity installed for each pattern and color indicated.2. Aluminum End molding and T - molding: Two full lengths of each

type specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Acceptable Manufacturers - Tile:

1. Shaw Flooring. (www.shawfloors.com) 2. Pergo LLC: (www.pergopro.com) 3. Armstrong Flooring. (www.armstrong.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Decorative Laminate Flooring. Composite panel consisting of a lami-nate surface and a laminate balancing backer pressed to high den-sity fiberboard (HDF) core with moisture resistant adhesive.1. Referenced Planks measuring between 8 to1209.5 mm by 192.5

mm by 10 mm. Color as selected by the Architect from the manufacturers standard colors.

2. Referenced 5 inch (127 mm) wide Planks measuring 1216.8 mm by 125 mm by 10 mm. Color as selected by the Architect from the manufacturers standard colors.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cushion: Manufacturer’s non-woven, foam underlayment.

B. Vapor Barrier: Manufacturer’s required polyethylene roll material.

C. Molding and Trim:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6270

1. Expansion (T-Molding): Aluminum core and coordinating lami-nated wrapped surface. Provide for use in doorways or thresh-olds to join two areas of like height flooring.

2. Transition (Reducer Molding): Aluminum core and coordinating laminated wrapped surface. Provide for use in joining laminate flooring to other flooring materials of varying heights.

D. Flooring Spacers: Maintain spacing between flooring and walls or other perimeter vertical surfaces.

E. Sealant: Use Silicone sealant to seal gaps, around metal door frames and flooring edges and in areas where moisture may be present.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly pre-pared.

B. Verify that surfaces to receive laminate flooring are smooth, flat and sound.

C. Verify concrete slabs or toppings are dry according to ASTM F 1869 with maximum moisture emission rate of 5 pounds (2.3k) per 1000 SF (93sm) per 24 hours. The use of a Tramex moisture meter or other ac-ceptable method is recommended for verifying moisture readings.

D. Verify wood subfloor is properly secured, smooth and flat. Moisture readings of wood subfloors must not exceed 14 percent throughout the entire installation. The use of a Tramex moisture meter or other ac-ceptable method is recommended for verifying moisture readings.

E. Verify required floor mounted utilities are in proper location.

F. Verify laminate flooring has been acclimated to ambient tempera-tures, and acclimation and ambient temperatures are in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Concrete slabs or toppings: Grind high spots and fill low spots to pro-vide a maximum 3/16 inch (5 mm) deviation in any direction when checked with a 10 foot (3 m) straight edge.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6270

C. If a leveling compound is used to level subfloor, material must be fully cured and dry as specified for the applicable substrate prior to start-ing installation. The use of a Tramex moisture meter or other accept-able method is recommended for verifying moisture readings.

D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufac-turer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

E. Allow unopened cartons of planks to remain in the room where they are to be installed at least 48 hours (96 hours in drier or very humid cli-mates) prior to installation.

3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges to-gether, but not overlap.

B. Provide vapor barrier for installations over concrete subfloors, as re-quired. Overlap at all connecting edges.

3.4 LAMINATE INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install flooring planks parallel to the long direction of the room. Verify strip flooring direction with Architect before starting installation.

C. Install flooring symmetrically about room center line unless otherwise indicated. Lay planks from left to right.

D. Stagger end joint locations a minimum of 12 inches (250-300 mm).

E. Fit flooring neatly to vertical interruptions. Follow shape of interrupting item when joint will remain exposed and maintain 1/4 inch (6 mm) ex-pansion space.

F. Install divider strips where flooring terminates at centerline of doors and adjacent to other materials or unfinished floor areas.

G. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other vertical interruptions and terminations of flooring of not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm). In larger areas a 1/2 inch (12 mm) expansion space is required

H. Door Frames:1. Undercut wood door frames and allow for 1/4 inch minimum (6

mm) expansion clearance.2. Do not undercut metal door frames, cut floor panels to fit

around frames. Provide 3/16 inch (5 mm) expansion space and fill with color-matched perimeter sealant.

I. Pipe Holes, Fixture Bolts, Fixture Anchors, Pillars, Fixed Objects:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6270

1. Drill a hole in the flooring 1/2 inch (13 mm) larger than the pipe/anchor diameter to allow for movement.

2. For pipes/anchors located on the long side of a plank or very close to the edge of the tile, saw in toward the hole at 45 de-gree angle.

J. Appliances and Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Install material fully under all kitchen appliances, and under

kitchen sink and bathroom lavatory areas, for potential ADA adaptability in units.

K. Molding and Trim:1. Install moldings and trim in accordance with manufacturer's in-

structions.2. Adhere molding with construction mastic and/or mechanical

when joining another flooring material. 3. Adhere transition and end cap to subfloor with construction

mastic and/or mechanical fasteners.4. Expansion Molding: Bond trim to subfloor. Connect lengths of Ex-

pansion together. Do not install over padding.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. For glued installations prohibit traffic on floor finish for 24 hours after installation.

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.6 SCHEDULES

LOCATION BASIS OF DESIGN

Kitchen & Bathroom: Shaw Floors Natural Impct II “Smoked Bamboo” 00288

Entry, Storage & Hallways along Kitchen: Shaw Floors Natural Impct II “Smoked Bamboo” 00288

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6270

SECTION 09 6816

SHEET CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Sheet carpet.2. Carpet pad.3. Edgings.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. D2859 - Standard Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor

Covering Materials.2. D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build-

ing Materials.4. E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.5. E662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Gen-

erated by Solid Materials.6. F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission

Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

B. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) (www.carpet-rug.com):1. 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet.2. 105 - Standard for Installation of Residential Carpet.3. Indoor Air Quality Testing Program.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (www.nfpa.org) 253 - Test for Criti-cal Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate carpet locations, dye lot limitations, seaming

plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet in each room or area, and type and location of edgings.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6816

2. Samples:a. Carpet: 12 x 12 inch samples showing available colors.

3. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

B. Quality Control Submittals:1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing

laboratory that carpet meets fire hazard classification requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

B. Fire Hazard Classification: Pass flammability requirements of ASTM D2859.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not begin installation until painting and finishing work have been com-pleted.

B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature of spaces and subfloor between 60 and 90 degrees F.2. Humidity in spaces to receive carpet between 20 and 65 percent.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s 2 year warranty providing coverage against defective materials and workmanship.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: 2 percent square yards of each color and pattern.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Carpet:1. Shaw Floors. (www.shawfloors.com) 2. Bigelow Commercial Carpet. (www.bigelowcommercial.com) 3. Mohawk Flooring. (www.mohawkflooring.com)

B. Acceptable Manufacturers - Carpet Pad:1. ER Carpenter Co. (www.carpenter.com) 2. Sponge-Cushion Inc. (www.sponge-cushion.com)

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6816

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Carpet (Basis of Design):1. Shaw Floors - Inspiring Berber.2. Pattern: Solid.3. Color: “Biscotti” 0113B.4. Construction: Level loop.5. Face yarn type: Nylon.6. Face yarn weight: 29.30 ounces per square yard.7. Backing: Softbac Platinum.8. Width: 12 feet.9. Locations: Living/ Dining, all bedrooms, and adjacent closets and hall-

ways.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Seaming Materials: As recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesive: 1. Waterproof, latex based cement formulated specifically for installing

carpet; recommended by carpet manufacturer.

C. Carpet Pad: Flat rubber, or as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Gripper Strip: As recommended by carpet manufacturer for carpet thickness, water resistant plywood with angular pins.

E. Edgings: Preformed metal, or approved substitute, profile required to suit conditions, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that concrete floors have cured a minimum 28 days and do not exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate; remove loose and foreign matter that could impede adhe-sion or performance of flooring.

B. Fill cracks, voids, and depressions with leveling compound.

C. Grind ridges and high spots smooth.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6816

D. Test substrate for moisture content to ASTM F1869; do not install carpet until moisture emission level is acceptable to carpet manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CARPET

A. Install in accordance with CRI 105.

B. Install carpet and pad in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Lay out carpet so that seams will be minimized and as inconspicuous as pos-sible.

D. Longitudinal seams not permitted where width of room or space is less than width of carpet.

E. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continued through a wall opening into another room.

F. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.

G. Install gripper strip at perimeter and around abutting objects. Secure to sub-floor.

H. Install pad using maximum size pieces. Butt edges together and tight to grip-per strip. Remove air pockets and wrinkles; tape joints with 2 inch wide wa-terproof tape. Secure to substrate by spot adhesive method.

I. Stretch carpet according to manufacturer's instructions for percentage of stretch.

J. Fasten carpet securely to strips so that all pins penetrate carpet backing. Tuck raw edges behind strips.

K. Join seams with hot seaming tape. Form seams straight and free of peaks or gaps.

L. Lay carpet tight and flat on pad, well fastened at edges, with uniform ap-pearance. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one room or area.

M. Fit carpet tight to abutting surfaces and penetrations without gaps. Ensure coverage of carpet edges by wall base, trim, escutcheons, and cover plates.

N. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture within each area.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF EDGINGS

A. Install strips where carpet abuts dissimilar flooring materials; secure to subfloor.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6816

B. Center strips under doors where carpet terminates at door openings.

C. Install in longest practical lengths; butt ends tight.

D. Scribe to abutting surfaces.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean spots as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Cut off loose threads flush with top surface.

C. Clean with commercial vacuum cleaner.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 6816

SECTION 09 9100

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Texturing of gypsum board.2. Surface preparation and field application of paints.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) D4442 - Standard Test Method for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials.

B. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) (www.sspc.org) - Painting Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data on materials proposed for use. In-

clude:a. Product designation and grade.b. Surface preparation materials and procedures.c. Product analysis and performance characteristics.

2. Samples:a. 3 x 6 inch samples of each coating system on representative sub-

strate. Step back successive coats so that all coats remain ex-posed. Indicate type of material used for each coat.

b. 12 x 12 inch texture samples on gypsum board backing.3. Paint Schedule: Detailed schedule indicating type and location of sur-

face, coating materials, and number of coats to be applied.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 9100

A. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and re-ducing.

B. Paint Materials: Store at ambient temperature from 45 to 90 degrees F in ven-tilated area, or as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures or relative humidity are outside ranges required by manufacturer.

B. Provide lighting level of 80 footcandles measured mid-height at substrate sur-face.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: 5% of total material applied, but not less than 1 gallon of each color and sheen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Sherwin Williams. (www.sherwin-williams.com) 2. Benjamin Moore and Co. (www.benjaminmoore.com)3. I.C.I. Paints. (www.icipaintstores.com)4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (www.pittsburghpaints.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Paints: As scheduled at end of Section, or approved substitute.

B. Maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content; Interior paints, coat-ings, and accessories:1. Primers: 150 grams per liter.2. Flat paints and coatings: 50 grams per liter.3. Non-flat paints and coatings: 150 grams per liter.4. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust coatings: 250 grams per liter.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessory Materials: Paint thinners and other materials required to achieve specified finishes; commercial quality.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 9100

B. Patching Materials: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.

2.4 MIXES

A. Uniformly mix to thoroughly disperse pigments.

B. Do not thin in excess of manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent coatings.

B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply coatings unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums:1. Gypsum board and plaster: 12 percent.

C. Do not proceed with application of paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General:1. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces.2. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and

fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.3. Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting work of this

section. 4. Seal marks that may bleed through surface finishes with shellac.

B. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry.

C. Gypsum Board:1. Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.2. Apply light orange peel texture in accordance manufacturer's instruc-

tions. D. Plaster:

1. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Finish smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

2. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 9100

E. Galvanized Steel: SSPC Method SP1 - Solvent Cleaning, non petroleum-based.

F. Aluminum: SSPC Method SP1 - Solvent Cleaning.

G. Uncoated Ferrous Metals: 1. SSPC Method SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning or Method SP3 - Power Tool

Cleaning.2. Spot prime paint after repairs.

H. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: 1. SSPC Method SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning or Method SP3 - Power Tool

Cleaning.2. Feather edges to make patches inconspicuous. 3. Prime bare steel surfaces.

I. Interior Trim:1. Wipe off dust and grit. 2. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply primer or first coat immediately after surface preparation is complete to prevent recontamination.

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

C. Apply coatings to minimum dry film thickness recommended by manufac-turer.

D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless specified otherwise.

E. Apply coatings to uniform appearance without laps, sags, curtains, holidays, and brush marks.

F. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

G. Sand between coats on interior trim and metal surfaces.

H. Match final coat to approved color samples.

I. Brush applications: brush out and work coats onto surface in an even film.

J. Spray applications: apply each coat to provide hiding equivalent of brush coats. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up thickness of two coats in one pass.

K. Mechanical and Electrical Components:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 9100

1. Paint factory primed equipment.2. Remove unfinished and primed louvers, grilles, covers, and access pan-

els; paint separately.3. Paint exposed and insulated pipes, conduit, boxes, ducts, hangers,

brackets, collars, and supports unless factory finished.4. Do not paint name tags or identifying markings.5. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment in finished areas.

L. Do not Paint:1. Surfaces indicated on Drawings or specified to be unpainted or unfin-

ished.2. Surfaces with factory applied finish coat or integral finish.3. Architectural metals, including brass, bronze, stainless steel, and chrome

plating.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Touch up or refinish disfigured surfaces.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove paint from adjacent surfaces. Dispose of cans, rags and other rub-bish from the site at the end of each day.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades against damage from painting. B. Touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces caused by

other trades.

3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Types of paint listed herein are set forth as standard of quality and type of coating required for each type of surface.1. Exposed surfaces of type listed in following schedule are to be painted.2. Other exposed surfaces not specifically listed shall receive not less than

two coats of appropriate type of coating.

B. Prime coat shall consist of touch up only on shop primed surfaces. C. Provide minimum dry mil thickness of 3 mils, but in no case less than recom- mended by paint manufacturer.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 9100

SUBSTRATE MANUFACTURER PRIMER TOP COATS

Exterior Surfaces:

Ferrous and Galvanized Metals, Semi-Gloss Finish

Sherwin Williams Latex Primer, All-Surface Enamel

A-100 Exterior Gloss Latex

Fiber Cement Siding & trim - Eggshell/Satin Finish

Sherwin Williams Acrylic Emulsion Conditioner, Loxon Conditioner

Exterior Latex Low Sheen, A-100 Exterior Latex Satin

Exterior Doors/Frames - Semi-Gloss Finish

Sherwin Williams Latex Primer, All-Surface Enamel

Exterior Latex Low Sheen, A-100 Exterior Latex Satin

Interior Surfaces:

Gypsum Board, Ceilings - Eggshell/Satin Finish

Sherwin Williams Acrylic Primer Sealer, Harmony Primer

Interior Latex, Har-mony Eg-Shel

Gypsum Board, Walls - Eggshell/Satin Finish

(dry areas)

Sherwin Williams Acrylic Primer Sealer, Harmony Primer

Interior Latex, Har-mony Eg-Shel

Gypsum Board, Walls - Semi-Gloss Finish

(wet areas)

Sherwin Williams Acrylic Primer Sealer, Harmony Primer

Interior Latex, Har-mony Semi-Gloss

Trim at Windows & Doors - Semi-Gloss Finish

Sherwin Williams Acrylic Primer Sealer, Harmony Primer

Interior Latex, Har-mony Semi-Gloss

Interior Doors - Semi-Gloss Finish

Sherwin Williams Acrylic Primer Sealer, Harmony Primer

Interior Latex, Har-mony Semi-Gloss

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 09 9100

SECTION 10 1429

DIMENSIONAL LETTERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Stainless steel individual letters.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org):1. 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Pro-

cedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels.

2. 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Pro-cedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extru-sions and Panels.

3. 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Pro-cedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extru-sions and Panels.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A480/A480M - Standard Specification for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-

Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.2. A666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip,

Plate, and Flat Bar.3. E527 - Standard Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate character style, layout, dimensions, materials,

finishes, and attachment.2. Samples: Typical letter in specified size, style, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 1429

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Gemini, Inc. (www.signletters.com) 2. Livers Bronze Co., Inc. (www.liversbronze.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: 1. ASTM A480/A480M or ASTM A666, Type 302 or 304.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Type best suited to application.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate letters in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

B. Cut letters from 1/4” inch thick stainless steel plate.

C. Hand tool to sharp, clean edges.

D. Character Style: To be selected from manufacturer’s range.

E. Height: 6 inches.

F. Mounting Method: Projected. 2.5 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin face with satin edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install letters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Set plumb, level, rigid, and aligned.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 1429

SECTION 10 2813

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Toilet, bath and shower accessories.2. Framed mirrors and medicine cabinets.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry, for blocking. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing, for mirrors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products.2. A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stain-

less Steel Tubing for General Service.3. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.4. A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,

Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

5. B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data:

a. Schedule accessories by room; show plans and elevations, and identify room name and number, type and quantity of accessories, and mounting heights.

b. Include manufacturer's brochures showing sizes, details of function, finishes, and attachment methods.

2. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating accessories.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 2813

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Gatco Fine Hardware; Channel Collection. (www.gatco-inc.com)2. Danze; Parma Collection. (www.danze.com)3. Dynasty Hardware; Manhattan Collection.

(www.dynastyhardware.com) 4. Basco, Inc. (www.bascoinc.com)

5. Broan-NuTone. (www.broan.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel:1. Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304, rollable temper.2. Tubing: ASTM A269.

B. Galvanized Steel: 1. ASTM A1008/A1008M.

C. Mirror Glass: See Section 08 8000.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Stainless steel where exposed, hot dip galvanized where con-cealed; type best suited to substrate conditions.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Use stainless steel for exposed surfaces; galvanized steel may be used in con-cealed locations.

B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free from joints, and flat, without distortion.

C. Weld joints of fabricated components and grind smooth.

D. Provide blocking at adaptable restrooms for potential grab bars.

E. Provide hangers, adapters, anchor plates, and accessories required for instal-lation.

F. Shop assemble units and package complete with anchors and fittings.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 2813

2.5 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin/ brushed.

B. Galvanizing: ASTM A123/A123M to 1.25 ounces per square foot.

C. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, satin/ brushed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Set plumb, level, square, and rigid.

3.2 SCHEDULE

NO. DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL NO.

A Toilet Tissue Dispenser Gatco “Channel” satin nickel 4693

B Sink Towel Bar Gatco “Channel” satin nickel 4692

C Shower Towel Bar Gatco “Channel” satin nickel, 24” long

4691

D Robe Hook Gatco “Channel” satin nickel 4695

E Shower Curtain Rod Basco SS concealed screw flange w/ 3’ rod

1200B and 1215B

F Tub Curtain Rod Basco SS concealed screw flange w/ 5’ rod

1200B and 1215B

G Vanity Wall Mirror Broan 24x36 SS frame

H Medicine Cabinet Mirror Basco 24x36 3” recessed, SS frame 392P-W

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 2813

SECTION 10 4413

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Portable fire extinguishers.2. Cabinets.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) (www.nfpa.org) 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) (www.ul.com):1. 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers.2. 626 - 2-1/2 Gallon Stored Pressure, Water Type Fire Extinguishers.3. 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet locations and mounting heights.2. Product Data: Include data on extinguishers and cabinet dimensions,

operational features, materials, finishes, and anchorage.

B. Closeout Submittals:1. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill, or recharge schedules and re-

certification requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide fire extinguishers complying with UL 711 and 2010 Oregon Fire Code.

B. Cabinets in Fire Rated Partitions: Tested in accordance with ASTM E814 with fire resistance rating equivalent to adjacent construction.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 4413

C. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating extinguishers.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. JL Industries. (www.jlindustries.com) 2. Larsen's Mfg. Co. (www.larsensmfg.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Extinguishers: 1. Multi-purpose dry chemical type, UL 299, cast steel tank, Class 2A:10B:C,

5 pound nominal capacity.2. Free from CFCs, HCFCs, and Halons.

D. Cabinets:1. Formed galvanized steel sheet, 18 gage minimum.2. Configuration: Surface mounted, sized to accommodate extinguishers.3. Trim: Square Edge, 1-3/4 inch trim on frame and door. 4. Door:

a. Vertical glass style, equipped with pull handle and latch.b. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge.c. Glazing: Clear acrylic.d. Graphics: Letter FIRE EXTINGUISHER vertically on door in black die-

cut vinyl pressure sensitive letters.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Hardware: Type best suited to application.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Cabinet:1. Exterior and door: Primed for field painting.2. Interior: Baked enamel, white color.

E. Extinguishers: Baked enamel, red color.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 4413

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install at two locations equidistance on each floor, on building face without obstructing path of travel on walkway.

C. Set plumb, level, and rigid.

D. Place an extinguisher in each cabinet.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 4413

SECTION 10 5500

POSTAL SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Cluster-type, multiple mailboxes with hinged doors.2. Collection boxes.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, for slabs or footings, as re- quired.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org) 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.

B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.2. A591/A591M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-

Coated, for Light Coating Weight (Mass) Applications.3. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet

and Plate.4. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Ex-

truded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.5. E527 - Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys.

C. United States Postal Service (USPS) Standard - Standards Governing the De-sign of Pedestal-Mounted Centralized Mail Receptacles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Include plan, elevations, dimensions, materials, finishes,

hardware, accessories, and numbering system.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to USPS Standards.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 5500

B. Conform to applicable accessibility code for heights of mailbox units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Security Mfg. Co. (www.securitymanufacturing.com) 2. Florence Mfg. Co. (www.florencemailboxes.com) 3. Bommer Industries, Inc. (www.bommer.com) 4. Salsbury Industries. (www.mailboxes.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: 1. Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 or T6 alloy and temper.2. Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy suitable for forming and finishing as specified.

B. Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A591/A591M, Class B electrogalvanized.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Pedestal Mailboxes:1. Type: Cluster type, pedestal mounted, front loading.2. Enclosure: Sheet aluminum compartments.

a. Sheet steel construction with rain hood.b. Double wall sheet steel compartments.c. Concealed continuous hinged load door for USPS access, and

latching system prepared for USPS lock.3. Doors: Aluminum extrusions.

a. Patron boxes: 12 inches wide x 3 inches high, with piano hinges. 48 minimum count.

b. Parcel boxes: 12 inches x 14 inches, with piano hinges, 4 minimum count.

c. Numbering: aluminum tab with 1-1/4 inch high black numbers.d. Locks: Five pin cam spring bolt type cylinder locks; each lock keyed

differently. Furnish three keys per lock.4. Pedestal: Formed steel sheet, minimum 14 gage, with top and base

plates.

B. Collection Boxes:1. Type: Front loading, single hopper.2. Extruded aluminum door, frame, and perimeter trim.3. Sheet aluminum compartment.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 5500

4. Prepare door to receive USPS lock. 5. Install with centerline of mail slots at 36 to 48 inches above finish grade.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Aluminum: AAMA 611, Architectural Class I anodized to 0.0007 inch minimum thickness, clear.

B. Steel: Phosphate treat; apply manufacturer's standard prime coat and baked enamel finish coat, color to be selected from manufacturer’s full color range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Set plumb, level, and aligned.

C. Attach to supporting construction using anchor type best suited to substrate. Conceal fasteners.

D. Fit trim with tight corners and intersections.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 10 5500

SECTION 11 3100

APPLIANCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Ranges.2. Disposers.3. Microwave ovens w/ hoods.4. Dishwashers.5. Refrigerators.6. Stackable washers and dryers.7. Connection to utilities.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Division 22: Connection to domestic water system.3. Division 22: Connection to sanitary waste system.4. Division 23: Connection to ventilation system.5. Division 26: Electrical: Connection to power supply.6. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Show locations of appliances, dimensions, required

clearances, rough-in requirements, power requirements, and wiring dia-grams.

2. Product Data: Provide product data on appliances showing materials, finishes, characteristics, limitations, and electrical characteristics.

3. Warranty: Sample warranty form.

B. Closeout Submittals:1. Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Appliances: Energy Star rated.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver appliances with manufacturer's protective coverings in place; do not remove until just prior to installation.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 11 3100

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty providing coverage against de-fects.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. GE Appliances. (www.geappliances.com) 2. Maytag Co. (www.maytag.com) 3. Whirlpool. (www.whirlpool.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Appliances: Scheduled at end of Section. B. Accessories: Provide equipment complete with all necessary accessories in- cluding, but not limited to anchor bolts and utility connection devices.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install appliances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ap-proved shop Drawings.

B. Set plumb, level, and aligned.

C. Provide blocking and backing where necessary. Verify equipment type, lo- cation and extent of work.

D. Connect to domestic water, sanitary waste, natural gas, and ventilation sys-tems.

E. Connect to power supply.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust appliances for proper operation.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 11 3100

3.3 SCHEDULE

APPLIANCE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL FINISH

Range GE Free-standing electric JB400DPBB Black

Microwave w/ Vent Hood GE Spacemaker 1.7 CF Over-the-Range

JVM1740DPBB Black

Refrigerator/ Freezer GE 18.1 CF Top-Freezer GTH18HCCBB Black

Dishwasher GE Tall Tub Built-in GLD4500VBB Black

Garbage Disposal GE 1/2 HP Continuous Feed GGFC520V

Clothes Washer/Dryer GE 3.3 CF Washer/ 5.9 CF Electric Dryer

GTUP270EMWW White

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 11 3100

SECTION 12 2113

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Horizontal slat louver blinds at windows.2. Operating hardware.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Describe blind construction and finishes.2. Samples: 3 inch long slat samples showing available colors.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install blinds until painting and finishing work is complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Hunter Douglas, Inc. (www.hunterdouglas.com) 2. Levolor Contract. (www.levolor.com) 3. Graber. (www.graberblinds.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Louver Slats: 1 inch wide, prefinished spring tempered aluminum, horizontal slats with radiused corners.

B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene ladders.

C. Head Rail: Prefinished, formed aluminum or steel box, internally fitted for hardware, pulleys, and bearings for blind operation.

D. Cord: Braided nylon or polypropylene.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 12 2113

E. Control Wand: Hollow extruded plastic, height of window opening less 12 inches.

F. Support Brackets: Suitable for wall or soffit mounting, formed metal to match head rail, allowing removal of head rail for maintenance without removing bracket.

G. Operation: Full range lift locking.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate blinds to fit openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch.

B. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1/4 inch between assemblies, occurring at window mullion centers.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Slats: Baked enamel, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

B. Head Rails and Brackets: Baked enamel, color to match slats.

C. Ladders and cords: Dyed to closely match slats.

D. Control Wands: Clear.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure with concealed fasteners.

C. Place intermediate head supports at maximum 48 inches on center.

D. Installation Tolerances:1. Maximum gap at window opening perimeter: 1/4 inch.2. Maximum offset from level: 1/8 inch.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust blinds for proper operation.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 12 2113

SECTION 12 2116

VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Vertical louver blinds at patio doors.2. Operating hardware.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Product Data: Describe blind construction and finishes.2. Samples: 3 inch long slat samples showing available colors.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install blinds until painting and finishing work is complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Hunter Douglas, Inc. (www.hunterdouglas.com) 2. Levolor Contract. (www.levolor.com) 3. Graber. (www.graberblinds.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Louver Slats: 3 inches wide, curved vinyl, radiused corners. Valance to match.

B. Top Channel/ headrail: Prefinished, formed aluminum or steel box, internally fitted for hardware, pulleys, and bearings for blind operation.

C. Cord: Braided nylon or polypropylene. Standard Cord and Chain.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 12 2116

D. Support Brackets: Suitable for wall or soffit mounting, formed metal to match head rail, allowing removal of head rail for maintenance without removing bracket.

E. Operation: Free hanging, 180 degree rotating.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Slats: Color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

B. Top Channel and Brackets: Baked enamel, color to be selected from manu-facturer's full color range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure with concealed fasteners.

C. Place intermediate head supports at maximum 48 inches on center.

D. Installation Tolerances:1. Maximum gap at window opening perimeter: 1/4 inch.2. Maximum offset from level: 1/8 inch.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust blinds for proper operation.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 12 2116

SECTION 12 9300

SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Benches.2. Bicycle racks.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments. 2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, for slabs or footings, as re- quired.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, dimensions, attachment, and rela-

tionship to adjacent construction.2. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data.3. Samples: 3 x 3 inch samples showing available colors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Huntco Supply. (www.huntco.com)2. SiteScapes, Inc. (www.sitescapesonline.com)3. Landscape Forms, Inc. (www.landscapeforms.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Benches: 1. Type: Schedule 40 steel construction, backless.2. Manufacturer: Huntco, or approved substitute.3. Model: Willamette4. Size: 72 inches long x 22 inches deep, 22 inches high at seat.5. Color and finish: polyethylene copolymer-based powder coating. Color

to be selected from manufacturer’s full range.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 12 9300

B. Bicycle Racks: 1. Type: Schedule 40 steel pipe, concealed flange-mount.

2. Manufacturer: Huntco, or approved substitute.3. Model: HP Series, two bicycles per rack.4. Size: 2-3/8 inch diameter x 36 inches high x 24 to 30 inches wide.5. Color and finish: polyethylene copolymer-based powder coating. Color

to be selected from manufacturer’s full range.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Type best suited to application; stainless or corrosion resistant coated steel with vandal resist heads.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install furnishings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ap-proved Shop Drawings.

B. Set plumb, level, and rigid.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 12 9300

SECTION 14 2100

ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Electric traction passenger elevators. 2. Cab with doors, frames and finishes.

3. Hoistway doors and frames. 4. Machines, controllers, hoistway equipment and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work re-

quirements. 2. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Hoistway Framing. 3. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Pit Ladder and miscellaneous

elevator support. 4. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Temporary platform assembly.

4. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Cab flooring. 5. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: For ventila-

tion system. 6. Division 26 - Electrical: Connection to power supply and lighting,

switchboards. 7. Division 27 - Communications: For Telephone service for elevators

and for Internet connection to elevator controllers for remote moni- toring.

8. Division 28 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Heat, smoke, and products of combustion sensing devices, fire alarm signal lines to contacts in machine space.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME A17.1/CAN/CSA B44 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escala- tors.

B. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

D. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.

E. ANSI/UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Arrange elevator components in control closet or machinery space so equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced with minimal distur- bance to other equipment and components.

B. Where permitted by code, provide all elevator equipment including con- trols, drives, transformers, and rescue features within the elevator hoistway.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer/installer's product data, including: 1. Descriptive brochures or detail drawings of car and hall fixtures,

cab ceilings, and product features. 2. Power Information: Horsepower, starting current, running current,

machine and control heat release, and electrical requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer/installer's shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating location of equipment, loads, dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, fabrication, fasten- ers, hardware, finish, options, accessories, and other information to render totally functional elevators.

D. Samples: Submit manufacturer/installer's samples of standard colors and finishes of finish materials.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer/installer's operation and maintenance manual; including operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning instructions; trouble shooting guide; renewal parts catalogs; and electrical wiring diagrams.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer/installer's standard warranty.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer/Installer's Qualifications: Specialize in manufacturing and installing elevator equipment, with a minimum of 10 years successful ex- perience.

B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Elevator design, clearances, construction, workmanship, materials,

and installation, unless specified otherwise, shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.1, handicap accessibility, Americans with Dis- abilities Act, and other codes having legal jurisdiction.

2. ANSI/ASME A17.1 shall govern, except where codes having legal jurisdiction include more rigid requirements or conflict with ANSI/ ASME A17.1.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

3. Elevator shall follow design and manufacturing procedures certi- fied in accordance with ISO 9001:2000 to meet product and serv- ice requirements for quality assurance for new products.

4. Where product is in variance to the published ANSI/ASME A17.1 model code, provide a 3rd party AECO certification demonstrating equivalent function, safety, and performance.

C. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Convene pre-installation meeting before start of installation of ele-

vators. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this sec

tion, including Contractor, Architect, and elevator manufacturer/ installer.

3. Review examination, installation, field quality control, adjusting, cleaning, protection, and coordination with other work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer/installer's original, un- opened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer/installer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Electrical Power: 1. Owner will arrange for temporary 220 VAC, single-phase, 60 Hz.,

GFCI-protected electricity to be available for installation of eleva- tor components.

B. Installation of the Elevator: 1. General Contractor will provide permanent three-phase power

prior to installation start. 2. General Contractor will provide clear, rollable access to a 20' x 10'

secure and dry storage area prior to delivery. 3. General Contractor will provide a clean, dry, and complete hoist-

way along with temporary installation platform and all required OSHA-compliant barricades prior to delivery.

C. Temporary Use of Elevator: 1. Owner will negotiate with manufacturer/installer for temporary use

of elevator, if required. 2. Temporary use of elevator shall be in accordance with terms and

conditions of manufacturer/installer's temporary acceptance form.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer/installer shall guarantee materials and workmanship of equipment installed under these specifications and make good, defects not due to ordinary wear or to improper use, which may develop within 1 year after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Elevator maintenance service shall be performed by elevator manufacturer/installer.

B. Elevators shall receive regular maintenance on each unit for period of 12 months after completion of work specified herein or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier.

C. Trained employees shall make periodic examinations and perform work includ-ing necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling, and replacing parts to keep elevators in operation, except parts that require replacement because of accidents, van-dalism, misuse, or negligence by parties other than manufacturer/installer.

D. Manufacturer/installer shall perform all Work, except emergency minor adjust-ment call-back service, during regular working hours. Manufacturer/installer shall provide emergency minor adjustment call-back service, during regular working hours.

E. Should Owner request that examinations, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, re-pairs, replacements, or emergency minor adjustment call-back service, unless specified herein, be performed on other than manufacturer/installer's regular working hours of regular working days, manufacturer/installer shall absorb straight-time labor charges and Owner will compensate manufacturer/installer for overtime premium, travel time, and expense at normal billing rates.

F. Elevator Control System:1. Include built-in remote diagnostic module to relay constant status of eleva-

tors and control system to a 24-hour, 7-days-a-week, central-monitoring fa-cility.

2. Remote Monitoring Device: Transmit information on current status of eleva-tors, including malfunctions, system errors, and shutdown.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER/ INSTALLER

A. Schindler Elevator Corp. (www.us.schindler.com)

B. Elevator shall be installed by elevator manufacturer.

2.2 ELEVATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS

A. Electric Traction Passenger Elevators: Basis of design is the Schindler 3300 Gear-less Traction Elevator.

B. Elevator Equipment Summary:1. Application: Machine Room Less 2. Counterweight Location: Side3. Machine Location: Top of the hoistway mounted on car and counterweight guide rails4. Control Space Location: Top landing entrance frame or entrance frame at one floor below the top landing5. Service: General Purpose Passenger6. Quantity of Units: 17. Capacity: 3000 lbs8. Speed: 150 fpm9. Travel: 33 feet, 0 inches10. Landings: 411. Front Openings: 412. Operation: Microprocessor Single Car13. Cab Height: 7'-9''14. Guide Rails: 15 lb. per foot15. Entrance Type and Width: Two Speed Side Opening Doors 3'-6'' 16. Entrance height: 7'-0”17. Power Supply: 208 Volts 3 Phase 60 Hz

C. Performance1. Car Speed: -10% to +5% of contract speed under any loading condition or

direction of travel.2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125% of rated load per

code.

D. Ride Quality:1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 15 mg3. Vertical Jerk (maximum): 2 ft/sec3

4. Acceleration (maximum): 1.6 ft/sec2

5. In Car Noise: 53-60 dB(A)6. Stopping Accuracy: ±5mm7. Starts per hour (maximum): 180

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

E. Elevator Operation1. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor based controller, op-

eration shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. When all calls have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served.

2. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide re-programmable group automatic system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching algorithm designed to minimize passenger waiting time.

F. Operating Features - Standard 1. Door Light Curtain Protection 2. Static AC Drive 3. Phase Monitor Relay 4. Cab Overload with Indicator 5. Load-weighing 6. Central Alarm 7. Remote Monitoring 8. Firefighter's Operation 9. Automatic Evacuation When the main line power is lost for longer than 5 seconds the emergency

battery power supply provides power automatically to the elevator control-ler. If the car is at a floor when the power fails, it remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If the car is between floors, it is raised or lowered to the first available landing, opens it doors, and shuts down.

2.3 EQUIPMENT: CONTROL COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SPACE

A. Controller: Provide microprocessor based control system to perform all of the functions of safe elevator operation, as well as perform car and group opera-tional control.1. All high voltage (110v or above) contact points inside the inspection and

test panel shall be protected from accidental contact in a situation where the access panels are open.

2. The controller shall be distributed throughout the elevator system located in the overhead, cab and inspection and test panel. The inverter will be mounted in the overhead adjacent to the hoist machine and an inspection and test panel will be located in the door jamb at the top floor or one floor below the top floor. No elevator equipment mechanical rooms or closets are required.

3. Provide multi-bus control architecture to reduce cabling, material and waste.

B. Drive: Provide a Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC Closed Loop drive sys-tem. Provide stable start without high peak current, quickly reaching a low en-ergy consumption level.

C. Inspection and Test Panel: Integrated control equipment, main inspection and test panel in door frame at top level served or at one floor below the top level served.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

2.4 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY COMPONENTS

A. Machine:1. Gearless asynchronous AC motor with integral drive sheave, service and

emergency brakes.2. Design machine to enable direct power transfer, thereby avoiding loss of

power.3. Design machine to be compact, lightweight and durable to optimize mate-

rial usage and save space.4. Mount to structural support channels on top of guide rail system as appli-

cable in hoistway overhead.

B. Governor: 1. Tension type over-speed governor with remote manual reset.2. Mount to structural support channels as applicable in hoistway overhead.

C. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Compression spring type buffers to meet code.

D. Hoistway Operating Devices:1. Emergency Stop switch in the pit.2. Terminal stopping switches.3. Emergency stop switch on the machine.

E. Positioning System: System consisting of proximity sensors and door zone vanes.

F. Guide Rails and Attachments: Provide Tee-section steel rails with brackets and fasteners. Side counterweight arrangements shall have a dual purpose bracket that combines both counterweight guide rails, and one of the car guide rails to building fastening.

G. Suspension System: Non circular Elastomeric coated suspension media with high tensile grade steel cords.

H. Governor rope: Steel wire rope with 6 mm diameter.

2.5 EQUIPMENT: HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Doors and Frames:1. UL rated with required fire rating.2. Doors: Rigid flush panel construction with reinforcement ribs.3. Frames: Securely fasten at corners to form unit frame. Frames shall be

bolted.

B. Finish:1. Exposed Areas of Corridor Frames: #4 stainless steel on all floors. 2. Doors: #4 stainless steel on all floors.

C. Sills: Aluminum on all floors.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

D. Entrance Markings and Jamb Plates: Provide standard entrance jamb tactile markings on both jambs, at all floors. Plate Mounting: Refer to manufacturer drawings.

2.6 EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS

A. Car Frame and Safety: Provide car frame with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure. The safety shall be integral to the car frame and shall be flexible guide clamp type.

B. Platform: Provide platform of steel construction with plywood subfloor and alu-minum threshold.

C. Car Guides: Provide sliding guide shoes mounted to top and bottom of both car and counterweight frame. Arrange each guide shoe assembly to maintain con-stant contact on the rail surfaces. Provide retainers in areas with Seismic design requirements.

D. Provide central guiding system to reduce mechanical friction and energy con-sumption.

E. Steel Cab:1. Fire rating: Provide Class B fire rating for cab, or Class A fire rating where re-

quired by local Code.2. Car wall finish: The cab walls shall be steel with plastic laminate walls.

Great Lakes Series, “Pittsburgh Steel”. 3. Base and frieze: Aluminum.4. Car front finish: Brushed stainless steel.5. Car door finish: Brushed stainless steel.6. Ceiling: Canopy ceiling, finished in painted silver metallic with compact

fluorescent lighting. Provide lighting consisting of four compact fluorescent energy saving lights located in two semi-oval lateral cutouts located on the center-sides of the cab ceiling, Lexan lens cover.

7. Handrail: 1 3/8'' round and curved brushed aluminum. Locate on rear wall. 8. Flooring: Ceramic Tile. See Section 09 3000. Not to exceed 5/8” finished

depth.9. Ventilation: Provide one-speed fan in canopy.10. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide an emergency power unit employing a

12 volt sealed rechargeable battery and static circuits to illuminate the ele-vator car and provide current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.

11. Emergency Siren: Provide siren mounted on top of the car that is activated when the Alarm button in the car operating panel is engaged.

12. Emergency Exit Switch: Provide an electrical contact to open the safety circuit when the emergency car top exit is opened. When the exit door is opened, the top exit switch shall signal the control and the car will be un-able to move.

13. Emergency Exit Lock: Provide an emergency exit lock where required by local code.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

2.7 DOOR OPERATOR AND REOPENING DEVICES

A. Door Operator: Provide a closed loop VVVF high performance door operator with frequency controlled drive for fast and reliable operation to open and close the car and hoistway doors simultaneously.

B. In case of interruption or failure of electric power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from within the car, in accordance with applicable code. Pro-vide emergency devices and keys for opening doors from the landing as re-quired by local code.

C. Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling at the respective landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time interval or im-mediately upon pressing of a car button. Provide door open button in the car operating panel. Momentary pressing of this button shall reopen the doors and reset the time interval.

D. Provide door hangers and tracks for each car and hoistway door. Contour tracks to match the hanger sheaves. Design hangers for power operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have polyu-rethane tires and pre-lubricated sealed for life bearings.

E. Electronic Door Safety Device: Equip car doors with concealed transmitter and receiver infrared beam devices to detect presence of object in process of pass-ing through hoistway entrance and car doorway (light curtain device).1. Use multi-beam scanning without moving parts to detect obstructions in

door opening.2. Detector Device: Prevent doors from closing, or if they have already

started closing, cause doors to reopen and remain open while object is within detection zone.

3. Horizontal Beams: Minimum of 33 infra red beams to fill doorway from ground level to a height of 6 feet.

2.8 EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES

A. Car Operating Panel: Provide a car operating panel with all push buttons, key switches and message indicators for elevator operation.1. Full height car operating panel shall be surface-mounted on front return.2. Comply with handicap requirements.3. Push Buttons: Mechanical, illuminating using long-lasting LEDs for each floor

served.4. Emergency Buttons: Provide in accordance with code. Emergency alarm

button, door open and door close buttons.

B. Features of the Car Operating Panel Shall Include:1. Raised markings and Braille provided to the left hand side of each push but-

ton.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

2. Car Lantern: Provide LED illuminated car lantern with direction arrows to comply with local code when hall lanterns are not provided.

3. Door open and close push buttons. 4. Firefighter's hat and Phase 2 Key-switch5. Inspection key-switch.6. Key-switch for optional Independent Service Operation7. Illuminated alarm button with raised marking.8. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number.9. Help Button: Activation of help button will initiate two-way communication

between car and a location inside the building, switching over to alternate location if call is unanswered, where personnel are available to take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement.

10. Certificate Frame.

C. Hall Fixtures: Provide hall fixtures with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation.1. Push buttons: Metallic tactile push buttons, up button and down button at

intermediate floors, single button at each terminal floor.2. Height: Comply with handicap requirements.3. Illumination: Illuminating using long-lasting low power LEDs.

D. Hall Lanterns and Position Indicators.1. LED illuminated direction arrows with audible and visible call acknow-

ledgement.

E. Hoistway access switches: Provide key-switch at top and/or bottom floor in en-trance jamb as required by local code.

F. Firefighter's Phase 1 Service: Key switch in brushed stainless steel cover plate.

G. Fixture Cover Plates: For push buttons, hall lanterns and position indicators, resis-tant white back-printed glass, no screws required for mounting. Provide stainless steel cover plates for Firefighters Phase I switch and hoistway access switches, with tamper resistant screws in same finish.

H. Mounting: Mount hall fixtures in entrance frames.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, and pits before starting elevator installa-tion.

B. Verify hoistway, pit, overhead, and openings are of correct size, within toler-ances, and are ready for work of this section.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

C. Verify walls are plumb where openings occur and ready for entrance sill installa-tion. Traditional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required.

D. Verify hoistway is clear and plumb, with variations not to exceed -0 to +1 inch at any point. Verify projections greater than 4” must be beveled not less than 75 degrees from horizontal. No negative tolerance is permitted for minimum hoist-way dimensions.

E. Verify minimum 2-hour fire-resistance rating of hatch walls.

F. Notify Architect in writing of dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detri-mental to proper installation or performance of elevators.

G. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to manufacturer/installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install elevators in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions and ANSI/ASME A17.1.

B. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings, and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests of elevator as required by ANSI/ASME A17.1 and governing codes.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust elevators for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions.

B. Adjust elevators for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort.

C. Adjust doors to prevent opening of doors at landing on corridor side, unless car is at rest at that landing, or is in leveling zone and stopping at that landing.

D. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to within 1/4 inch of landing.

E. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer/installer's in-structions and as approved by Architect.

F. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully re-paired as determined by Architect.

3.5 CLEANING

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

A. Clean elevators promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed elevators from damage during construction in accordance with the negotiated temporary use agreement between Owner and manufacturer's installer.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 14 2100

SECTION 21 0000

BASIC FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. System Description: 1. Size to provide coverage to entire building, per NFPA 13R, 2007 and OSSC 2010 requirements. 2. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply. 3. Coordinate system with building controls system and building fire and smoke alarm system. Panels, wiring and connections are Division 26. 4. Design and materials to conform with UL. 5. System to be designed with CPVC piping.

1.2 STANDPIPE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. System Description: 1. Provide a wet standpipe at the fire riser room with a butterfly control valve and drain interconnected to the fire system riser. a. Install the wet standpipe vertically through the sprinkler control rooms at each floor. b. Provide a brass 2-1/2” hose valve at each floor, inside the sprinkler room. c. At the top floor sprinkler room, provide a hose valve at the standard location as well as at the ceiling, near the roof hatch. 2. Provide a manual dry standpipe at each exterior stairway. Each stair- way is to have its own independent dry standpipe with 2-1/2” hose valves at the intermediate landings and a 4” x 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” FDC at the bottom.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 21 0000

SECTION 21 0500

FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.1 RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. System Description: 1. UL listed for fire protection CPVC pipe and fittings as manufactured by Spears, or approved for the sprinkler system.

1.2 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Tyco, Globe, Reliable, or approved.

B. Residential Areas: Recessed Pendent Tyco Model LF-II, 4.9K, White, 155 Deg F.

C. Balconies: Dry Sidewall Globe Model GL-QR, 5.6K, Chrome, 155 Deg F.

1.3 STANDPIPE SYSTEMS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. System Description: 1. UL listed for fire protection schedule 10 black steel main piping and duc- tile iron grooved fittings at the wet standpipe. UL listed for fire protection schedule 40 galvanized piping and ductile iron grooved fittings at the manual dry standpipe systems.

1.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Wet pipe sprinkler system with a monitored butterfly control valve and resi- dential riser manifold with a paddle flow switch, gauge and test/drain valve. B. Wet standpipe system with a monitored butterfly control valve and hose valves at each level and next to the roof hatch. C. Manual dry standpipe systems to have a 4” x 2-1/2” x 2-1/2” FDC and hose valves at intermediate landings at each stairwell.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 21 0500

SECTION 23 0500

HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the HVAC work specified in this Division.

B. The requirements of this Section apply to the HVAC systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 23 sections.

C. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and/or methods listed, mentioned, shown and/or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes.

D. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems:1. Heating and cooling equipment.3. Complete piping systems including insulation, valves, supports, etc.4. Air handling equipment including packaged equipment and exhaust

fans.5. Air distribution systems including ductwork, dampers, insulation, and air

inlets and outlets.6. HVAC control system.7. Special systems as specified herein.

E. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the label of a recognized testing laboratory such as UL or CSA.

B. Whenever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern.

C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: 1. Federal Specifications (FS)

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)6. Factory Mutual (FM)7. International Building Code (IBC) with State and Local Amendments8. International Mechanical Code (IMC) with State and Local

Amendments9. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with State and Local Amendments10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)12. International Fire Code (IFC) with State and Local Amendments13. Energy Policy Act (EPAct)14. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)15. American Gas Association (AGA)

D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner.

E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed.

F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both.

G. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing-in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings of other specification divisions.

H. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment’s UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

1.3 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items listed in other sections of this Specification.

1.4 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS

A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions.

B. Plumbing piping systems and fixtures and fire suppression piping systems are specified under other Divisions of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein.

C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid.

D. All sections of Division 23 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 23. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES (SUBMITTALS)

A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section.

B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the time constraints of the construction period.

C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used.

D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method.

E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

F. Include field wiring diagrams and connection diagrams for all control and/or low voltage systems, including floor plans.

G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to provide quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor’s responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data.

H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3-ring plastic binder with a clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time.

1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION

A. Materials other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted.

1.7 CHANGE ORDERS

A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work.

1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Project Record (As-Installed) Drawings:1. Maintain a set of record drawings on the job site as directed in Division

1.2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date.3. Record and accurately indicate the following:

a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping dimensioned from permanent building features.

b. Locations of all valves.c. Locations of all fire dampers and other airflow control devices. d. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders,

obstructions, etc. Eradicate extraneous information.e. Model numbers of installed equipment.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review.5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents.

B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit five (5) sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions, including manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams, and parts lists and vendors for all serviceable items of equipment, valve charts, balancing data, final control diagrams showing final set points, and any additional equipment added by change order, bound in three-ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose-leaf binders organized with index and thumb-tab markers for each classification of equipment or data.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice.

B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in successful operation for a minimum of two years. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5% to plus 10% as approved in each case.

B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper or correct power and fuel-burning characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project.

C. Efficiency: Heating and cooling equipment shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2001 and the State Energy Code. Where equipment efficiencies are indicated, the use of alternate or substitute manufacturer’s equipment with lower efficiencies is not permitted.

D. Storage and Handling:1. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and

legible. 2. Handling: Avoid damage.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

3. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping.

2.2 ACCESS PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Inryco/Milcor, Bilco, Elmdor, Karp, Potter-Roemer or accepted substitute. Inryco/Milcor Style DW, K, or M panels as required by construction.

B. Construction: Flush style, fire rated in fire rated partitions and ceilings. Screwdriver latches on all access panels.

2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, inserts, supports, etc., of the indicated MSS type and size. The Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry Practice SP-58 and SP-69 are referenced in this section.

B. Manufacturers: B-Line, Carpenter & Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut, Tolco, Erico, or accepted substitute. Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where applicable (or other manufacturers as noted).

C. Corrosion Protection: Provide materials which are zinc plated or factory painted to prevent corrosion. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, plastic coated, or by other recognized industry methods.

2.4 PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING

A. Through-penetration fire stopping system tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 3M, Metacaulk, SpecSeal, or approved.

B. Select system for proper application based on wall construction, type of penetrating item, wall rating, etc.

2.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Roof piping, tubing, and conduit penetrations shall be protected by a manufactured penetration assembly. Portals Plus, Inc. or approved.

B. Roof penetration system shall include continuously welded, 18 gauge galvanized steel roof curb with compatible integral base, acrylic coated ABS curb cap with raised molded opening, EPDM molded cap suitable for penetrating item(s), and stainless steel sealing clamps.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION

A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, roughing-in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work.

B. Utility Locations: The location of existing utilities, wires, conduits, pipes, ducts, or other service facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation.

C. Sleeves, Inserts, Cast-in-Place Work: Provide sleeves, inserts, anchoring devices, cast-in-place work, etc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule.

D. Coordination: 1. The drawings are based on equipment of a certain manufacturer and

may be identified as such. Where alternate manufacturers or approved substitutes are incorporated into the work, any required design changes are the responsibility of the contractor. Such changes may include changes in utility or system connection sizes, location, or orientation, service clearances, structural support or acoustic considerations.

2. Where the work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare accurate scale shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation and submit prior to purchase/fabrication/installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination.

3. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, chases, mountings, backing, foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items.

4. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist.

E. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re-routing of piping be necessary, provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

3.2 UTILITY COORDINATION

A. Utility Coordination: Coordinate all aspects of the incoming utility services indicated with the city engineer, serving utility, and the off-street improvements contractor. Requirements of the utility company which exceed the provisions made on the Drawings or covered by these Specifications shall take precedence. Provisions made on the Drawings or Specifications in excess of the utility company's requirements shall take precedence. No additional compensation will be allowed the contractor for connection fees or additional work or equipment not covered in the Drawings or Specifications which are a result of policies of the serving utilities.

3.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING

A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings.

B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment.

C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system.

3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all equipment and comply with Code requirements.

B. Arrangement: Arrange piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless indicated otherwise, conceal all piping. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. Give right-of-way to piping which must slope for drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, girders, footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

C. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for all equipment, dielectric unions, valves and items requiring service and installed above ceilings, behind walls, or in furring, complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size, number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than 16" x 20" where personnel must pass through.

D. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, temperature controls, float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture.

E. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by piping, hangers, conduits, etc., provide clear self-adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) the proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping

and equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.

2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods.

3. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at panel points only.

B. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping

systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install specified seismic restraints to restrict excessive movement.

2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded.

D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets in accordance with MSS SP-69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable.

F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights.

G. Installation of drilled-in concrete anchors shall comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for working load, depth of embedment, and spacing between anchors and from the edge of the slab. Use only wedge-style anchors.

3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Provide complete connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental piping, fittings, trim and labor necessary for a finished working installation.

B. Verify the rough-in and finish requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring HVAC piping or duct connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough-in.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs. At final completion, thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

B. Protect floors, walls, framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are conducted with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the plywood. Clean-up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the Architect, due to the pipe cutting/threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade.

3.8 PIPE PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING

A. Install as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the product’s UL listing. Below are the minimum installation requirements.1. Install specified penetrating item(s) with required annular spacing in

proper size wall or floor opening. Support penetrating item(s) adequately on both sides of construction.

2. Clean all opening and penetrating item surfaces in penetration area to remove loose debris, dirt, oil, wax, grease, old caulking, etc.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

3. If needed or required for gypsum or concrete block walls, install specified galvanized steel wire mesh or sleeve recessed and centered inside wall around penetrating item(s) so that it is snug against perimeter of opening.

4. When required, install specified type and depth of backing material in annular space, recessed to required fill depth of fire stopping caulking.

5. Gun, trowel, and/or pump fire stopping sealant to specified depth in annular space around penetrating item(s). Trowel sealant surfaces flush with wall or floor surfaces to a smooth, defect-free finish. Where required, apply specified size caulking bead around penetrating item(s) at zero annular contact areas and tool smooth.

3.9 HVAC WORK CLOSEOUT

A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment requiring same. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing-in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of leaks, obstructions, or contamination.

B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings as previously specified in this Section.

C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work.

D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel who are to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of the HVAC equipment and systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems.

END OF SECTION

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0500

SECTION 23 0590

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Included: After completion of the work of installation, test and regulate all components of the new heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems to verify air volumes and heating-cooling flow rates indicated on the Drawings.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 05 00, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

C. Balancing Organization:1. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Performed by a

firm providing this service established in the State of Oregon.2. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Balancing Data: Include the following minimum information in the Operation and Maintenance Data, as specified in Section 23 05 00.1. Names or initials of personnel performing the balancing.2. Dates balancing was performed.3. List of balancing instruments utilized.4. Weather conditions at the time of the test.5. Mechanical system descriptions.6. All motor rated voltages, amps, starter and overload protective device

sizes.7. All motor operating data.8. Fan cfm, rpm, operating static pressures, driven and motor sheave data,

and all drive changes necessitated to obtain design capacities. List actual minimum outside air volumes measured for each system.

9. All supply, return and exhaust air outlet cfm readings.

1.3 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

A. Adjusting and Balancing:1. Prior to beginning the balancing work, obtain from the Architect the

latest version of the mechanical drawings including addenda, revisions, change orders, etc.

2. Adjust and balance all portions of the mechanical systems to produce indicated results within limits of minus 5 or plus 10 percent.

3. Adjust diffuser throws as shown on the drawings (shown as directional arrows).

END OF SECTION

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0590

SECTION 23 0700

MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of mechanical equipment specified elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 05 00, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with Chapter 13 provisions of the State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code (Oregon Energy Code).

B. Composite (Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50.

C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for Fittings): Same as "B" requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 15050, the following apply:1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the

site in factory-fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic.

2. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0700

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Insulating Manufacturers: Johns Manville, Knauf, Armstrong, Owens-Corning, Pittsburgh Corning, Pabco, Imcoa or Certain Teed. Johns Manville products are listed unless indicated otherwise.

B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Foster, 3M, Insul-Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong.

2.2 PIPING INSULATION

A. Pipe Temperatures Minus 30 to 180 Deg. F: Flexible, preformed, pre-slit, self-sealing elastomeric pipe insulation up to 2-1/8" ID, thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU/hr. sq. ft./in. at 75 deg. F and vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms/inch. Apply in thickness necessary to prevent condensation on the surface at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Armstrong "Armaflex 2000" or, in concealed locations, Imcoa or Nomaco also approved.

2.3 DUCT INSULATION

A. Interior Above Grade Ductwork: Glass fiber formaldehyde-free blanket with "FSK" facing, k value = 0.31 at 75 deg. F, 0.2 perms, and UL 25/50 surface burning rating. Johns Manville "Microlite."

2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, staples, bands, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers, welded studs, etc., as recommended by the manufacturers for the insulation and conditions specified except staples not permitted on chilled water lines.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSULATION

A. Refrigerant Piping Insulation: Insulate suction piping with minimum 1/2" thick foamed plastic or of thickness necessary to prevent condensation at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Where possible, slip insulation over the piping as it is installed. Seal all joint and seams.

B. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Where jacket joint and lap seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall or apply lap sealing adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0700

3.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Ductwork: Insulate the following:1. All supply ductwork. 2. All supply and return ductwork in systems routed in unconditioned

spaces or exposed to the outside conditions.3. All outside air intake ducts.4. All ductwork required to be insulated by code.

B. Insulation Thickness: Select board and blanket insulation of thickness required to provide the following installed R-value.1. All heating or cooling system supply and return ducts located on the

exterior of the insulated building envelope and all outside air intake ducts, R-5:

2. All heating and cooling system supply ducts located inside of building envelope or in unconditioned spaces, R-3.3.

3. All heating and cooling system return ducts located in unconditioned spaces, R-3.3.

C. Fittings: Wire and duct adhesive as required. To prevent sagging on all rectangular or square ducts over 24" wide, install Gramweld or equal welding pins on the bottom. Maximum spacing 18" on center in both directions.

D. Installation: Applied with butt joints, all seams sealed with vapor seal mastic or taped with 2" wide vapor-proof, pressure-sensitive tape. Seal all penetrations with vapor barrier adhesive.

E. Internally Lined Ductwork: Where internally lined ductwork is indicated on the Drawings and/or specified, no exterior insulation is required. Select duct lining to provide the required R-value. Carefully lap the ends of the exterior insulation a minimum of 6" past the interior insulation unless otherwise shown. Seal the end of vapor barrier jacket to the duct with mastic where the vapor barrier is required. Duct lining is specified in Section 23 30 00.

END OF SECTION

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 0700

SECTION 23 2300

REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this section apply to the refrigerant piping system connecting refrigeration and HVAC equipment specified in other sections of these specifications. Provide pipe, pipe fittings and related items required for complete piping system.

B. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 05 00, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: ASTM, and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable. Comply with federal and local regulations regarding the handling of refrigerant.

B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and bear the ARI label.

C. Installation Contractor: Manufacturer's authorized installation and start-up agency normally engaged and experienced in air conditioning/refrigeration work and certified in the handling of refrigerant.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details, and performance characteristics for each type and size of refrigeration equipment.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide factory-applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 2300

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Copper Pipe and Tube:1. Application: Refrigerant.2. Pipe: ASTM B88. Type ACR hard or soft temper copper with brazed

joints. Cleaned and sealed at the factory.3. Refrigerant Fittings: ANSI/ASME B31.5 or SAE J 513-F, "Refrigeration Tube

Fittings." Where conflicts occur, B31.5 shall govern.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS

A. Brazing Materials: Provide brazing filler rod and flux materials as determined by the installer to comply with installation requirements.

B. Insulation: Refrigerant piping insulation is specified in Section 230700.

C. Roof Penetrations: Manufactured system as specified in Section 230500.

2.3 REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide the following equipment where they are not a part of the factory installed equipment accessories. Select equipment for operation with the refrigerant being utilized and for the pressure and temperature conditions indicated. Sporlan, Alco, Henry, Detroit, or as listed for each equipment.

B. Thermostatic Expansion Valve: Capacity matched for the system, angle or straight through pattern external equalizer, brass body complete with capillary and remote sensing bulb.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices. Install each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings.

B. Piping Runs: Route piping close to and parallel with walls, overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. If not otherwise indicated, run piping in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing the building or equipment and avoid diagonal runs. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions.

C. Refrigerant Piping:

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 2300

1. Lay out the refrigerant piping system in a manner to prevent liquid refrigerant from entering the compressor and so that oil will return to the compressor. Slope all horizontal suction lines toward the compressor. Take special care to keep all tubing clean and dry.

2. Install all refrigerant piping straight and free from kinks and restrictions, properly supported to minimize vibration. Provide hangers at 5' spacing for 1/2" lines, 6' spacing for 1" lines and 8' spacing for 1-1/2" and larger lines.

3. Comply with the refrigerant piping installation instructions of the refrigeration equipment manufacturer.

3.2 PIPING JOINTS

A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material.

B. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide.

C. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building surfaces.

3.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT

A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome-plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on all pipe penetrations in finished spaces.

B. Roof Penetrations: Manufactured roof penetration system as specified in Section 230500.

3.4 CLEANING

A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch-up paint where necessary.

3.5 TEST

A. Refrigerant System: 1. When the refrigerant connections have been completed, close the

compressor suction and discharge valves (or receiver outlet valve in the case of condensing unit) and test the balance of the system to near operating pressure with a dry nitrogen.

2. Carefully test all joints, using soap and water or other sudsing solution. After all joints are tested, discharge the gas and repair all leaks, then repeat the test with a mixture of nitrogen and R-410A and a halide torch or an electronic leak detector.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 2300

3. Evacuate the system to remove moisture and non-condensables. Lower the absolute pressure with a vacuum pump to 1000 microns of mercury. Apply external heat as required to vaporize moisture.

4. Dehydrate each refrigerant circuit by satisfactory use of a vacuum pump before charging with refrigerant. Furnish all necessary refrigerant and oil for complete operating charge of the system. Upon completion of the work of construction, test all refrigeration equipment under normal operating conditions and leave in operating order. Adjust automatic temperature controls.

END OF SECTION

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 2300

SECTION 23 3000

AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Air Distribution Materials as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Material characteristics and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 05 00, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air Distribution Equipment Rating: In accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and bearing the AMCA label.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for all manufactured materials.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL

A. Quality Assurance: Galvanized steel sheet metal except where otherwise indicated. Metal gauges, joints and reinforcement in accordance with Mechanical Code, ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. Ductwork shall be fabricated to the following pressure classifications:1. Return and exhaust ducts: 1” negative.2. Supply ducts from fan discharge to diffuser: 1” positive.

B. Acoustical Duct Lining: Schuller "Linacoustic," Gustin Bacon "Ultra-Liner", Owens Corning "Aeroflex" , and Certainteed “Tough Guard” approved, meeting NFPA 90A requirements for maximum flame spread and smoke developed. Mechanically attach lining to sheet metal duct with Schuller Grip Nails or Gramweld welding pins. Apply fire-retardant type adhesive similar to Schuller No. 44 adhesive, Benjamin Foster 81-99, Insul-Coustic 22 or 3M equivalent on all leading edges, joints and seams.

C. Duct Sealing Tapes: Provide a UL 181B listed duct sealing system.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 3000

D. Optional Duct Joints for Sheet Metal Ducts: "Ductmate System" by Ductmate Industries, Inc., Ward Duct Connectors, Inc., Mez Industries, or acceptable substitute. Spiramir self-sealing round duct connector system meeting Class 3 leakage standards with EPDM o-ring seal.

E. Concealed Round Duct: Round and flat oval spiral seam duct shall be manufactured of galvanized sheet metal with spiral lock seam. Construction, gauges, and reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA standards. Fittings shall be manufactured of galvanized steel with spot welded or riveted and sealed seams or continuously welded seams. Snap lock longitudinal seam duct shall fully comply with SMACNA standards for duct gauge and seam type for appropriate pressure class. Adjustable elbows are prohibited.

G. Flexible Ductwork-Low Pressure: Low pressure flexible duct, factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel helix mechanically attached to reinforced aluminized polyester fabric tube. The composite assembly, shall meet the Class 1 requirements of NFPA Bulletin No. 90-A and be labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under. Flexmaster, Genflex, ATCO, Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Schuller, or accepted substitute.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Manual Volume Dampers: Construct of material two gauges heavier than duct in which installed; single plate up to 12" wide; multiple over 12" wide. Hem both edges 1/2" and flange sides 1/2". Use Young, Duro-Dyne, MAT, or accepted substitute damper accessories. Location of all volume dampers is not necessarily shown on Drawings; minimum required is one in each supply, return or exhaust main, and one in each branch.

B. Fire Rated Thermal Blanket and Diffuser Fire Damper: UL listed, non-asbestos ceramic thermal blanket for use on ceiling diffusers with curtain type fire damper to fit diffuser neck indicated.

C. Exterior Wall Louvers: Prefabricated galvanized sheet metal fixed stormproof blades with frame to suit building construction, and with 1/2" x 1/2”, 16 gauge galvanized wire mesh on back side of all intake louvers and insect screen on exhaust/relief louvers. 4” deep, 45 degree fixed drainable type blade, AMCA 500 tested for 800 fpm without water penetration, and maximum of 0.07” wg intake pressure loss and 0.09” wg exhaust pressure loss. Provide “Kynar” protective coating and stainless steel fasteners (ASTM A167, type 302, cadmium finish, ASTM A165 type NS). Ruskin L375D as basic pattern on blade and frame, Greenheck, Cesco, American Warming, or approved.

D. Locking Connection Straps: 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self-locking straps. Panduit or accepted substitute.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 3000

2.3 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Description: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings.

B. Finishes:1. Steel: Flat white enamel prime coat, factory applied on ceiling diffusers.

Others are to have a baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect.

2. Aluminum: Anodized clear finish unless indicated otherwise.

C. Manufacturers: Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price, Shoemaker, and Tuttle & Bailey are accepted substitutes where only Titus model numbers are listed. Where other manufacturer's products are listed and/or "accepted substitute" is indicated, only the products or an accepted substitute for that item shall be provided.

D. Sidewall Supply Register: Double deflection grille with face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars to be individually adjustable, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 300RL.

G. Sidewall or Ceiling Return or Exhaust Register: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 350RL series.

H. Sidewall or Ceiling Return, Exhaust or Relief Grille: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers. Titus 350 series.

I. Filter Frame Grilles: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" centers. Hinged core in frame assembly with frame to hold 1" thick filter same size as grille. Install with one complete set of throw-away, glass fiber filters. Titus 23-RLOG.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Air Handling Equipment Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation, connection, and start-up.

B. Equipment Access Panels: Locate free of all obstructions such as ceiling bars, electrical conduit, lights, ductwork, etc.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 3000

C. Filters: Install specified filters in supply units and systems prior to start-up.3.2 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS

A. Size and air handling characteristics shall be as shown on the Drawings.

B. Locate, arrange, and install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. Locate registers in tee-bar ceilings with diffusers centered on the tile unless indicated otherwise.

3.3 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION

A. Support: Install ductwork with 1" wide strap cradle hangers not more than 8' on centers or as required by code. Support terminal units independent of adjacent ductwork. Attach to available building construction according to good practices for materials involved. Manufactured hanger system acceptable in lieu of fabricated hangers at contractor’s option. Ductmate “Clutcher” system or approved.

B. Elbows and Fittings: Construct elbows with throat radius equal to duct width in plane of turn or make them square and provide double wall, air foil turning vanes.

C. Fittings: Make transitions and take-offs as shown on Drawings. Provide volume dampers and splitter dampers as indicated on Drawings and as specified. Saddle tees are not allowed.

D. Acoustical Duct Lining: Acoustically line all fan unit intake and discharge plenums, all ductwork indicated as lined on the Drawings, all sheet metal ductwork specified per Section 23 07 00 as insulated, where exposed to view or subject to damage in areas such as mechanical rooms, and, at the Contractor's option, all insulated ductwork specified in Section 23 07 00. The duct size noted on the Drawings is the clear opening of the duct with insulation. Insulation shall not reduce duct size listed.

E. Manual Volume Dampers: Location of all volume dampers are not necessarily shown on the Drawings. Provide a minimum of one volume damper in each supply, return or exhaust branch.

F. Duct Insulation: Specified in Section 23 07 00.

G. Sealing: Caulk, seal, grout and/or tape ductwork and plenums to make airtight at seams, joints, edges, corners and at penetrations. Solder all seams, joints, etc., on all ductwork exposed to the weather. Install specified tape in accordance with manufacturer's requirements using degreaser on surfaces to be taped and wiped to eliminate moisture.

H. Flexible Duct Connections: 1. Install in full extended condition, free of sags and kinks, using only the

minimum length required to make the connection.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 3000

2. Make all joints and connections with 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self-locking straps. Connecting duct shall have retention bead or flexible duct shall be attached with 2 screws in addition to strap.

3. On vertically suspended ducts, secure with a minimum of three sheet metal screws on a maximum of 8" on center.

3.8 NEW DUCTWORK CLEANING

A. Store all ductwork materials on pallets or above grade, protected from weather, dirt/mud and other construction dust.

B. Remove all accumulated dust, dirt, etc. from each duct section as it is being installed.

C. Prior to installation of diffusers, grilles and registers, install temporary system filters and cover all diffuser, grille and register openings with temporary 25% efficiency filter materials and start the fan systems. Operate fans a minimum of 8 hours. Remove all temporary filters at the end of that period.

D. Clean all diffusers, grilles and registers just prior to project final completion.

END OF SECTION

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 3000

SECTION 23 3400

HVAC FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Fans as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Equipment capacity and size as indicated in the equipment lists on the Drawings.

C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 05 00, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each fan.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EXHAUST FANS AND UNITS

A. Ceiling Cabinet Exhaust Fan: Direct drive, forward curved centrifugal wheel, sleeve bearings, motor and wheel isolated from unit on vibration isolators; provide grille on inlet and duct connection with backdraft dampers on discharge. Size and capacity as indicated on Drawings. Carnes VCD, Acme V, Penn Zypher, Jenn-Air JSeries, Greenheck SP, Breidert SV, Jen Fan FF, Cook Gemini, Twin City T or approved.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

LONE PINE VILLAGE – BUILDING B 23 3400

3.2 AIR HANDLING INSTALLATION

A. Installation and Arrangement: Air handling equipment shall be installed and arranged as shown on the Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation connection and start-up.

B. Lubrication: All moving and rotating parts shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up.

3.3 CONTROLS

A. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.

END OF SECTION

LONE PINE VILLAGE – BUILDING B 23 3400

SECTION 23 8000

TERMINAL HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating Equipment as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Equipment capacity and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Related Work: The requirements of Section 23 05 00, Common HVAC Materials and Methods, also apply to this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled.

B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and ARI labeled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each HVAC unit.

B. Submit operating and maintenance data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TERMINAL HEATING EQUIPMENT

A. Wall mounted electric fan forced heaters: UL listed recessed heater with primary and secondary thermal safeties with secondary manual reset, nichrome heating element, recessed wall can, two stage centrifugal blower, and powder coat metal grille. Provide with remote 2-pole thermostat. Cadet C series, Qmark, Markel, approved.

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 8000

2.2 SPLIT SYSTEM TERMINAL COOLING EQUIPMENT

A. Fan Coil Units: Horizontal, blow through, fan coil unit for concealed mounting in furred ceiling space. Unit shall be complete with DX cooling coil, drain pan, internally lined coil cabinet with duct connection, direct driven multispeed fan, electric heating element, and fully wired controls. Coils shall be copper tube and aluminum fin construction. All steel components to be galvanized. Provide with painted ceiling access panel for furred in units. Unit shall be UL listed. First Company or approved substitute. Provide with wall mounted heating cooling thermostat.

B. Air Cooled Condensing Unit: Factory-assembled unit incorporating hermetic compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan, refrigerant piping, controls, and power wiring enclosed in a weather-resistant cabinet needing only refrigerant and power and control wiring to be operative. Capacity as shown on Drawings. Condenser section to include copper tube, aluminum fin condensing coil, dynamically balance fan driven by totally enclosed fan motor with permanently lubricated bearings. Refrigerant system to include suction and liquid service valves, test gauge connections, high and low pressure protection, and filter dryer. Unit shall include internal starting controls, and internal wiring complying with National Electrical Code and UL listed, for a single field power connection. Approved Manufacturers: Carrier, Ruud, or approved substitute.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

3.2 AIR HANDLING INSTALLATION

A. Installation and Arrangement: Air handling equipment shall be installed and arranged as shown on the Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation connection and start-up.

B. Lubrication: All moving and rotating parts shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start-up.

3.3 CONTROLS

A. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local electrical codes. All thermostat wire shall be minimum 18 gauge, 6 conductor.

END OF SECTION

LONE PINE VILLAGE - BUILDING B 23 8000

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.

B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEC 210.4(B) - Multiwire Branch Circuits - Disconnecting Means; National Electrical Code; 2008

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRING REQUIREMENTS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0519

A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway, nonmetallic-sheathed cable, or metal clad cable.

B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable.

D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.

F. Underground Installations: Use only building wire in raceway.

G. Use solid or stranded conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Use stranded conductors for larger feeder and branch circuit conductors.

H. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.

I. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

J. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.

K. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.

L. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL". If aluminum conductor is substituted for copper conductor, where allowed in this section or on the drawings, size to match circuit requirements for conductor ampacity and voltage drop. Adjust conduit size per NEC requirements.

M. Non-metallic cable may be used in locations as acceptable to NEC, State, and local codes.

2.2 WIRE MANUFACTURERS

A. Cerro Wire Inc: www.cerrowire.com.

B. American Insulated Wire: www.leviton.com.

C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0519

D. General Cable; www.generalcable.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.3 BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

B. Conductor:1. For Sizes Smaller Than 1/0 AWG: Copper.2. For Sizes 1/0 AWG and Larger: Copper or aluminum.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN or Type XHHW.

2.4 NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type NM.

B. Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

2.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type SER.

B. Conductor:1. For Sizes Smaller Than 4 AWG: Copper.2. For Sizes 4 AWG and Larger: Copper or Aluminum.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation: Type XHHW.

2.6 METAL CLAD CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.

B. Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0519

D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.

E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.

F. Armor Material: Steel.

G. Armor Design: Interlocked.

2.7 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Split Bolt Connectors for copper conductors #6 AWG and larger.

B. Spring Wire Connectors for copper conductors #8 AWG and smaller.

C. Compression Connectors for all feeder conductors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.

D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. Contractor shall comply with NEC 210.4(B) by providing a separate neutral conductor for each circuit in a multi-wire branch circuit.

B. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0519

shown, determine exact routing and lengths required.3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected

devices within 10 ft of location shown.

C. Use wiring methods indicated.

D. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.

E. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.

F. Protect exposed cable from damage.

G. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. Do not attach cables to slack wires.

H. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

I. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

J. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

K. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.

L. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated aluminum-bodied compression connectors only. Fill connector with anti-oxidant compound before installing conductor.

M. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

N. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.

O. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 0553. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0519

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0519

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical service and building grounding and bonding components.

B. Telecommunications systems grounding and bonding components.

C. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of:1. Metal underground water pipe.2. Metal frame of the building.3. Steel water storage tank and supports.4. Concrete-encased electrode.5. Rod electrodes.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.

B. BICSI TDM Manual - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual; Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc.; 2006.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.

E. TIA/EIA J-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; 2002.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0526

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Service and Building Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms.

B. Telecommunications Systems Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.

C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

F. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com.

B. Erico; www.erico.com.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0526

C. Harger; www.harger.com.

D. Thomas & Betts; www.tnb.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 ELECTRODES

A. Rod Electrodes: Copper-clad steel.1. Diameter: 5/8 inch.2. Length: 10 feet.3. Product: Eritech manufactured by Erico.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Foundation Electrodes: 3/0 AWG.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.1. Product: Burndy manufactured by Framatome Connectors

International.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Exothermic Connections:1. Product: Cadweld manufactured by Erico.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Wire: Stranded copper.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, and surface contaminants at connection points.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0526

driving rod electrodes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Electrical Service and Building Grounding System:1. Provide rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to

ground.2. Provide grounding well pipe with cover at each rod location. Install

well pipe top flush with finished grade.3. Install 3/0 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing where

indicated.4. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing

steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together.5. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.6. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond

to ground.7. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and

fountain structures.8. Install transient suppression plate where indicated.9. Install ground grid under access floors where indicated. Construct grid

of 2 AWG bare copper wire installed on 24 inch centers both ways. Bond each access floor pedestal to grid.

10. Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, duct and other metal object entering space under access floors. Bond to underfloor ground grid. Use 2 AWG bare copper conductor.

11. Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits where indicated.12. Provide grounding and bonding in patient care areas to meet

requirements of NFPA 99 and NFPA 70.13. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated

conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

14. Interface with site grounding system.

B. Telecommunications Grounding System:1. Install in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and NFPA 70.2. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view as

much as possible.3. Install grounding for each rack and equipment using #6 AWG THHN,

rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded conductor to copper communication grounding bus bar.

4. Bond main communications grounding system to building grounding electrode system at main electrical service entrance location with #6 AWG THHN, rated for 90 degrees C, insulated, copper stranded

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0526

conductor.5. Install routing for grounding conductor as short and direct as practical.6. Install routing of bonding conductors with minimum number of bends

and splices. Use sweeping bends.7. Install bonding connections with listed bolts, crimp pressure

connectors, clamps, or lugs. Exothermic welding may be used.8. Ground data cabinets, racks, cable trays, and mounting hardware

located in all telecommunications rooms.9. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to

energizing equipment.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Electrical Service and Building Grounding System:1. Provide field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with

Section 01 4000.2. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4.3. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13.

B. Telecommunications Grounding System:1. Test in accordance with BICSI TDM Manual, TIA/EIA 607, and NFPA 70.2. When improper grounding is found, check entire project and correct.

Perform retest.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0526

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduit and equipment supports.

B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2009.

B. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2006

C. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2010

D. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2009.

E. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for fastening systems.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0529

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

B. Threaded Rod Company: www.threadedrod.com.

C. Erico: www. erico.com.

D. B-Line: www.b-line.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:1. Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated

anchors.2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors,

or preset inserts.3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel

ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners.4. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors.5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle

bolts or hollow wall fasteners.6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0529

D. Fastener Types: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.6. Other Types: As required.7. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Formed Steel Channel:1. Manufacturer: Kindorf, Unistrut, B-Line, or approved.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Steel Spring Clips:1. Manufacturer: Caddy, Raco, T&B, B-Line.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or

conduit.2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural

members.

B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.

D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall.

E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0529

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0529

SECTION 26 0534

CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies for electrical service and building.

B. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies for telecommunications systems.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide for fittings and conduit bodies.

C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 1-1/2 inches.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0534

A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.

C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.2. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.3. KAF-TECH: www.kaf-tech.com.

B. Description: Interlocked steel construction.

C. Fittings:1. Steel screw-in type connectors.2. Couplings and set screw type connectors shall not be used.3. Materials per NEMA FB 1.

2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.4. KAF-TECH: www.kaf-tech.com.

B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

C. Fittings:1. PVC screw-in type connector with compression nut.2. Materials per NEMA FB 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0534

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.

3.2 INSTALLATION

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078413.

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation.

C. To attenuate objectionable EMI and RFI signals, the telecommunications system raceway and cable shall maintain a specified minimum distance separation whenever possible within the constraints of the building's architecture.

Condition

Minimum Separation Distance

Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open or nonmetal telecommunication pathways

24 inches

Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to a grounded metal telecommunication conduit pathway

12 inches

Power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit (or equivalent shielding) in proximity to a grounded metal telecommunication conduit pathway

12 inches

Electrical motors, transformers, generators, frequency converters, and UPS systems

47 inches

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0534

SECTION 26 0537

BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

B. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.

D. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and mounting heights

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0537

of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

C. Electrical boxes shall be sized according to NEC requirements unless otherwise noted in the contract documents.

D. Maintain integrity of insulation materials where flush boxes are installed in insulated spaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com.

B. Arc-Co./Division of Arcade Technology: www.arc-co.com.

C. Raco: www.hubbell-raco.com.

D. Bell: www.hubbell-bell.com.

E. T&B: www.tnb.com.

F. Cooper: www.cooperindustries.com.

G. Hoffman: www.hoffmanonline.com.

H. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of

equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.

2. Concrete Ceiling or Wall Boxes: Concrete type.3. 4" square or round equivalent.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0537

B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

D. Electrical Outlet Box Pad:1. Electrical outlet box pads shall be applied where called out on the

drawings or specifications. Its function is to seal box openings, increase mass, and provide damping to reduce air-transmitted sound through party walls. It shall consist of polybutene-butyl and inert fillers. Material shall provide good adhesion to metal and plastic. Pads shall be applied to the backs of installed electrical boxes, molded to box, and folded around conduit cable entering the box. Pads shall not be used in areas subject to temperatures above 200 degrees F.

2. The following are acceptable, subject to the above:a. Lowry's outlet box pads from Harry A. Lowry & Associates, Inc., Sun

Valley, California, (800) 225-8231.b. SpecSeal firestop putty pads (fire-rated) from Specified

Technologies, Incorporated, Somerville, New Jersey, (800) 992-1180.c. Or approved equal.

2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel with screw-on covers.1. Boxes 100 Cubic Inches or Smaller: Standard outlet box with stamped

knockouts.2. Boxes 150 Cubic Inches or Larger: Code gauge steel with sides formed

and welded, with screwcovers unless shown to have hinged doors. Hinged doors shall have locking device same as furnished for panelboards. Knockouts shall be factory stamped or formed in the field with a cutting tool to provide clean symmetrically cut hole.

B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box:1. Material: Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum.2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless

steel cover screws.

C. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting:1. Material: Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum.2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover

screws.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0537

3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC" or low voltage system identified as applicable.

D. Fiberglass Handholes: Die molded glass fiber hand holes:1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 x 6 inch cable entrance at center bottom of

each side.2. Cover: Glass fiber weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.

C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 2717.

D. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on drawings.

E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate

intended purpose, at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation as specified in Section 26 2726.

G. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.

H. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

I. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0537

inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

J. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078413.

K. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

L. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.

M. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

N. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

O. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

P. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

Q. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

R. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

S. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

T. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation and not in the same stud cavity..1. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.2. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in fire rated walls.3. Acoustic rated walls.

a. In a single stud wall, there shall be a separation of 24 inches between centerlines of outlet boxes or receptacles set into opposite sides of the wall. When these boxes are of dimensions exceeding 4 inches wide, this dimension (24 inches) shall be clear between the side walls, providing a full 24-inch separation regardless of the box size. Conduit connecting such boxes shall be flexible and shall provide 6 inches slack per 24 inches of run.

b. In a double stud wall, boxes in opposite sides of the wall shall be located 24 inches on center, minimum. Effectively, this means that

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0537

boxes on the same side of the wall will be 48 inches apart if there is a box between them on the other side of the wall. Conduit, in the case of a double wall, shall home run to a point outside of the partition before connecting to cable and conduit connecting boxes on the other side. Conduit, which shall be flexible, may thread through the studs on its own side but shall under no circumstances interface with the stud on the other side of the wall.

c. The boxes shall be treated to reduce sound transmission. All unused knock-out holes shall be plugged with knock-out caps. The openings or cutouts in the walls to receive the boxes/receptacles shall be made no more than 1-1/4 inches oversize to allow a gap all around of 1-1/8 inches. The flanges shall be perimeter sealed with acoustical caulking, prior to the boxes/receptacles being inserted.

d. An outlet box pad, which acts to increase mass and provides damping, shall be applied to the backs of back-to-back electrical boxes separated by less than 24 inches, or where the box is installed in acoustical barrier walls. Refer to architectural wall types.

U. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

V. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

W. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

X. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

Y. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

Z. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

AA.Use multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

AB. Use double gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

AC. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations, where hosedown is possible up to 10 feet above finished floor, and wet locations.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0537

AD.Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for in slab above grade installations.

AE. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate installation of outlet box with products furnished under other sections of these specifications.

B. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors.

C. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes with architectural drawings.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0537

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates and labels.

B. Wire and cable markers.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 099100 - Painting.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0553

B. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.

C. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com.

2.2 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

B. Locations:1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.2. Communication cabinets.3. Relays, contactors, starters.4. Remote control devices, such as exhaust fan control switches.

C. Letter Size:1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch black letters on clear background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, and control device stations.

2.3 WIRE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: Tape type wire markers.

C. Locations: Each conductor at panelboards, panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and junction boxes, and each load connection.

D. Legend:1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated

on drawings.2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and

interconnection diagrams on drawings.

2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Manufacturers:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0553

1. APWA approved.

2.5 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. Provide color coding of conductors as follows:

Less Than 250 Volts Between Phases:

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Red

Phase C - Blue

Neutral - White

Ground - Green

B. Feeder conductors are to be banded with appropriate color at each splice, tap, and termination point, utilizing vinyl tape or other equally visible means.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

3.2 INSTALLATION

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 0553

SECTION 26 2416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Power distribution panelboards.

B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

C. Load centers.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006).

C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.

D. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007.

E. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2416

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements.

E. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Panelboard Keys: One of each different key for each panelboard.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.

B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2416

C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

D. Siemens: www.sea.siemens.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (HOUSE PANEL)

A. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type or fusible switch type, as indicated on drawings..

B. Panelboard Bus: Copper or aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.

C. Minimum integrated short circuit rating shall be larger than the available fault current, but no less than:1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.2. Series ratings are not acceptable.

D. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R or Class J fuses.

E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole; UL listed. For air conditioning equipment branch circuits provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR.

F. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.

G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1, 11 inches deep, 42 inches wide, cabinet box.

H. Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with screws, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

I. All main lugs shall be field replaceable compression type.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS (UNIT PANELS)

A. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2416

B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.

C. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating shall be larger than the available fault current, but no less than:1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.2. Series ratings are not acceptable.

D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with common trip handle for all poles; UL listed.1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

F. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide.

G. Cabinet Front: Type with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from all energized parts. Surface or flush mounting as indicated on drawings. Shall utilize "door-in-door" construction.

H. All main lugs shall be field replaceable compression type.

2.4 LOAD CENTERS (RESIDENTIAL UNITS ONLY)

A. Description: Circuit breaker load center, with bus ratings as indicated.

B. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Plug-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles; UL listed.1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.2. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where indicated.3. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.4. Provide handle ties to connect single pole circuit breakers in multiwire

branch circuits.5. Provide AFCI circuit breakers as required by code.

D. Enclosure: General Purpose.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2416

E. Box: Type with door, and pull ring and latch on door. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. Interior trim shall be of dead-front construction to shield user from all energized parts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1.

B. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.

C. Mounting Height:1. General: 6 feet 6 inches to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller

than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor.2. Dwelling Units: Mount load center to meet ADA accessible side reach

location and height per OSSC 1110.3.4.

D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

E. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.

F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 26 0553.

G. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE.1. Minimum spare conduits: 1 empty 1 inch for every 6 spare breaker

pole spaces and spare breakers.

H. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 0526.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform field testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for circuit breakers.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2416

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2416

SECTION 26 2701

WALL MOUNTED GROUP METERING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Meter stacks.

B. Meter centers.

C. Meter bases.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 2813 - Fuses and Circuit Breakers.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C12.1 - American National Standard Code for Electricity Metering; 2001.

B. IEEE C12.1 - American National Standard Code for Electricity Metering; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 1988.

C. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006).

E. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2007.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2701

G. UL 486B - Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; 1997

H. UL 869A - UL Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.; 2006

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, and fault current withstand ratings of all equipment and components.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment.

F. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section.

C. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2701

1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.1. UL 486B.2. UL 869A.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Eaton Electrical: www.eatonelectrical.com.

B. GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com.

C. Square D: www.squared.com.

D. Siemens: www.sea.siemens.com.

2.2 METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Description: Wall-mounted metering equipment with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and specified.

B. Ratings:1. Voltage and bus ampacity rating: As indicated on drawings.2. Integrated Equipment Rating: Greater than available fault current.3. Main service board shall be service entrance rated.

C. Bus Material:1. All bus bars shall be tin-plated aluminum or copper. Main horizontal bus

bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on UL standard temperature rise criteria for multi-metering equipment.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2701

2. Provide a full capacity neutral bus where a neutral bus is indicated on the drawings.

3. All hardware used for aluminum bus bar connections shall be high-tensile strength, zinc-plated. Provide Belleville-type spring washers for all bus joints.

D. Bus Connections:1. Crimp-type termination provisions shall be provided for all line

terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable and rated at 75 degrees C.

2. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor.

E. Tenant Utility Metering1. For EUSERC serviced areas, meter centers shall incorporate metering

sections with tenant feeder circuits using ring-type meter sockets rated 125 or 200 amperes to meet local utility and/or customer requirements.

2. The self-contained meter sockets shall include a test bypass/disconnect block per EUSERC requirements.

F. Tenant disconnects shall be wired for hot sequence and shall be molded case circuit breakers.

G. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the assembly, suitable for the conductor materials and sizes indicated.

H. Enclosure: Type 1.1. Align sections at rear only.2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external

surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc.

I. All lugs shall be field replaceable compression type.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. Meter Base: As required by utility company.

B. Other Components: As required by utility company.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2701

A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.

B. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer and as indicated on utility company drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install assemblies in locations shown on drawings.

B. Install transformer pad and/or vault, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by utility company.

C. Install in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

D. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing equipment.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform field testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.1.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2701

SECTION 26 2717

EQUIPMENT WIRING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical connections to equipment.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

B. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.

C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

E. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's

wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections or furnished by Owner.

2. Determine connection locations and requirements for each item of equipment prior to roughing in. Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting. Motor connections shall be

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2717

made for the proper direction of rotation. Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed liquidtight metallic flex.

3. Conduit, wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical equipment and equipment furnished under other Divisions are based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer. The equipment actually furnished may have different electrical characteristics. Conduit, wire, and circuit breakers shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained. Responsibility for this coordination shall rest with the Contractor.

4. Verify special purpose outlet NEMA configuration and ampere rating with equipment supplier prior to ordering devices and coverplates.

B. Sequencing:1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of

equipment is required.2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2717

2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

B. Enclosed Switches: As specified in Section 26 2818.

C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726.

D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534.

E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519.

F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0537.

2.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. As indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using minimum 1/2 inch flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2717

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

J. All equipment is to be grounded with equipment grounding conductor per NEC requirements.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2717

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall switches.

B. Fan speed controllers.

C. Receptacles.

D. Wall plates.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Labels for wiring devices.

C. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2005).

E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008).

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association;

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1917 - Solid-State Fan Speed Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture,

equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical

requirements of actual equipment to be installed.3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual

installed door swings.4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such

as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work covered under other sections.

6. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are

complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

dimensions, colors, and configurations.1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple

devices.

C. Samples: One for each type and color of device and wall plate specified, if requested.

D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data:1. Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets.2. GFI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators and testing

procedures and intervals.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Screwdrivers for Tamper-Resistant Screws: Two for each type of screw.3. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Five of each type.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers indicated are Hubbell; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

C. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

D. Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.

B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.

C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.

D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units.

E. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.

F. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed to serve the countertop surfaces in residential kitchens and all 15A and 20A, 125V receptacles in non-dwelling type kitchens.

G. Provide GFI receptacles for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.

H. Provide isolated ground receptacles for receptacles indicated on the

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

drawings.

I. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.

J. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.

K. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.

2.3 ALL WIRING DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Finishes:1. All Wiring Devices: Color as selected by Architect with wall plate as

specified in wall plates section, unless otherwise indicated.2. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: Color as selected by

Architect with wall plate as specified in wall plates section, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Color as selected by Architect with wall plate as specified in wall plates section, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: Color as selected by Architect, with specified weatherproof cover unless otherwise indicated.

5. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Orange with isolated ground triangle mark on device face.

2.4 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers

indicated are Hubbell; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:

www.legrand.us4. Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side and back wiring with

separate ground terminal screw.

C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; switch type as indicated on the drawings.1. Products:

a. Hubbell 1221 Series.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Residential Wall Switches: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 120V with decorator style rocker type switch actuator and maintained contacts; switch type as indicated on the drawings.1. Products:

a. Hubbell DS120 Series.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with toggle type three position switch actuator and momentary contacts; single pole double throw, off with switch actuator in center position.1. Products:

a. Hubbell 1557 Series.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Locking Momentary Contact Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with lever type keyed three position switch actuator and momentary contacts; all switches keyed alike; single pole double throw, off with switch actuator in center position.1. Products:

a. Hubbell 1557 Series.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.5 FAN SPEED CONTROLLERS

A. Manufacturers:1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. Part numbers

indicated are Lutron; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

4. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Description: 120 V AC, solid-state, three speed, slide control type with slide on/off control, with integral radio frequency interference filtering, fan hum elimination circuitry, power failure preset memory, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1917.1. Current Rating: 1.5 A unless otherwise indicated or required to control

the load indicated on the drawings.2. Products:

a. Lutron Skylark Series.b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.6 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers

indicated are Hubbell; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc:

www.legrand.us4. Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated

binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.3. Hospital Grade Receptacles: Listed as complying with UL 498

Supplement SD, with green dot hospital grade mark on device face.

C. Convenience Receptacles:1. Standard Convenience Receptacles in Commercial Areas: Industrial

specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R; type as indicated on the drawings.a. Products:

1) Hubbell 5362 (20A).2) Hubbell 5262 (15A).

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.2. Standard Convenience Receptacles in Residential Areas: Commercial

specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, rectangular decorator style; type as indicated on the drawings.a. Products:

1) Hubbell DR20 Series (20A).2) Hubbell DR15 Series (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

3. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, with ground contacts isolated from mounting strap; type as indicated on the drawings.a. Products:

1) Hubbell IG5362 (20A).2) Hubbell IG5262 (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

4. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R,, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; type as indicated on the drawings.a. Products:

1) Hubbell 5362WR (20A).2) Hubbell 5262WR (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

5. Tamper Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R,, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; type as indicated on the drawings.a. Products:

1) Hubbell BR20 Series (20A).2) Hubbell BR15 Series (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

6. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R,, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; type as indicated on the drawings.a. Products:

1) Hubbell BR20 Series (20A).2) Hubbell BR15 Series (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

D. GFI Receptacles:1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to

indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A.a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.

2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R.a. Products:

1) Hubbell GFR5362 (20A).2) Hubbell GFR5262 (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.a. Products:

1) Hubbell GFR5362 Series (20A).2) Hubbell GFR5262 Series (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

4. Tamper Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type.a. Products:

1) Hubbell GFTR20 (20A).2) Hubbell GFTR15 (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R and/or 15A, 125V, NEMA 5-15R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.a. Products:

1) Hubbell GFTR20 Series (20A).2) Hubbell GFTR15 Series (15A).3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Manufacturers:1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com. Part numbers

indicated are Hubbell; equals by other manufacturers are acceptable, unless otherwise noted.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of

corresponding wiring devices.2. Size: Standard.3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic. Hubbell NP Series.

D. Premarked Wall Plates: Factory labeled as indicated; hot stamped for nylon wall plates and engraved for metal wall plates.

E. Weatherproof Covers for Wet or Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected. Hubbell WP26M Series.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section.1. Mounting Heights: As indicated on the drawings.2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless

otherwise indicated.3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are

installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.

4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal or inserting conductor screw-actuated in binding clamp and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

H. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified branch circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal to outlet box or normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

I. Unless otherwise indicated, GFI receptacles may be connected to provide feed-through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFI protection.

J. Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles.

K. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

L. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

M. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

N. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.

O. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on bottom and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on right.

P. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

Q. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.

R. Install identification label for wall switches and wall dimmers in accordance with Section 26 0553 indicating load served when controlling loads that are not visible from the control location or multiple wall switches or wall dimmers are installed at one location.

S. Install identification label for all receptacles in accordance with Section 26 0553 indicating serving branch circuit.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.

B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.

F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by Architect.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2726

SECTION 26 2813

FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fuses.

B. Circuit breakers.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007).

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics, including time-current curves.

C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Fuses: Three of each type and size.3. Fuse Pullers: Two.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2813

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fuses:1. Cooper Bussmann: www.bussmann.com.2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc: www.ferrazshawmut.com.3. Littelfuse: www.littelfuse.com.

B. Circuit Breakers:1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.2. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.4. Siemens: www.sea.siemens.com.

2.2 FUSES - GENERAL

A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.

B. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

C. Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).

D. Main Service Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).

E. Power Load Feeder Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).

F. Power Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay) or J (time delay).

G. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay) or J (time delay).

2.3 CLASS RK1 (TIME DELAY) FUSES

A. Manufacturers:1. Bussmann LPS-RK (600V) or LPN-RK (250V): www.bussmann.com.2. Ferraz Shawmut: www.ferrazshawmut.com.3. Littelfuse: www.littelfuse.com.

2.4 CLASS J (TIME DELAY) FUSES

A. Manufacturers:1. Bussmann LPJ-SP: www.bussmann.com.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2813

2. Ferraz Shawmut: www.ferrazshawmut.com.3. Littelfuse: www.littelfuse.com.

2.5 CLASS L (TIME DELAY) FUSES

A. Manufacturers:1. Bussmann KRP-C: www.bussmann.com.2. Ferraz Shawmut: www.ferrazshawmut.com.3. Littelfuse: www.littelfuse.com.

2.6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt-on, trip free, quick make, quick break, thermal magnetic type.

B. Circuit breakers shall be calibrated to carry 80% rated current in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C.

C. Handles shall clearly indicate rating and position "On", "Off", or "Tripped".

D. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be common trip such that an overload or short circuit on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously.

E. Circuit breakers shall have an interrupting rating not less than the available fault duty at the breaker. Minimum rating shall be 10,000A for 250 volt panels. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated to exceed the available 3 phase fault current. Series ratings are not acceptable.

F. Circuit breakers shall be switch duty rated and full size, tandem units are not approved.

G. Provide with handle "lock-on" device for breakers serving time switches, night lights, emergency lighting unit equipment, fire alarm, security, data racks, servers, and other circuits as identified on the drawings.

H. Provide combination circuit breakers and ground fault interrupters where indicated on the drawings or required by the National Electrical Code.

I. All circuit breakers rated 250A and above shall be provided with adjustable magnetic trip elements.

J. Circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA standard AB1.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2813

K. Provide products suitable for use as service entrance equipment where applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

B. Install enclosed circuit breakers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. Provide support and labeling in accordance with these specifications.

D. In dwelling areas, as required by NEC 210.12, provide arc-fault circuit breakers to protect all branch circuits such that the complete circuit is protected.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.

B. Inspect and test each circuit breaker.

C. Inspect each circuit breaker visually.

D. Perform several mechanical ON-OFF operations on each circuit breaker.

E. Verify circuit continuity on each pole in closed position.

F. Determine that circuit breaker will trip on overcurrent condition, with tripping time to NEMA AB 1 requirements.

G. Include description of testing and results in test report.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust trip settings so that circuit breakers coordinate with other overcurrent protective devices in circuit.

B. Adjust trip settings to provide adequate protection from overcurrent and

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2813

fault currents.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2813

SECTION 26 2818

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fusible switches.

B. Nonfusible switches.

C. Elevator power module switch (EPMS).

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 2813 - Fuses and Circuit Breakers.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI; American National Standards Institute.

B. ASME; American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

C. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007).

D. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001 (R2006).

E. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2010.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2818

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fusible/Nonfusible Switches:1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com.2. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.4. Siemens: www.sea.siemens.com.

B. Elevator Power Module Switch (EPMS):1. Cooper Bussman: www.cooperbussmann.com.2. Littlefuse: www.littelfuse.com.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover

with switch in ON position.2. Handle lockable in OFF position.3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.

B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover

with switch in ON position.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2818

2. Handle lockable in OFF position.

C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.

D. Elevator Power Module Switch (EPMS):1. Provide elevator power module switch as shown on the drawings.2. The EPMS shall be constructed, certified, and listed to the following

standards: NFPA 70, ANSI/ASME, NFPA 72.3. The EPMS shall be rated as shown on the drawings.4. The EPMS shall have individual horsepower rated fusible feeder

switches with shunt trip capabilities. Feeder switches shall have ampere ratings based on elevator manufacturer requirements.

5. All shunt trip fusible feeder switches shall have as an accessory a control power transformer. The transformer primary voltage rating is as required with a 120V secondary.

6. The EPMS shall have been successfully tested to a short circuit rating of 200,000 Amps RMS symmetrical with Class J fuses.

7. All switches shall have shunt trip capabilities at 120Vac from remote fire alarm signal.

8. The EPMS shall have a key to test switch and a green 'on' pilot light.9. The EPMS shall have a mechanical interlock for hydraulic elevators

with automatic recall.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.

D. Furnish and install an enclosed switch at each motor and resistance heating equipment location.

E. Coordinate EPMS installation requirements with elevator supplier.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2818

A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 4000.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 2818

SECTION 26 5100

LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior luminaires.

B. Ballasts.

C. Fluorescent emergency power supply units.

D. Lamps.

E. Luminaire accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.

B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; Consolidated-2002.

C. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (R2008).

D. IESNA RP-8 - American National Standard Practice for Roadway Lighting; Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; 2000(R2005) (ANSI/IES RP8).

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting;

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

F. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

G. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006.

H. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006.

I. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004.

J. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

L. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2009.

M. UL 844 - Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 1029 - High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

A. Coordination:1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces

installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings:1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a

standard product of the manufacturer.2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for

substitution upon request.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.1. Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National

Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) lab or independent testing agency in IESNA LM-63 standard format upon request.

2. Ballasts: Include wiring diagrams and list of compatible lamp configurations.

3. Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and initial and mean lumen output.

4. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Unit: Include list of compatible lamp configurations and associated lumen output.

5. Air Handling Luminaires: Include air handling performance data.

D. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with dimming controls to be installed.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

E. Coefficients of Utilization by an approved testing laboratory.

F. Lamp and ballast type for each fixture.

G. Groups of fixtures with the same lamp and ballast type may reference a single set of submittal documents.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement parts.

I. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any associated remote components.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all linear fluorescent ballasts.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

D. Provide accessories and fittings as recommended by manufacturer to properly and completely install and wire fixtures.

E. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings.

F. Provide the complete system of lighting fixtures and lamps as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The requirements of all other sections of the specification are equally applicable to the work to be performed under this section.

G. The fixture catalog numbers listed on the drawing indicate manufacturer, fixture design, appearance, etc., desired. These fixtures shall be modified if necessary to comply with the specification herein. Lighting fixtures specified will be the basis for comparison in the consideration of fixtures of other manufacturers.

H. All fixture component parts shall be manufactured and/or assembled at the manufacturing plant for shipment in one or more packages. The shipment from the fixture manufacturer shall include integrally-mounted and/or remote-mounted ballasts where ballasts are required for the proper operation of the fixture lamps.

I. Recessed Luminaires:1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as

IC-rated, suitable for direct contact with insulation and combustible materials.

3. Luminaires Recessed in Sloped Ceilings: Provide suitable sloped ceiling adapters.

J. Hazardous (Classified) Location Luminaires: Listed and labeled as

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

complying with UL 844 for the classification of the installed location.

K. Fixtures - General:1. Finish shall be white baked enamel, unless otherwise specified with a

minimum average reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall be prepared for finishing with a 5-step zinc phosphating process.

2. All surface mounted fluorescent lighting fixtures shall have low density label.

3. All recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures installed in fire rated ceiling shall be provided with fire-rated protective covers.

4. All fixtures mounted outdoors or in unheated spaces shall have 0 degree F ballasts.

L. If fixtures specified herein are discontinued at the time the work is executed, provide suitable substitute fixtures, without additional cost, as directed by the engineer.

M. Fluorescent Luminaires:1. Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where

required.2. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Occupancy Sensors: Provide

programmed start ballasts.3. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Dual-Level Switching: Provide

with two ballasts.a. Luminaires with Two Lamps: Each ballast controls one lamp.b. Luminaires with Three Lamps: One ballast controls two outer lamps

and one ballast controls inner lamp.c. Luminaires with Four Lamps: One ballast controls two outer lamps

and one ballast controls two inner lamps.

N. LED Luminaires: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 8750.

O. Track Lighting Systems: Provide track compatible with specified track heads, with all connectors, power feed fittings, dead ends, hangers and canopies as necessary to complete installation.

P. Luminaires Mounted in Continuous Rows: Provide quantity of units required for length indicated, with all accessories required for joining and aligning.

Q. Electrical Characteristics: 120 volts, 60 Hz, unless otherwise specified.

R. Substitutions, Unless Otherwise Indicated: See Section 01 6000 - Product

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

Requirements.

2.2 BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers:1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.2. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com.3. Philips Lighting Electronics/Advance: www.advance.philips.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.5. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire

provide ballasts produced by a single manufacturer.6. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the

luminaire schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated.

B. All Ballasts:1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all

current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

C. Fluorescent Ballasts:1. All Fluorescent Ballasts: Unless otherwise indicated, provide high

frequency electronic ballasts complying with ANSI C82.11 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 935.a. Inrush Current: Not exceeding peak currents specified in NEMA

410.b. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected

source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent. c. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 10 percent.d. Power Factor: Not less than 0.95.e. Ballast Factor:

1) Normal ballast factor between 0.85 and 1.15.2) High ballast factor greater than 1.15.3) Low ballast factor between 0.75 and 0.85.

f. Thermal Protection: Listed and labeled as UL Class P, with automatic reset for integral thermal protectors.

g. Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise level of 20 to 24 decibels.

h. Lamp Compatibility: Specifically designed for use with the specified lamp, with no visible flicker.

i. Lamp Operating Frequency: Greater than 40 kHz. j. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.7.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

k. Provide automatic restart capability to restart replaced lamp(s) without requiring resetting of power.

l. Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry for compact fluorescent T5 and smaller diameter lamp ballasts.

m. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location category A.

n. Provide high efficiency T8 lamp ballasts certified as NEMA premium.o. Ballast Marking: Include wiring diagrams with lamp connections.

2. Non-Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts:a. Lamp Starting Method:

1) T8 Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated.2) Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Programmed start unless

otherwise indicated.b. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s)

at a minimum of 50 degrees F, unless otherwise indicated.3. Dimming Fluorescent Ballasts:

a. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 5, 10, or 1 percent relative light output, without flicker and with even tracking across multiple lamps.

b. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.1) Wall Dimmers: See Section 26 2726.

c. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed start unless otherwise indicated.

d. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting lamp(s) at a minimum of 50 degrees F.

e. Dimmed Lamp Starting: Capable of starting lamp(s) at any dimmed preset without transitioning first to full light output.

D. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: Complying with ANSI C82.4 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1029.1. Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:

a. All Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:1) Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected

source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 10 percent. 2) Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 15 percent.3) Power Factor: Not less than 0.90.4) Provide thermal protection with automatic reset.5) Sound Rating: Class A, suitable for average ambient noise

level of 20 to 24 decibels.6) Lamp Operating Frequency: Less than 200 Hz or as required to

avoid acoustic resonance in lamp arc tube.7) Lamp Current Crest Factor: Not greater than 1.5.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

8) Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s) at a minimum of -22 degrees F.

9) Provide end of lamp life automatic shut down circuitry.10) Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic

surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location category A.11) Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference

(EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 18, for Class A, non-consumer application.

b. Dimming Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:1) Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to 50

percent relative light output, without flicker.2) Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming

controls to be installed.(a) Wall Dimmers: See Section 26 2726.

3) Lamp Starting: Integral delay to allow lamp to warm up for 15 minutes prior to dimming.

c. Bi-Level Stepped Dimming Electronic Metal Halide Ballasts:1) Bi-Level Operation: Capable of being switched between full

light output, 50 percent of full light output, and off.2) Control Compatibility: Capable of being controlled by

standard manual light switches or occupancy sensors unless otherwise indicated.

3) Lamp Starting: Integral delay to allow lamp to warm up for 15 minutes prior to dimming.

2. Electromagnetic Metal Halide Ballasts:a. Input Voltage: Suitable for operation at voltage of connected

source, with variation tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent. b. Power Factor: Not less than 0.90 unless otherwise indicated.c. Lamp Starting Temperature: Capable of starting standard lamp(s)

at a minimum of -22 degrees F.

2.3 FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Philips Emergency Lighting/Bodine: www.bodine.com.2. Lithonia Lighting: www.lithonia.com.3. Iota Engineering, LLC: www.iotaengineering.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.5. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire

provide fluorescent emergency power supply units produced by a single manufacturer.

6. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

unless explicitly indicated.

B. Description: Self-contained fluorescent emergency power supply units suitable for use with indicated luminaires, complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

C. Compatibility:1. Ballasts: Compatible with electronic, standard magnetic, energy

saving, and dimming AC ballasts, including those with end of lamp life shutdown circuits.

2. Lamps: Compatible with low-mercury lamps.

D. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamp(s) to the fluorescent emergency power supply for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

E. Battery: Sealed maintenance-free high-temperature nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated.

F. Minimum Emergency Illumination Output:Fixture LumensF32T8 1,350F28T5 1,325F54T5HO 1,250FT40W 900FT50W 900CFM42W 1,250CFM32W 1,250CFM26W 700CFQ26W 700

G. Diagnostics: Provide accessible and visible multi-chromatic combination test switch/indicator light to display charge, test, and diagnostic status and to manually activate emergency operation.

H. Self-Diagnostics: Provide units that self-monitor functionality and automatically perform testing required by NFPA 101 where indicated; provide indicator light(s) to report test and diagnostic status and field selectable audible alert.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

I. Operating Temperature: From 32 degrees F to 122 degrees F unless otherwise indicated or required for the installed location.

J. Accessories:1. Provide compatible accessory remote combination test

switch/indicator light where indicated.

2.4 LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.2. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com.3. Philips Lighting Company: www.lighting.philips.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.5. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, provide lamps produced by

a single manufacturer.6. Where a specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the

luminaire schedule or on the drawings, substitutions are not permitted unless explicitly indicated.

B. All Lamps:1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in

each luminaire.2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed.

Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards.

4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

C. Incandescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for lighting fixture; 130 V rated.1. Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Beam pattern as indicated.2. Non-Reflector Type Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted lamp finish

unless otherwise indicated.

D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire.1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity

Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

hazardous waste.2. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise

indicated.3. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.4. Average Rated Life: Not less than 10,000 hours for an operating cycle

of three hours per start.

E. Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Wattage and bulb type as indicated, with base type as required for luminaire.1. Low Mercury Content: Provide lamps that pass the EPA Toxicity

Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) test for characteristic hazardous waste.

2. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps:a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise

indicated.b. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours.d. Minimum 2,850 lumens.

3. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps:a. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,500 K unless otherwise

indicated.b. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.c. Average Rated Life: Not less than 20,000 hours for an operating

cycle of three hours per start.d. 28WT5 min. 2,900 lumens. 54WT5HO min. 5,000 lumens.

F. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps: Wattage as indicated, with bulb type, burning position, and base type as required for luminaire.1. Metal Halide Lamps:

a. Non-Reflector Type Metal Halide Lamps: Phosphor coated lamp finish for indoor and clear lamp finish for outdoor, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Provide ANSI type O-rated protected metal halide lamps where required for open luminaires provided with compatible exclusionary sockets.

c. Ceramic Metal Halide Lamps:1) Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): 3,000 K unless otherwise

indicated.2) Color Rendering Index (CRI): Not less than 80.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide accessories such as plaster frames, stem, canopies, cords, toggle

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

bolts, etc., necessary to mount fixture in a proper and approved method.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). Coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plans and mechanical plans.

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

E. Square and rectangular fixtures shall be mounted with sides parallel to building lines and parallel with ceiling lines.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

F. Properly support and align fixtures and provide all necessary steel shapes for support of the fixtures. Recessed fluorescent fixtures shall be supported at opposite corners by steel wire connected to building structure per IBC requirements. Coordinate complete fixture installation with the facility construction.

G. Surface Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures: Where fixtures are indicated for installation on low density ceiling material, mount on ceiling spacers as recommended by manufacturer unless UL approved for mounting directly to ceiling material.

H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

J. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Units:1. Install inside luminaire unless otherwise indicated. Where installation

inside luminaire is not possible, install in remote location not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal ballast(s) in luminaire. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.

3. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.

K. Remote Ballasts: Install in accessible location as indicated or as required to complete installation, using conductors per manufacturer's recommendations not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length to luminaire.

L. Install lamps in each luminaire.

M. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

N. Verify all ceiling systems and coordinate fixture type and accessories prior to ordering fixtures.

O. Install fluorescent fixtures as recommended by the manufacturer or as necessary to provide exact horizontal alignment, preventing horizontal or vertical deflection, or angular jointing of fixtures installed in continuous rows.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

P. All lighting fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps, ballast and all accessories necessary to provide a complete operable fixture.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Test fluorescent emergency power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures, for closeout submittals.

B. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

C. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 26 5100

SECTION 27 1005

LOW-VOLTAGE CABLING PATHWAYS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Telecommunications service entrance to building(s).

B. Pathways inside building(s).

C. Pathways connecting building(s).

D. Enclosures, backboards, and outlet boxes.

E. Grounding and bonding the telecommunications distribution system.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestopping.

B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.

D. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.

E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

1.3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 012900.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. EIA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Electronic Industries Association; Revision D, 1992.

B. CEA-310 - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment; Consumer Electronics Association; Revision E, 2005.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and

Lone Pine Village - Building B 27 1005

Supplements.

D. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements; Rev B, 2001; Addenda 1-7.

E. TIA/EIA-568-B.2 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components; Rev B, 2001; Addenda 1-11.

F. TIA/EIA-568-B.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, and Addendum 1 - Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 um Optical Fiber Cables; Rev B, 2000; Addendum 1.

G. TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces; 2009.

H. TIA-570 - Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard; 2009.

I. TIA/EIA-606 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure; Rev A, 2002.

J. ANSI/J-STD-607 - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications; Rev A, 2002.

K. UL 514C - Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Keep stored products clean and dry.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a 1 year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 27 1005

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. Provide a complete permanent system of cable pathways for voice and data communications, including conduits and wireways, pull wires, support structures, enclosures and cabinets, rough-in boxes, and conduit sleeves.1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568 and TIA/EIA-569, latest editions, in commercial

areas.2. Comply with TIA-570, latest edition, in residential areas.3. Provide pathways that comply with NFPA 70 and ANSI/J-STD-607 and

are UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified.

2.2 PATHWAYS

A. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0534; provide pull cords in all conduit.

B. Underground Service Entrance: 4" conduit, minimum one per serving utility, coordinate with utility.

2.3 ENCLOSURES/BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Interior grade plywood without voids, 3/4 inch thick; UL-labeled fire-retardant.1. Panel Size: 48 inches wide by 96 inches high. Provide minimum of one

panel or quantity as necessary to accomplish coverage shown on drawings.

2. Provide minimum of one 20 Amp four-plex AC outlet.3. Do not paint over UL label.4. Provide ground bus bar and #6 AWG CU ground conductor to service

ground, as specified in Section 26 0526.

2.4 OUTLET BOXES

A. For flush mounting in walls; depth as required to accommodate cable manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor bend radius.1. Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.2. Wall-Mounted Telephones: 4 inches high by 2 inches wide by 2-1/8

inches deep.3. Wall Plates: Material and finish to match wiring device and wall plate

finishes specified in Section 26 2726, complying with system design standards and UL 514C.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 27 1005

4. Provide minimum one 1 inch conduit for Cat 5E cable, 1-1/4 inch conduit for Cat 6 cable, from outlet box to accessible ceiling. See drawings for additional or different requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA/EIA-568, TIA/EIA-569, ANSI/J-STD-607, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2 in commercial areas.

B. Comply with latest editions and addenda of TIA-570, ANSI/J-STD-607, NFPA 70, and SYSTEM DESIGN as specified in PART 2 in residential areas.

3.2 PATHWAYS

A. Underground Service Entrance: Install conduit at least 24 inches below finish grade.

B. Install with minimum clearances per Section 26 0534.

C. Conduit:1. Do not install more than two (2) 90 degree bends in a single horizontal

cable run.2. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed.3. Conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings,

and floors except where specifically indicated to be exposed.a. Conduit may remain exposed to view in mechanical rooms,

electrical rooms, and telecommunications rooms.b. Treat conduit in crawl spaces and under floor slabs as if exposed to

view.c. Where exposed to view, install parallel with or at right angles to

ceilings, walls, and structural members.d. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches, minimum, below

vapor retarder; seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit.4. See Section 26 0534 for additional requirements.

D. Outlet Boxes:1. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537

as required for installation of telecommunications outlets provided under this section.a. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

Lone Pine Village - Building B 27 1005

1) Telephone and Data Outlets: 18 inches above finished floor.2) Telephone Outlets for Side-Reach Wall-Mounted Telephones:

54 inches above finished floor to top of telephone.3) Telephone Outlets for Forward-Reach Wall-Mounted

Telephones: 48 inches above finished floor to top of telephone.b. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless

otherwise indicated.c. Provide minimum of 24 inches horizontal separation between flush

mounted outlet boxes installed on opposite sides of fire rated walls. d. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate outlet boxes for line

voltage and low voltage devices.e. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not span different

building finishes.f. Locate outlet boxes so that wall plate does not cross masonry joints.

E. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with Section 26 0526 and ANSI/J-STD-607 and NFPA 70.

F. Firestopping: Seal openings around pathway penetrations through fire-rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in accordance with Section 078413.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 27 1005

SECTION 32 1313

CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Concrete curbs, gutters, walks, and paving.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.2. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement.3. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.4. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org) D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Pav-ing and Structural Construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Formwork: 1. Specified in Section 03 1000.2. Metal Forms: Free of deformities, furnished in maximum practical lengths.3. Wood Forms: Good grade lumber, sound and free of warp, minimum 2

inch nominal thickness except where extremely short radii of curves re-quire thinner forms.

B. Reinforcement: 1. Specified in Section 03 2000.2. Dowels: Plain round bar dowels, conforming to reinforcing steel require-

ments.

C. Concrete Materials: Specified in Section 03 3000.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Filler: Non asphaltic type, ASTM D1752 with removable strip providing re-cess for joint sealer.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 32 1313

B. Joint Sealers: Specified in Section 07 9200.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS

A. Set forms accurately to required grades and alignment.

B. Brace forms to withstand loads applied during concrete placement.

C. Install flexible or curved forms of wood or metal for curves with radius of 300 feet or less.

D. Leave forms in place for minimum 12 hours after completion of finishing op-eration.

E. Provide expansion joints where paving abuts other construction, and at spac-ings as indicated on Drawings.1. Shape joint filler to concrete cross section and fasten in place. 2. Provide holes for dowel bars maximum 1/8 inch larger than bar diame-

ter.3. Use removable strips to provide recess for sealant.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCING

A. Install reinforcement in accordance with Section 03 2000.

B. Place reinforcing in middle third of flatwork.

C. Stop alternate bars of reinforcing steel at control joints.

D. Provide dowels at maximum 12 inches on center at expansion joints. Wrap one end of dowel in building paper or felt. Stop reinforcement on both sides of joint.

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with Section 03 3000.

B. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion and control joints. Do not interrupt successive placement such that cold joints occur.

C. Shape curbs and gutters to cross section indicated on Drawings.

D. Strike off flatwork with screed, then float to uniform surface.

E. Provide broom finish in accordance with Section 03 3500.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 32 1313

F. Tool expansion joint edges and other exposed edges to smooth, dense sur-face with 1/8 inch radius.

G. Provide tooled control joints at spacings as indicated on Drawings.

H. Installation Tolerances: Surfaces true to plane, in longitudinal direction to re-quired grade, within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative.

I. Seal control and expansion joints as specified in Section 07 9200.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 32 1313

SECTION 32 1400

UNIT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Interlocking precast concrete pavers.2. Sand bed.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work require-

ments.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org):1. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.2. C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Ag-

gregate.3. C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.4. C936 - Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving

Units.5. C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Con-

crete.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:1. Samples: Paver samples showing available colors.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:1. Willamette Graystone. (www.willamettegraystone.com)

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.

2.2 MATERIALS

Lone Pine Village - Building B 32 1400

A. Concrete Pavers:1. Physical requirements: Meet ASTM C936.3. Coloring admixture: ASTM C979, pure mineral oxide, alkali resistant, col-

orfast, water insoluble, chemically inert, and weather resistant.4. Pattern: Holland Series, WG1.5. Size: Nominally 2-3/8 inches thick.6. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

B. Bedding Sand: ASTM C33, normal weight sand, graded per ASTM C136.

C. Joint Sand: ASTM C144, normal weight sand, graded per ASTM C136.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Masonry Cleaner: Type recommended by masonry manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Place bedding sand to minimum 1 inch uncompacted thickness. Screed off to true surface conforming to required line and grade.

B. Place pavers in pattern indicated from straight reference line.

C. Sequence laying to prevent placing pavers between previously placed units.

D. Machine cut units at perimeter and around obstructions. Minimize units less than one-half normal size.

E. Discard cracked, broken, chipped, stained, and otherwise damaged pavers.

F. Vibrate to final level with plate type vibrator.

G. After initial vibration, brush joint sand over surface and vibrate into joints.

H. Place pavers with final surface 1/8 to 1/4 inch above drainage inlets, con-crete collars, and drainage channels.

I. Do not pass vibrator closer than 2 feet of unrestrained edges.

J. Sweep off excess sand.

K. Allowable Tolerances: Surfaces true to level or indicated slopes with plus or minus 3/8 inch in 10 feet tolerance.

Lone Pine Village - Building B 32 1400

3.2 CLEANING

A. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces.

B. Apply masonry cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Thoroughly rinse surfaces with clean water after completion of cleaning; re-move all traces of cleaning solution.

END OF SECTION

Lone Pine Village - Building B 32 1400

!"#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

Section 01120 - Irrigation Systems Description 01120.00 Scope - This work consists of installing irrigation systems and associated equipment at locations shown or specified and as directed. 01120.01 Qualifications - In order to install certain kinds of equipment or systems, manufacturer's certifications may be required. Materials 01120.10 General - Furnish only commercial quality materials and equipment. All items proposed for use will be subject to testing to ensure compliance with the Specifications. Provide materials of the same function that are of the same type and the same manufacturer. Submit a list of proposed materials for approval as soon as practicable after Award and before arranging for procurement of any materials, especially those materials or products not shown or specified. If any initially proposed materials are not approved, submit substitutes for approval. Any materials installed without approval will be subject to removal and replacement with acceptable material at the Contractor's expense. Materials may be designated by trade name or by manufacturer's catalogue information as shown or specified. The use of a substitute material may be permitted if a written request for substitution and proof of equivalent quality and suitability are furnished. Make any request for substitution with ample time for approval without delaying the work. When alternate equipment, such as sprinkler heads, is proposed for use with hydraulic characteristics differing from that originally shown, the following will be required: • A redrafted, legible plan that shows the redesigned layout, location, or sizes of every affected system element as required for proper operation as originally designed. Furnish a plan showing every relevant system element, site feature, and plan element that was shown on the original plan. A plan made by marking up the original plan will not be accepted. • A hydraulic calculation table for the alternate equipment. At a minimum, show a complete calculation for one average sprinkler zone (section) and a complete calculation for the "worst case" sprinkler zone (i.e., the section that is farthest from the point of connection (POC.), is the largest, or otherwise presents the most challenging hydraulics). Starting from the POC, show the calculation with a stepdown method with flow and loss at each piece of equipment and length of pipe run between equipment. Show the new total water required for each zone and the total for all zones to ensure that maximums for meter size, pipe sizes, and watering times will not be exceeded. • Where any controller run-time change will be required, submit a separate page showing the total timing per controller required for each section, to show that timing changes will still allow all zones to be run within a reasonable time period. • A cost page showing the Contractor's actual discount cost from the supplier(s), comparing the original plan costs versus the proposed equipment costs for each type of item, such as pipe by size, where there is a change required. Show the line total of each type of item and the grand total for the proposed change. 01120.11 Pipe, Tubing and Fittings - Furnish galvanized iron or steel, PVC, or polyethylene pipe as shown or specified that meets the following requirements: (a) Galvanized Pipe and Fittings - Furnish pipe of standard weight, hot-dip galvanized iron or steel, standard threaded, coupled, and that meets the requirements of ASTM A 53/A 53M. Non-standard threaded fittings will be rejected. (b) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings - Furnish PVC pipe and fittings of PVC compound Type 1, Grade 1, conforming to ASTM D 2241 and certified approved by the National Sanitation Foundation. Provide pipe and fittings free from defects caused by poor materials, low quality of work, or rough handling. Dimensional and quick burst tests of pipe and fittings may be required after arrival at the job site before materials will be accepted. Furnish pipe and fittings as follows: Used for Class or Schedule Caps.....................................................................Schedule 80 PVC Direct bury pipe, not in sleeves, placed under road beds or other paved areas ...........Schedule 40 PVC Irrigation sleeves..................................................Schedule 40 PVC

Rachel Stemach
Rachel Stemach
32 8400 - IRRIGATION
Rachel Stemach

4"#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

Main and lateral lines ..........................................Schedule 40 PVC Furnish PVC threaded pipe of PVC 1120, Schedule 80 material conforming to ASTM D 1785. Provide PVC solvent-weld pipe of PVC 1120 materials having a 200 psi minimum pressure rating with SDR 21 walls that conform to ASTM D 2241. Furnish PVC pipe fittings conforming to ASTM D 2466, Type I, Grades 1 or 2. Pipe may be belled on one end with the dimensions of the tapered bell conforming to ASTM D 2672. Install PVC pipe with walls heavier than SDR 21 when shown or specified. (c) Non-Potable Colored Coded Pipe - Wherever non-potable, reclaimed or reuse water is used, furnish PVC pipe that is tinted purple and imprinted with the warning "Caution: Reclaimed Water - Do Not Drink". Provide pipe meeting the same AWWA and ASTM specifications as the potable water pipe sizes on which they are based. (d) Polyethylene Pipe - Furnish polyethylene pipe of Class 80, SDR 15, medium density, meeting the requirements of ASTM D 2239, conforming to U.S. Commercial Standard CS-255, and approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). (1) Micro Tubing and Fittings - Where drip emitters are not required, furnish a blank type and provide any connections necessary. Provide tubing consisting of nominal-sized linear, low-density, minimum 1/4 inch outside diameter (OD) polyethylene. (2) Low Volume (Drip) Tubing - Furnish drip tubing manufactured from specially formulated, chemical-resistant, low to medium density, virgin polyethylene or polybutylene which is selected for excellent weatherability and stress cracking resistance, and is designed specifically for use in drip irrigation systems. Provide drip tubing having a minimum wall thickness of 0.044 inch. 01120.12 Automatic Controllers - Provide Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) approved controller(s) as shown or specified. Furnish each outdoor controller with either a pedestal or wall mount brackets when appropriate. Provide and install the controller in a weatherproof and vandal-proof cabinet of corrosion resistant metal. Furnish the controller housing or cabinet with hasp and lock or locking device. Provide locks or locking devices that are master-keyed and include three sets of keys for the locks. If the irrigation system serves both lawns and planting beds, furnish a controller that has a dual programming capability. Provide controllers that are compatible with and capable of operating the irrigation system as constructed. Owner shall approve controller location. 01120.13 Quick-Coupling Equipment - Furnish quick coupling equipment with a body of cast leaded semi-red brass alloy No. C84400 conforming to ASTM B 584, and a service rating not less than 125 psi for non-shock cold water. Provide couplers having standard male pipe threads at the top and standard female pipe threads at the base. Ensure that the valve is designed to open only upon inserting a coupler key and close completely after removing the key, with absolutely no leakage of water between the coupler and valve body. Provide valve bodies to receive couplers that are designed with double worm slots to allow smooth opening and closing action with a minimum of effort. Ensure that slots notched at the base will hold the coupler firmly in the open position. Furnish couplers of one piece construction with steel reinforced side handles attached, a locking top and of the same material as the valve body. The coupler shall have stainless steel double guide lugs to fit the worm slots. Furnish two couplers and two hose swivels for operation of the valves, and two keys for the locking caps if quick-coupling valves are required. For non-potable water systems, furnish a color-coded, purple tinted cap that bears the printed warning "Caution: Reclaimed Water - Do Not Drink". 01120.14 Hose Bibs - Furnish bronze or brass hose bibs, with angle-type thread to accommodate a 3/4 inch hose connection, and with a key- operated design that prevents operation by wrench or pliers. 01120.15 Cross-Connection Control Devices - Cross-connection control devices will be shown on the plans. Furnish and install cross-connection control devices meeting the requirements of the Oregon Health Division and the local water authority. 01120.16 Water Meter - Water meter procurement, installation, and associated costs will be the responsibility of the General Contractor. Coordinate water meter needs with the City. 01120.17 Valves: (a) Gate Valves - Furnish gate valves of heavy-duty bronze conforming to the requirements of ASTM B 62. Provide valves of the same size as the pipes on which they are placed and install with union or flange

;"#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

connections. Service rating (for non-shock cold water) shall be 150 psi. Valves shall be of the double disk, taper seat type, with rising stem, union bonnet and hand wheel or suitable cross wheel for standard key operation. The valves shall have the manufacturer's name, type of valve, and size clearly cast on them. (b) Drain Valves - Furnish bronze or brass drain valves, 1 inch or 3/4 inch in size, manual angle globe type, with rising stem, hex brass union, removable bonnet and stem, and adjustable packing gland. Ensure that valves are designed for underground installation with a suitable cross wheel operable with a standard key. The valves shall have a service rating of not less than 150 psi non-shock cold water. Furnish three standard operating keys. (c) Check Valves - Furnish heavy duty bronze or steel check valves which function by means of a hinged disc suspended from the body, and which is able to close of its own mass. Furnish valves that are of the same size as the pipes on which they are placed, unless otherwise specified, and with union or flanged connections. Provide valves that are rated for non-shock cold water service of not less than 150 psi. The valves shall have the manufacturer's name, valve type, and size cast on them. (d) Pressure-Reducing Valves - Furnish pressure-reducing valves with a minimum of 150 psi working pressure and an adjustable outlet range of 20 to 70 psi, rated for non-shock cold water service up to 175 psi. The valves shall be factory set as shown or specified. (e) Isolation Valve - Furnish isolation valves as shown on the plans or Special Provisions. If no isolation valve is shown, furnish ball valves as shown below. (f) Ball Valves - Furnish bronzed-bodied ball valves conforming to ASTM B 62 and with a hard, chrome plated ball conforming to ASTM B 124/B 124M. The valve shall be non-shock cold water service-rated at not less than 400 psi. Plastic valves will not be accepted. (g) Air Relief Valve - The air relief valve automatically relieves air pressure to break an air vacuum in the pipe section where it is located. Install air relief valves at the exact high point of each pipe section where relief is needed. (Note - air relief valves are not associated with backflow prevention). (h) Control Valves: (1) Manual Control Valves - Furnish manual valves of bronze or brass, angle type, with hex brass union, and with a service rating not less than 150 psi non-shock cold water. Provide valves for underground installation designed with a cross wheel suitable for operation with a standard key. Furnish three suitable operating keys per irrigation system. Furnish valves that have removable bonnet and stem assembly, with adjustable packing gland housing for the long acme-threaded stem to ensure full opening and closing. Provide valves with discs that are full floating with replaceable seat washers. (2) Automatic Control Valves - Furnish automatic control valves of a normally closed design, operated by an electric solenoid of the required rating, but not more than 6.5 W and operating on 24 V AC power. Ensure that solenoids directly attached to the valve bonnets or bodies have completely internal control parts. Provide bodies that are not less than 150 psi if brass or bronze and not less than 125 psi if plastic, with a manual control bleed cock to operate the valve without electric current. Ensure that the closing speed is not less than 5 seconds and the opening speed is not less than 3 seconds. Both shall be at a constant rate of opening and closing so the water flow is completely stopped when the valve is either manually or electrically closed. Provide valves having manual shutoff stems with cross handles that will adjust the valve from fully closed to wide open with the valve automatically operable in the adjusted position. (3) Automatic Control Valves with Pressure Regulator – Furnish valves of the same manufacture as the automatic control valves, capable of reducing the inlet pressure to a constant lower pressure regardless of supply fluctuations, and which are fully adjustable. 01120.18 Valve Boxes and Protective Sleeves - Provide automatic control valves, flow control valves, pressure reducing valves, backflow preventers, filters and other serviceable fixtures with valve boxes that are extendable to obtain the depth required. Furnish boxes constructed of thermoplastic, with locking lids, green in color, and of the type shown or specified. Include a protective sleeve and cap with all manual drain valves and manual control valves. 01120.19 Electrical Wire and Splices - Unless otherwise specified, furnish electrical wiring used as a hot wire for each zone between the automatic controller and automatic valves of copper, minimum size AWG No. 14, and red in color. Furnish common wire that is a minimum AWG No.12 and white in color. Furnish type USE that is chemically cross-linked Polyethylene or Thermoplastic. Furnish Type UF that is color-coded or marked with number identification. Make low voltage splices with one of the following: • Furnish a kit containing a "T" shaped open cell with a centering device and a plastic bag of urethane and hardener, which is mixed at the time of installation. The resin used with the "T" shaped centering device shall be a quick curing, flexible compound with a set up time of about 4 minutes at 70 °F. Acceptable kits are "3-M DBY", "RainBird Snap- Tite", "Pen-tite PVC Socket and Sealing Plus" or approved equal.

<"#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

• Heat-shrinkable insulating tubing manufactured for use in irrigation electrical systems. Furnish heat-shrink tubing of a mastic-lined, heavy-wall, polyolefin cable sleeve. Provide and install an extra wire with all wiring runs that Is the same gauge, but of a different color than the hot wire and common wire. The extra wire will be reserved for future use or modifications to the system. 01120.20 Communication Cable - Furnish communication wire in centralsatellite control systems that is gauge polyethylene (PE) 89, minimum 6 pair, or approved equal. Provide sufficient pairs to connect all decoding, sensing and monitoring devices to the Central Control Unit. 01120.21 Detectable Wire and Marking Tape - Provide a detectable wire at the elevation of all main and lateral lines using continuous #14 gauge, single strand locator wire that is blue in color. Provide marking tape above all main and lateral lines consisting of inert polyethylene plastic that is impervious to all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents and solvents likely to be encountered in the soil. Furnish color-coded tape with the type of line buried below and the word "Caution" imprinted continuously over its entire length in permanent black ink. Provide tape of the width recommended by the manufacturer for the depth of installation used. Construction 01120.40 General - The irrigation plans are a schematic design and may require adjustment. Do not install the sprinkler system as shown if it is evident that obstructions, grade differences, or differences in area dimensions create conditions different than anticipated in the design. Bring all such obstructions or differences to the attention of the Owners Authorized Representative. In the event this notification is not performed before construction begins on a part of the system where discrepancies exist, any revisions necessary to make the system operate as designed will be the Contractor’s responsibility. (a) Plumbing - Install all parts of the irrigation system according to the Oregon Plumbing Code and State and local laws. Make water service connections as shown and specified. Conform to the requirements of the jurisdictional water authority. Ensure that water velocities in PVC pipe do not exceed 5 feet per second, unless approved in writing by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Bring any velocities exceeding 5 feet per second created by pipe sizes to the attention of the Owner’s Authorized Representative before beginning construction. Correct excess velocities existing after construction, or caused by changes from the plans, at the Contractor’s expense, unless a written agreement has been made authorizing otherwise. (1) Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) - Install, inspect, and test the DCVA according to applicable regulations of the Oregon Health Division and the local water authority. Furnish test records on forms approved by the Oregon Health Division. Furnish forms filled out by a State- licensed Backflow Device Tester documenting that the DCVA is in good operating condition before any flushing and testing of downstream water lines. During the life of the Contract, test the DCVA annually or more often if successive inspections indicate repeated failure. Repair or replace the DCVA whenever it is found to be defective. (2) Reduced-Pressure Backflow Device (RPBD) - Install, inspect, and test the RPBD according to the applicable portions of the Oregon Plumbing Code and applicable regulations of the Oregon Health Division and the local water authority. Apply the same specific testing requirements as stated for the DCVA above. (b) Electrical Service - Install electrical service according to the National Electrical Code, and all State and local laws. Power sources will be as shown or as directed. Be responsible for coordination and installation of electrical service. Furnish and install meter bases at the power source conforming to the requirements of the power supplier. Give the power supplier's representative notice before making any installation. Provide a separate, dedicated circuit for the controller. 01120.41 Layout of Irrigation System - Stake the irrigation system, following the schematic design on the plans, before construction begins. With prior approval, make alterations and changes in the layout to conform to ground conditions and to obtain adequate coverage of water. Call before you dig. 01120.42 Excavation - Excavate trenches no wider than necessary to lay the pipe or install the equipment. Keep the top 6 inches of topsoil, if applicable, separate from subsoil and replace this topsoil as the top layer when backfilling. Provide smooth trench bottoms of sand or other material, free from rocks and unsuitable material. Excavate trenches in rock or other unsuitable material at least 6 inches below the required depth and backfill with sand or other suitable material free from rocks. Exercise care when excavating near existing trees. Where roots are 2 inches and greater in diameter, except in the direct path of the pipe, hand excavate and tunnel the pipe trench. When large roots are exposed, wrap them with heavy burlap for protection and to prevent excessive drying. When digging trenches by machine adjacent to trees having roots 2 inches and less in diameter, hand trim the sides of the trench, making a clean cut of the roots. Treat all

="#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

cut and trimmed roots 1/2 inch or larger in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing. Backfill trenches having exposed tree roots within 24 hours unless protected by continuously moist burlap or canvas. Place detectable marking tape in the trench directly above, parallel to, and along the entire length of all nonmetallic water pipes and all nonmetallic and aluminum conduits installed under existing or planned pavement. Use tape widths recommended by the manufacturer for the burial depth. Pipe installation using a "pipe puller" may be approved if there is adequate topsoil depth and the topsoil is free of rock. Obtain the Owner’s Authorized Representative approval before using a pipe puller. Include any resultant changes in material or design with the request for use of this method. If unforeseen bedrock is encountered during excavation that prevents the pipe from being buried at the specified depth, immediately bring it to the attention of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 01120.43 Piping - Backfill all pipe between the top of the pipe and finished grade with a minimum of 18 inches of fill. Where possible, place mains and laterals or section piping in the same trench. Separate all pipes by at least 2 inches. Place all pipe lines a minimum of 3 feet from the edge of concrete sidewalks, curbs, guardrail, fences, traffic barriers or walls unless otherwise approved. Place marking tape above all pressurized mainline, according to the manufacturer's instructions. Place all live mains to be constructed under existing pavement in sleeves jacked under the pavement, unless otherwise shown. Place all PVC pipe installed under pavement in pipe sleeves of Schedule 40 PVC, unless steel sleeving is shown or specified. Furnish pipe caps of Schedule 80 PVC. Install sleeves 2 feet below subgrade when passing under roadways. Extend sleeves 2 feet beyond the edge of gravel, edge of sidewalk or back of curbs. Mark sleeves with a 2 feet piece of #4 rebar driven flush with the ground or other adjacent surface. Place PVC caps over both ends of sleeves but do not glue. Solvent-weld sleeve sections. Pipe bedding and backfill shall conform to Local Agency standards. Extend the sleeve a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edge of pavement. Perform all jacking operations according to an approved jacking plan. If obstacles are encountered during required jacking, notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative, who may authorize corrective measures. Provide for complete drainage of all pipe lines with manual drain valves installed at section low points. Drain valves may not be shown on the plans. 01120.44 Pipe Jointing: (a) General - During construction, plug or cap pipe ends to prevent entry of dirt, rocks and other debris. (b) Galvanized Steel Pipe - Ensure that galvanized steel pipe has clean cut, well fitted standard pipe threads. Ream all pipe to its full diameter and remove burrs before assembly. Construct threaded joints using either a non-hardening, non-seizing multipurpose sealant, Teflon tape, or paste as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Make all threaded joints tight with wrenches, without using handle extensions. Clean and remake joints that leak with new material. Use of caulking or thread cement to make joints tight will not be permitted. (c) PVC Pipe - Handle and install PVC pipe, couplings and fittings according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Chamfer the outside of the PVC pipe to a minimum of 1/16 inch at approximately 22°. Join pipe and fittings by solvent welding. Use only solvents that penetrate the surface of both pipe and fitting with a result of complete fusion at the joint. Use solvent and cement only as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. On plastic to metal connections, work the metal connection first. Use a non-hardening compound on threaded connections. Thread connections between metal and plastic using only female threaded PVC adapters with threaded Schedule 80 PVC nipples. (d) Polyethylene Pipe - Install polyethylene pipe and fittings according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Cut the ends of the polyethylene pipe square and insert the fitting to its full depth. Use stainless steel clamps for insert fittings. 01120.45 Installation: (a) Sprinkler Heads - Position turf heads and other pop-up heads between 1/2 inch and 1 inch above finish grade, measured from the top of the sprinkler. Place sprinklers as close as practical to walks, curbs, pavement and lawn edges, but leave enough space to allow height adjustment. Do not place heads on risers in areas with any potential for pedestrian traffic, unless otherwise shown. Use swing riser assemblies that allow positioning for correct sprinkler height. (b) Drip Emitters - Install emitters directly above the root mass of the plant being watered, according to the plans or the manufacturer's recommendations. (c) Low Volume Drip Tubing - Install drip irrigation tubing according to the plans or the manufacturer's recommendations.

>"#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

(d) Controllers - Install controllers according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown. Receive approval of the location before installing. Since the controller will need to be accessed frequently, install it at a height, position, and location that allow ease of access. (e) Valve Boxes and Quick Couplers - Position the tops of valve boxes, capped sleeves, and quick coupler valves between 1/2 inch and 1 inch above finish grade or mulch. (f) Valves - Install valves so that access for maintenance is maintained. (g) Central Control Equipment - If shown or specified, install the following equipment according to the manufacturer's recommendations: • Rain sensors • Soil moisture sensors • Flow meters • Central control system with satellite controllers • Weather stations 01120.46 Low Voltage Electrical Installation - Use direct burial wiring between the automatic controller and automatic valves. The wiring may share a common neutral. When more than one automatic controller is required, provide a separate common neutral for each controller and the automatic valves it controls. Run separate control conductors from the automatic controller to each valve. Provide and install an extra wire according to plans. Install wire adjacent to or beneath the irrigation pipe. Use plastic tape or nylon tie-wraps to bundle wires together at 10 foot intervals. Snake the wire from side to side in the trench to provide slack in the wire run. When it is necessary to run wire separate from the irrigation pipe, bundle and place the wire under detectable marking tape. Splices will be permitted only at junction boxes, valve boxes, pole bases, or control equipment. Leave a minimum of 2 feet of excess conductor at all splices, terminals and control valves to facilitate inspection and future splicing. 01120.47 Flushing and Testing: (a) General - Provide gauges used in the testing of water pressures that are certified correct by an independent testing laboratory immediately before use on the Project. Retest gauges when directed. Test automatic controllers by actual operation for a period of 2 weeks under normal operating conditions. Should adjustments be required, adjust according to the manufacturer's direction and test until operation is accepted as satisfactory. (b) Sprinkler Head Flushing - Flush all sprinkler heads as recommended by the manufacturer. (c) Sprinkler Head Testing - Test for leaks in heads and connections and correct as required. (d) Main Line Flushing - To remove debris that may have entered the line during construction, flush main supply lines twice with the supply valve fully open. Flush first before placing valves and again after placing valves and before pressure testing. (e) Main Line Testing - Purge all main supply lines of air and test with static water pressure of at least 150 psi for 60 minutes without introduction of additional service or pumping pressure. Test with one pressure gauge installed on the line where directed. Install an additional pressure gauge at the pump when directed. Lines showing loss of pressure exceeding 5 psi at the end of the specified test period will be rejected. Correct rejected installations and retest for leaks. (f) Lateral Line Flushing - Flush all lateral lines once with the supply valve fully open prior to placement of sprinkler heads, emitters and drain valves. Flush long enough to remove any debris that enters the lateral lines during construction. (g) Lateral Line Testing - Purge all lateral lines of air and test under operating line pressures with risers capped and drain valves closed. Maintain operating line pressures for 30 minutes through open valves and pressure regulating devices. Lines showing leaks when visually inspected at the end of the specified test periods will be rejected. Correct and retest lateral line installations that have been rejected. (h) Lateral Line Alternate Test Method - When conditions prevent effective visual inspection of lateral lines, the Owner’s Authorized Representative may require that the lines be tested by use of pressure gauges. In that event, maintain the static water pressure equal to the operating line pressure in the lines for 30 minutes, with valves closed and without introduction of additional service pressure. Lateral lines showing loss of pressure exceeding 5 psi at the end of the specified test period will be rejected. Correct and retest lateral line installations that have been rejected. (i) Testing of Micro Tubing - Micro tubing will be tested by visual inspection while operating and before burial. Tubing that has obvious leaks or that doesn't operate as designed will be rejected. To fully test micro tubing, a water collection procedure recommended by the manufacturer may be required. Correct all faults before retesting. 01120.48 Adjusting System - Before final inspection, adjust and balance all sprinklers to provide adequate and uniform coverage. Balance spray patterns by adjusting individual sprinkler heads with the adjustment screws or

?"#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

by replacing nozzles to produce a uniform pattern. Unless otherwise specified, water spray will not be permitted on pavement, walks or structures. 01120.49 Backfill - Do not start backfill until all piping has been inspected, tested and approved. Complete backfilling as soon as possible after approval. Ensure that backfill material placed within 6 inches of the pipe is free of rocks or other unsuitable material that might cut or otherwise damage the pipe. Backfill from the bottom of the trench to approximately 6 inches above the pipe with continuous compaction in a manner that will not damage the pipe or wiring, and proceed evenly on both sides of the pipe. Thoroughly compact the remainder of the backfill without using heavy equipment within 18 inches of any pipe. Ensure that the top 6 inches of the backfill is topsoil material or, if suitable, is the first 6 inches of material removed in the excavation. Pipe bedding material may be authorized in quantities determined by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. When authorized to proceed, fill the bottom 2 inches of the trench with approved bedding before laying pipe. After the pipe is in position, add enough bedding material to bring the backfill height to 2 inches above the pipe. Continue backfilling as usual. If sufficient suitable backfill material is not available from trench excavation or other sources on the Project, notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Provide an estimate of imported backfill required, if possible. Maintenance 01120.60 System Operation - Repair, flush and test all main and lateral lines that sustain a break or disruption of service. Upon restoration of the water service, bring the affected lines up to operating pressure. After pressurizing, conduct a thorough inspection of all sprinkler heads, emitters, and other fittings, located downstream of the break or disruption of service, and repair. This inspection is required to ensure that the entire irrigation system is operating properly. Completely install and test the irrigation system, and make it automatically operable before planting in a unit area except where otherwise shown, specified, or approved. Be fully responsible for all maintenance, repair, testing, inspection and automatic operation of the entire system until all work is complete and approved. This responsibility includes, but is not limited to, draining the system before winter and reactivating the system in the spring and at other times as directed. Be responsible for having annual inspections and tests performed on all cross connection control devices as required by the State Health Division. In the spring, when the drip irrigation system is in full operation, make a full inspection of all emitters. This involves visual inspection of each emitter under operating conditions. Make all adjustments, flushing or replacements to the system at this time to ensure the proper operation of all emitters. 01120.61 Drip Line Warranty - The warranty applies to drip tubing installed under this Section. Provide a written warranty from the manufacturer against defects in manufacturing, rot, electrolytic corrosion, and stress cracking for at least 5 years from the time of installation. Finishing and Cleaning Up 01120.70 As-Built Plans and System Orientation - Upon completion of the work, submit corrected working drawings, schematic circuit diagrams, or other drawings necessary for the Owner’s Authorized Representative to prepare corrected plans showing the work as constructed. Provide drawings of sizes similar to approved construction documents. Prepare and present a training and orientation session covering the operation, adjustment and maintenance of the irrigation system. Review corrected drawings and explain all features. At this session, provide the Owner’s Authorized Representative with parts lists and service manuals for all equipment. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative in writing 2 weeks before the proposed date of the training and orientation session. The date and time of the session will be mutually agreed to. Payment 01120.90 Payment - The accepted quantities of work performed under this Section will paid for at the Contract lump sum amount for the item "Irrigation System".

@"#$%&"'(%&")(**+,&"-.(*/(%,"-" " 0&12($%"3!!43"5"677(,+2($%"0892&:9"

Payment will be payment in full for furnishing and placing all materials, and for furnishing all equipment, labor, and Incidentals necessary to complete the work as specified. No separate or additional payment will be made for excavation, backfill, electrical service and system orientation.

END OF SECTION

Section 01040 - Planting Description 01040.00 Scope - This work consists of planting and associated work as shown or directed. 01040.02 Definitions: Arborist - A specialist in the care and maintenance of trees. Caliper - The diameter of a tree measured at a point 6 inches above the ground. If the measurement is over 4 inches, a new measurement is taken at a point 12 inches above the ground. Certified Arborist - An Arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA). Consulting Arborist - An Arborist registered with the American Society of Consulting Arborists (ASCA). Dripline - The area directly under the branch and leaf canopy of trees and large shrubs. This area typically contains the most important of a plant's roots and is sometimes used as an approximate guide to estimate a root protection zone. Licensed Nursery - Commercial nursery licensed by the Oregon Department of Agriculture to operate as a grower, dealer or agent, or to transport or store nursery stock grown or held for sale. Ornamental Plant - A desirable plant species that is not native, or a plant propagated in such a way that it does not carry genetic characteristics of the species that are native to the area where it is planted. Permanent Wilting Point - The level of soil wetness at which a plant wilts and can no longer recover its sustainable turgidity when placed in a saturated atmosphere for 12 hours. Plant Establishment Period - A period of time that is part of the planting work that ensures satisfactory growth and establishment of plants. Root Protection Zone - A generally circular area around an existing plant to be protected from disturbance or compaction by the use of temporary fencing or other means. The zone as actually staked may exceed the current root area to allow for future growth of the plant. Root Protection Zones will be shown on the plans or staked before construction activities begin. 01040.03 General - Ensure that work meets the following requirements: (a) Existing Vegetation - Do not disturb existing desirable vegetation that is to remain or is designated for protection, unless approved by the Owner prior to construction. (b) Pesticide Applicators License and Chemical Registration – Furnish evidence to the Owner’s Authorized Representative, that each applicator is licensed for the specific class of chemical being applied. Also, furnish evidence that any chemical is registered for the proposed use by the Oregon Department of Agriculture according to ORS Chapters 452, 561, 570, and 634. (c) Weather Conditions - Planting work will not be allowed during the following conditions, unless otherwise approved: • Cold weather - When air or ground temperatures are expected to be below 32 °F. • Hot weather - When air or ground temperatures are expected to be above 88 °F. • Wet weather - When the ground reaches saturation, except as approved when planting wetland plants. • Windy weather - When wind velocity exceeds 25 mph. (d) Work Performed During Unacceptable Conditions - If any work occurs during unacceptable weather conditions, the Contractor may be required to provide the following services at no additional cost to the Owner: (1) Expert Consultation - Consultation with a certified Arborist (for trees) or other expert as approved (for other plants) to determine what plant care measures are required to maintain the plants installed during the unacceptable weather conditions in a healthy and vigorous condition. (2) Replacement - Replacement of all work performed during unacceptable weather conditions. (3) Watering and Maintenance - Watering and maintenance of all plant materials installed during the unacceptable weather conditions and responsibility for all extra costs incurred. 01040.04 Coordination - Coordinate the following elements with the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to construction: (a) Planting Work Plan (PWP) - Within 90 calendar days of award of the Contract, submit a PWP for approval. Include or describe the proposed methods for the following: • Work progress schedule • Material submittals • Contract Growing Plan • Topsoil or Wetland Topsoil approvals • Plant installation and establishment • Weed Control Work Plan (WCWP)

Rachel Stemach
32 9300 - PLANTING
Rachel Stemach
Rachel Stemach
Rachel Stemach

• Emergency contact person, including the name, telephone and pager numbers, and voice mail or email address information The following are included as part of the PWP, but are required only before the related planting work begins: • Soil Fertility Test and Soil Amendment Report • Soil Testing and Soil Bio-amendment Report Proceed according to the approved PWP once written approval is received from the Owner’s Authorized Representative. If any part of the PWP become unworkable at any time during construction, notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative, then submit a revised plan. Do not proceed with the planting work until approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. (b) Notice for Inspections - Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative a minimum of 24 hours prior to each required inspection. (c) Site Conditions - Ensure that the area is properly prepared prior to the start of the planting operation. (d) Utility Locate - Coordinate all existing utility locations with appropriate Agency. (e) Utility Use - Provide required water and electricity for planting and plant establishment at no additional cost to the Owner, unless an approved project source is available. (f) Verification - Verify actual ground dimensions prior to construction. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative of any discrepancies before beginning work. Materials 01040.10 General - Submit a list of Project materials for approval before arranging for procurement of any materials. For materials not approved, submit a list of alternate materials for approval. Materials installed without approval will be subject to removal and replacement with acceptable material at no additional cost to the Owner. Substitute materials may be allowed if proof of equivalent quality, suitable product specifications, manufacturer’s literature and other detailed information is furnished to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 01040.12 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling – Deliver manufactured products in original, unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer’s guaranteed analysis, name, trade name, and conformance with governing regulations and laws. Protect products against damage or dehydration. Remove unacceptable products as soon as possible from the Project site. If required or requested, provide any manufacturer's literature to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 01040.13 Soil Testing - Furnish the following kinds of soil testing and reports: (a) Soil Fertility Test and Soil Amendment Report - Prior to planting, furnish a soil fertility analysis of existing soils performed by a certified testing lab. Prior to planting, adjust soil amendment and fertilizer applications as recommended by the soil amendment report and as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. (1) Sampling - Take 5 samples per hectare of each soil type. Mix the 5 samples into one test sample for each soil type. Furnish soil fertility test results that provide information on available nutrient content and fertility status of the soil. Conduct sampling procedures according to the Oregon State University Extension Service handout EC 628, "How to Take a Soil Sample… and Why". (2) Testing - The test may be performed by any qualified soils testing laboratory. A list of qualified soils testing laboratories is available from the Oregon State University Extension Service. Include testing for levels of acidity (pH), salinity, nitrates, ammonium, phosphates, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and any other tests necessary to determine appropriate fertilization and amendment needs for the type of plants being planted. (3) Soil Amendment Report - Provide a report from the testing laboratory summarizing sampling locations and procedures with printed results, and which makes recommendations for fertilizers and soil amendments to effectively develop productive soil. (b) Testing and Soil Bio-Amendment Report - Have soils tested prior to planting by an approved soil ecology lab. Provide information on soil foodweb structure and function, and include total and active bacterial biomass, total and active fungal biomass, protozoan numbers, nematodes, microarthropods, and mycorrhizal colonization. Adjust the kind and amount of soil conditioners, soil amendments, soil bio- amendments, and fertilizers (if any) as recommended by the soil bio-amendment report, and as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to construction. (1) Sampling - Take 5 samples per acre of each soil type. Mix the 5 samples into one test sample for each soil type. Conduct sampling according to the standard procedures for soil organism assessment as recommended by the soil ecology lab.

(2) Testing - Perform the following soil ecology tests and furnish soil meeting these minimum soil organism biomass requirements: Test Minimum Requirements Percent active bacterial and fungal biomass...............................................between 5% and 25% activity Total bacterial biomass ............................... 6 x 108 per gram of dry soil Total fungal biomass .....................................100 g for grasslands 200 g for shrubs or perennials 300 g for forested areas Protozoa........................................................5000 per gram of soil Beneficial nematodes....................................20 per gram of soil (No root-feeding nematodes) Determine if anaerobic or compacted conditions are present, based on the assessment of total bacterial biomass, percent bacterial activity, and protozoan biomass. If the soil contains biomass numbers lower than these levels, apply amendments and inoculate according to the soil ecology lab recommendations in the soil bio-amendment report. (3) Soil Bio-amendment Report - Provide a report summarizing sampling locations and procedures. Include the soil ecology lab report of the soil organism assessment and the recommendations for: • Inoculation of missing organisms groups to the soil • Amendment with food resources for organism groups with too low of a biomass • Reduction of undesirable groups, or groups with the biomass too high for the optimal growth of the desired plants • Any adjustments to the bio-amendments required for the types of plants being planted 01040.14 Topsoil - Furnish topsoil containing no substance detrimental to the growth of plants and that is free of plants designated by the Oregon Department of Agriculture as Type "A" or Type "B" weeds. Unsuitable topsoil, or topsoil placed by the Contractor without approval in areas to be planted, may be required to be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 20 days before furnishing any type of topsoil, do the following: • Give the Owner’s Authorized Representative notice of intent to use the source • Provide access to the source for Owner’s Authorized Representative inspection • Provide one 20 pound representative soil sample of each topsoil type for testing of particle size range and organic matter by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, unless otherwise specified • Obtain approval of the source before excavation of topsoil begins

(a) Selected Topsoil - Furnish native topsoil from the required excavations, or from other Owner’s Authorized Representative-controlled lands. The Owner’s Authorized Representative will make the final determination of the areas where the most suitable materials exist. Furnish topsoil that is the fertile part of a soil profile commonly referred to as the "A" horizon, typically ranging in depth from 3 inches to 12 inches. Do not take material for topsoil from a depth greater than 12 inches below existing ground, unless approved. Select only sources that are well-drained and, before stripping, have a healthy crop of vegetative growth. Remove and dispose of all heavy grass or other vegetation before taking materials from the source. (b) Imported Topsoil - Furnish imported topsoil from non-Owner’s Authorized Representative controlled lands that, when tested according to AASHTO T 88, conforms to the following limits:

Standard Sieve Analysis

Particle Size Range Percent Retained (by Weight) Larger than 2" 0 2" - 3/4" 0 - 5 3/4" - No. 4 0 - 20 No. 4 or less 0 - 100 Of the fraction passing the No. 4 sieve, excluding organic material, furnish topsoil that conforms to the following limits:

Hydrometer Analysis Particle Size Range Percent (by Weight)

No. 4 - No. 200 5 - 70 (Retained) No. 200 - 2 m 20 - 80 (Retained) Less than 2 m 5 - 30 (Passing) In addition, furnish topsoil that analyzes at least 2% organic matter according to ASTM D 2974. (c) Wetland topsoil - Furnish a native, naturally hydric wetland topsoil consisting of silts, clays, and organic matter in combination that is free from substances detrimental to plant growth, such as noxious weeds, undesirable plant roots, refuse, sticks, or lumps. Provide wetland topsoil that is from a wetland with an existing, well established, healthy growth of the desired wetland plants. Obtain approval of the source before excavation of wetland topsoil begins. Excavate, at a minimum, the top 24 inch depth of existing wetland soils using standard construction equipment. (d) Stormwater Facility Topsoil - Furnish imported topsoil for vegetated stormwater facilities conforming to the following: (1) Standard Blend for Public and Private Facilities - Use this blend for all vegetated stormwater management facilities, except those in the right-of-way where compaction from foot traffic is a concern as specified in Section 01040.14(d)(2) "Infiltration Blend for the Right-of-Way". a. General Composition - The material shall be any blend of loamy soil, sand, and compost that is 30-40% compost (by volume) and meets the other criteria in this specification. b. Analysis Requirements for the Blended Material: 1. Particle Gradation - A particle gradation analysis of the blended material, including compost, shall be conducted in conformance with ASTM C117/C136 (AASHTO T11/T27). The analysis shall include the following sieve sizes: 1 inch, 3/8 inch, #4, #10, #20, #40, #60, #100, #200. The gradation of the blend shall meet the following gradation criteria. Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 # 4 75 -100 # 10 40-100 # 40 15-50 # 100 5-25 # 200 5-15 The blend shall have a Coefficient of Uniformity (D60/D10) equal to or greater than 6 to ensure it is well graded (has a broad range of particle sizes). The coefficient is the ratio of two particle diameters on a grain-size distribution curve; it is the particle diameter at 60% passing divided by the particle diameter at 10% passing. 2. Acidity - The pH (Power of Hydrogen) of the blended material shall be tested and be between 6 to 8. c. General Requirements for the Blended Material: 1. The material shall be loose and friable. 2. It shall be well mixed and homogenous. 3. It shall be free of wood pieces, plastic, and other foreign matter. 4. It shall have no visible free water.

d. Compost - The compost shall be derived from plant material and provided by a member of the US Composting Council Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program. See www.compostingcouncil.org for a list of local providers. The compost shall be the result of the biological degradation and transformation of plant- derived materials under conditions designed to promote aerobic decomposition. The material shall be well composted, free of viable weed seeds, and stable with regard to oxygen consumption and carbon dioxide generation. The compost shall have no visible free water and produce no dust when handled. It shall meet the following criteria, as

reported by the US Composting Council STA Compost Technical Data Sheet provided by the vendor. • 100% of the material must pass through a 1/2 inch screen. • The pH of the material shall be between 6 and 8. • Manufactured inert material (plastic, concrete, ceramics, metal, etc.) shall be less than 1.0% by weight. • The organic matter content shall be between 30 and 70% (dry weight basis). • Soluble salt content shall be less than 6.0 mmhos/cm. • Maturity Indicator shall be greater than 80% for Germination and Vigor. • Stability shall be ‘Stable’ to ‘Very Stable’. • Carbon/Nitrogen (C/N) ratio shall be less than 25:1. • Trace metals test result = “Pass.” e. Submittals - At least 14 working days in advance of construction, submit the following: 1. Documentation for the two analyses described in section 01040.14(d)(1)(b) of this specification (particle gradation with calculated coefficient of uniformity; and pH) shall be performed by an accredited laboratory with certification maintained current. The date of the analyses shall be no more than 90 calendar days prior to the date of the submittal. The report shall include the following information: • Name and address of the laboratory. • Phone contact and e-mail address for the laboratory. • Test data, including the date and name of the test procedure. 2. A compost technical data sheet from the compost vendor. The analysis and report must conform to the sampling and reporting requirements of the US Composting Council Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program. The analysis shall be performed and reported by an approved independent STA program laboratory and be no more than 90 calendar days prior to the date of the submittal. 3. Two 5-gallon buckets of the blended material. 4. A description of the location, equipment, and method proposed to mix the material. f. Stormwater Facility Topsoil Installation - See 01040.43(c). (2) Infiltration Blend for the Right-of-Way - Use this blend for facilities in the right-of-way where compaction from foot traffic is a concern. Approval is required. a. General Composition - The material shall be a mix of sand and compost, blended by volume consisting of 60-70% sand and 30-40% compost (by volume). b. Analysis Requirements - The requirements are the same as those specified in section 01040.14(d)(1)b for the “Standard Blend for Public and Private Facilities.” The single difference is the particle gradation criteria, which are as follows. Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 # 4 60-100 # 10 40-100 # 40 15-50 # 100 5-20 # 200 1-5 c. General Requirements for the Blended Material – See 01040.14(d)(1)c. d. Compost - See 01040.14(d)(1)d. e. Submittals - See 01040.14(d)(1)e. f. Stormwater Facility Topsoil Installation - See 01040.43(e).

01040.15 Soil Conditioners - Soil conditioners are for modifying soil structure and improving soil aeration characteristics, as distinguished from plant foods, mulch, and soil organism amendments. Furnish soil conditioners free of noxious weeds, living plants and rhizomes, and substances detrimental to plant life. Submit a 15 pound sample for approval to the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to construction. Provide soil conditioners that are free of weed seeds, excessive salts, chemicals detrimental to plant growth, and pest organisms. Soil conditioners proposed for use are subject to testing at any time or place the Owner’s Authorized Representative deems appropriate.

Furnish one or more of the following soil conditioners: (a) Mushroom Compost - The used bedding material from commercial\ mushroom production. (b) Composted Yard Debris - Commercially manufactured material, made from dead plant material such as grass clippings, weeds, green and dead dry leaves, garden and vegetable material, and ground branches of trees and shrubs. Furnish a product that is composted under controlled aerobic decomposition, with the internal temperature reaching 135 °F for 15 days, without exceeding 155 °F. Ensure that it contains a maximum of 10% bacteria and 10% fungus. Additional certification may be required in areas having a certification program. (c) Peat Moss - Horticultural grade, natural peat moss in air-dry condition, free from woody substances, in bales or bags labeled for content and volume. Only peat moss used in combination with one of the above composts is acceptable. 01040.16 Soil Amendments - Soil amendments are intended to improve soil nutrition. Furnish soil amendments that are free of materials detrimental to plant life. Furnish manufacturer or supplier quality compliance certification. Ensure that material testing methods meet the requirements of the Oregon Department of Agriculture appropriate to that material. Obtain approval for use before beginning work. Soil amendments may include the following: • Lime • Dolomite Lime • Gypsum • Rock, Diammonia, or other Phosphate • Calcium or Potassium Nitrate • Iron Sulfate

01040.17 Soil Bio-amendments - Soil bio-amendments are intended to increase beneficial soil organism numbers or soil organic nutrient content. Furnish bio-amendment products or materials that are free of substances or lifeforms detrimental to plant life and receive approval prior to use on the Project. Furnish manufacturer or supplier quality compliance certification. Ensure that material testing methods meet the requirements of the Oregon Department of Agriculture appropriate to that material. The following are typical soil bio-amendments that may be identified in the soil bio-amendment report: (a) Bacterial Food Amendments: • Simple sugars such as brown sugar, brown syrups, or molasses • Plant extracts of Yucca or Nettle, usually containing sap of the plant comprised of a combination of simple sugars, proteins, and carbohydrates • Fulvic acids • Yeast, including baker's yeast, brewer's yeast, and champagne yeast • Kelp meal • Rock dust (b) Fungal Food Amendments: • Cellulose • Lignin • Humic acids - brown to dark brown products (black is not acceptable) (c) Protozoa Food Amendments: • Bacteria • Hay infusions - A method of growing protozoa for soil inoculation by using hay in water (d) Nematode Food Resources - Nematodes come as four types: bacterialfeeders, fungal-feeders, root- feeders and predatory nematodes. Predatory nematodes eat other nematodes, while the name of the other groups indicate what organisms they eat. The primary source of material containing a wide diversity of beneficial nematodes is good compost. Provide certification that the compost contains beneficial nematodes and does not contain root-feeding or other detrimental nematodes. (e) Mycorrhizal Inoculates - Commercially produced ectomycorrhizal and endomycorrhizal fungi that improve plant root absorption of soil nutrients. (f) Microbes - Commercially produced product designed to enhance microbiological activity in the soil by the addition of beneficial and essential microbes. Commercial products may also contain vitamins, amino acids, plant growth hormones, micronutrients, and plant stress relievers. (g) Earthworms - Common earthworms that are either "Red Wigglers" or "Night Crawlers" delivered in peat moss or other damp medium. 01040.18 Fertilizer - The soil amendment and bio-amendment reports will recommend fertilizer types and application rates. When identified in the report, furnish commercial fertilizer and the following:

(a) Organic - Organic fertilizer 5-4-3, analyzing 5% nitrogen, 4% available phosphoric acid, and 3% soluble potash. (b) Plant Bags and Tablets - Plant bags or tablets containing 20-10-5, or approved equal, may be used instead of granular fertilizer in pit planting. Furnish plant bags or tablets that are controlled-release with a minimum 1 year release period. 01040.19 Plants: (a) Nomenclature - Botanical identification and nomenclature of plant materials shall be according to the most current edition of "Hortus Third", by Bailey. The Owner’s Authorized Representative may authorize use of other references. Furnish plants that conform to the applicable requirements of the current issue of the "American Standard for Nursery Stock", published by the American Association of Nurserymen. When a conflict exists between this publication and the Specifications, the Specifications will prevail. (b) Quality - Provide plants that are healthy, first-class representatives of their species or variety, free from disease and insect pests, with top growth that is well developed and free of disfiguring knots, sun scalds, bark abrasions, wind or frost injury or any other objectionable features. Furnish plants that are acclimated to the specific project environmental site conditions prior to planting. Furnish plants that posses top growth and root systems typical to their variety. Provide trees with central leaders that have a symmetrical, well-branched, straight trunk. Trees with a damaged or missing leader, multiple leaders or Y crotches will be rejected, as will sheared conifer trees. Protect plants at all times during handling, shipping, storage and planting against such detrimental effects as windburn, extreme weather conditions and drying of roots, root balls and foliage. (c) Certification - Furnish a State inspection certificate and shipping certificate for each load or lot of plant material that includes the following information: • Date of shipment • Name of nursery where grown • Name of plants (Including all names as specified in the Contract) • Number of plants • Grade or classification of plants (Verifying conformance with the Specifications) • Size (Including height, spread, runner length, caliper and other measurements as required) • Identify at least one plant (botanical and common name) within each group of like species • Identify one plant (botanical and common name) within each different size category (d) Inspection - Plants will be subject to inspection by the Owner’s Authorized Representative, at any time and place. The Owner’s Authorized Representative will make no plant material inspection at the source, except as it may elect. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative of each delivery of plants to the Project site no less than 24 hours ahead of delivery. Do no planting until the plants have been inspected and approved for use. Any planting done without prior approval of the plants will be considered in violation of these Specifications. The presence of noxious weeds in the soil accompanying plants or at the nursery source will be cause for rejection of any or all plants from that source. (e) Availability - Furnish a list of nursery sources for all specified plants within 90 calendar days after execution of the Contract. Verify, by this list, that all specified plant material has been located and will be available for use on the Project. (f) Plant Substitution - No substitution of plant materials will be allowed unless written evidence is submitted that a specified plant or material cannot be obtained and has been unobtainable since the execution of the Contract. If a substitution is allowed, it will be by written approval from the Landscape Architect for the nearest acceptable variety, size and grade. Make any request for substitution in writing to the Owner’s Authorized Representative with ample time for approval without delaying the work. (g) Contract Grown Plant Materials - When required by the Special Provisions, include a contract growing agreement between the Contractor and a nursery supplier in order to ensure plant availability or suitability. If a contract growing agreement is part of the Project, submit a Contract Growing Plan that describes plant material size at delivery, growth environment, name and location of nursery, and the source for each plant (native seed, indigenous cuttings, or commercially grown). Submit this required information as part of the PWP.

01040.20 Mulch - Furnish plant bed mulch materials free of noxious weed seeds or plants and which contain no substance detrimental to plant life. Mulches are subject to inspection at any time and place at the discretion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. The following are some types of materials that fall under the category of "mulch", and may be used on projects: (a) Bark Mulch - Ground, shredded or broken particles from the bark of fir, pine or hemlock trees which is free of non-bark debris, harmful bacteria, disease spores, pests and substances toxic to plant growth. Provide mulch that is the standard trade size known as "medium fine mulch". (b) Cinder Mulch - Crushed lava cinders, screened to an approximate size between 3/16 inch to 5/8 inch. Furnish cinders free of fines and other noncinder material. (c) Rock Mulch - Round 3/8" - No. 4 pea gravel or round 2" - 3/8" rock. Provide material that is free of fines and other non-gravel material. Rock colors may vary. (d) Wood Chip Mulch - Mulch that is chipped from cleared site vegetation. Ensure that chipped material is free of any noxious weeds or invasive vegetation. 01040.21 Herbicides - The use of herbicide chemicals will be permitted only upon approval of the Owner. Select and apply chemical herbicides according to all applicable Federal, State and local laws, as well as the Weed Control Plan requirements of the PWP. The following are standard herbicide functional categories: (a) Soil Sterilant - Chemical herbicide that is used to kill all new emergent vegetation, often including seeds or other plant parts. (b) Pre-emergent - Chemical herbicide that is used to stop the germination of seeds before they grow above the soil level. (c) Post-emergent - Chemical herbicide that is used to selectively or nonselectively kill vegetation after germination and emergence above ground. 01040.22 Water- When required by the Special Provisions, furnish the following: (a) Pressure Moisture Stress (PMS) Instrument - A pressure chamber instrument capable of applying up to 40 Bars or 600 psi to a small leaf or shoot in order to determine its water potential. Instrument is to include all accessories necessary to perform a plant moisture stress test. (b) Timed-Release Water - Containerized moisture retention chemical in the form of a solid gel that is delivered in biodegradable cartons. Typical ingredients are 97.85% water, 2% cellulose and 0.15% aluminum sulfate. (c) Moisture Retention Chemicals - Granular chemical that are typically cross-linked potassium based polyacrylate or polyacrylamide copolymers. Provide commercial quality product from the CPL. 01040.23 Miscellaneous Items - Furnish miscellaneous items meeting the following requirements or provide commercial-quality products from the CPL. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to use. (a) Anti-transpirant - Apply liquid anti-transpirant spray to all appropriate deliverable plant materials, prior to transport. (b) Boulders - Furnish boulders of indigenous materials, with source, dimensions, and other characteristics as shown. (c) Browsing Protectors - Flexible, semi-rigid plastic or metal mesh, brown or light green in color, with stake supports. (d) Game Repellent - A commercial nontoxic spray that makes vegetation unpalatable for animal forage. (e) Root Barrier - A root barrier designed to contain and control root intrusion into unwanted areas. (f) Tree Grates - Tree grates complete with frames, all required attachment hardware, and at least one issue of any specialty key or tool that is required to open or move the item for maintenance. (g) Tree Stakes and Ties - Rough sawn tree stakes of 2 1/2 inch diameter Douglas Fir or Pine, construction grade or better. Use stakes 6 foot long for trees less than 8 feet tall, and stakes 10 foot long for trees 8 feet or taller. Provide tree trunk protection of guying material of either a commercially available tree tie or a section of garden hose. Furnish tree guying material of a commercial product manufactured for this use, such as plastic chain, or stainless steel woven-wire with clamp fasteners. Size the guying material appropriate to the size of the tree and the wind factors of the area. (h) Trunk Wrap - Typically manufactured of waterproof, crinkled paper and is designed to protect tree trunks against sunscald, loss of moisture and insect attack. (i) Weed Control Geotextile - Weed control geotextile is typically manufactured of permeable, fibrous synthetic material and is generally for use under material such as mulch or gravel. (j) Woody Course Debris - Logs or root-wads salvaged from on-site deciduous tree clearing and grubbing activity.

Construction 01040.40 General - Planting areas and plant locations shown on the plans are approximate unless shown with dimensions. Be responsible for layout and staking for plant placement, subject to approval by the Owner’s Authorized Representative before planting. The Owner’s Authorized Representative will make only field measurements necessary to calculate and verify quantities for payment. Adjust tree locations to avoid possible conflicts with vehicle recovery clear zones, utilities, structures, miscellaneous appurtenances, and signing, as directed. In mowable grass areas, locate trees at least 10 feet from the edge of plant beds, other trees, fences, and ditch bottoms, unless otherwise specified. 01040.41 Planting Season - Perform all plant installation work from September 1 to May 15, unless otherwise specified. Container-grown material located within irrigated areas may be planted at other times, depending upon written Owner’s Authorized Representative approval. Do not place lawn sod before March 15 or after September 30 without written Owner’s Authorized Representative approval. 01040.43 Topsoil: (a) Excavation - Prevent fouling of suitable material with subsoil or other detrimental matter. Form stockpiled soil into windrows at least 6 feet high, not to exceed 13 feet high, to maintain and preserve soil organism vitality. (b) Subsoil Preparation - Grade and finish areas that are to receive topsoil, allowing for the specified amounts of topsoil. Scarify or till subsoil that is not loose and friable to a depth of 8 inches and obtain approval from the Owner’s Authorized Representative before placing topsoil. (c) Hauling and Spreading - Haul and spread material without compacting the topsoil or areas where it is placed. Protect from damage any surrounding objects, pavement, structures and areas that must be traveled, crossed or mounted by equipment. Smoothly spread the topsoil over the specified areas to the thickness, grades, and slopes shown or directed. Avoid wasting topsoil and do not place material during wet conditions. Do not work saturated soils in any manner. Material placed contrary to Owner’s Authorized Representative instructions or in undesignated places will not be paid for and removal may be required at the discretion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. (d) Finishing and Cleaning Up - Finish areas covered with topsoil to proper grade, contour and cross section. Cultivate all topsoil not in a loose and friable condition to a depth of at least 4 inches. Bring the surface to a condition ready for planting operations. (e) Stormwater Facility Topsoil Installation: (1) Protection of the Topsoil - The material shall be protected from all sources of contamination, including weed seeds, while at the supplier, in conveyance, and at the project site. (2) Placement of the Topsoil - The material shall be placed in loose lifts, not to exceed 8 inches each and each lift shall be compacted with a water-filled landscape roller. The material shall not otherwise be mechanically compacted. (3) Timing of Plant Installation - Weather permitting and as approved, plants shall be installed as soon as possible after placing and grading the topsoil in order to minimize erosion and further compaction. (4) Erosion Control - Temporary erosion control measures are required until permanent stabilization measures are functional. (5) Protection of the Installed Topsoil - In all cases, the installed material must be protected from foot or equipment traffic and surface water runoff. Temporary fencing or walkways should be installed as needed to keep workers, pedestrians, and equipment out of the area. Under no circumstances should materials and equipment be stored on top of the installation area. (6) Wet and Winter Conditions - Placement of the topsoil will not be allowed when the ground is frozen or saturated or when the weather is too wet as determined by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 01040.44 Select Wetland Topsoil: (a) Excavation - Stage construction so that excavated soils may be moved directly to the wetland mitigation location. If that is not possible, stockpile the material for not more than 28 days. Water stockpiled material twice weekly and keep moist until used. Form stockpiled soil into windrows at least 6 feet high, not to exceed 13 feet high, to maintain and preserve soil organism vitality.

(b) Subsoil Preparation - Excavate or grade areas to receive selected wetland topsoil as shown and finish as smooth as practicable through one pass of standard construction equipment. Have subsoil preparation inspected and approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to spreading the selected wetland topsoil. (c) Hauling and Spreading - Transport select wetland topsoil to the site by any means which meets all applicable regulations related to hauling potentially wet or moist materials. Spread the topsoil to a depth of 6 inches minimum to 24 inches maximum, or to meet the finished elevations as indicated. Make as smooth as practicable without excessive soil compaction. After spreading, have the area inspected and approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to planting. 01040.45 Soil Amendments - Incorporate soil amendments into the topsoil when required by the soil fertility test and soil amendment report. The application rate will be verified by checking settings on the spreading or application equipment. 01040.46 Soil Bio-Amendments - Incorporate the following soil bioamendments into the topsoil of areas to be planted, according to the recommendations of the soil bio-amendment report, the supplier, or the following: • Bacterial Food Amendments • Fungal Food Amendments • Protozoa Food Amendments • Nematode Food Amendments • Microbes and Biostimulants • Earthworms - Add 9 worms per cubic yard of topsoil (this roughly equates to 3 worms per surface) 10 square feet of topsoil at 12 inches depth. • Mycorrhizal inoculation - Incorporate into the planting hole quantities of mycorrhizia sufficient to correct the soil for the type of plants or grasses being grown. • Mycorrhizal Inoculation (Injection) - Provide pre-measured packets containing live endo-mycorrhizal and ecto-mycorrhizal fungi. • Mycorrhizal Inoculation (Root Dip) - Apply root dip material containing live endo- and ecto-mycorrhizal fungi. The application rate will be verified by visual inspection of application rates. A one-time application should be adequate, as long as pesticides, fertilizers or other toxic materials are not used at the same time. If it becomes necessary to apply pesticides that have non-target organism effects, or to apply fertilizer at rates greater than 13 pounds per acre, re-inoculate the organisms about one month after the pesticide or fertilizer was applied. 01040.47 Fertilizers - Incorporate fertilizer based upon recommendations of the soil amendment and soil bio-amendment reports or, with Owner’s Authorized Representative approval, at the type and rate as follows:

Plant Bags/Tablets Plant Rate Size

Tree 3 per tree 3/4 ounce Shrub 2 per shrub 3/4 ounce

Vine/Ground Cvr 1 per plant 3/16 ounce

Granular Fertilizer Rate 1 pound per tree per application

1/2 pound per shrub per application 1/8 pound per vine/ground cover per application

Evenly space planting bags or tablets around plants after planting pits are 2/3 filled with backfill. Mix granular fertilizer into the upper 1/2 of plant backfill. The application rate will be verified by visual inspection. Furnish manufacturer or supplier quality compliance certification. Ensure that material testing methods meet the requirements of the Oregon Department of Agriculture appropriate to that material. Do not allow the fertilizer application to conflict with the soil bio-amendments. In case of questions, provide the soil bio-amendment supplier's written recommendations to the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 01040.48 Planting Area Preparation - All planting areas are to be Weed Free before planting or seeding operations begin. Identify, kill, and remove weed plants.

Prepare planting areas according to the following methods, or as otherwise specified: (a) Method "A" (Cultivated Planting Areas, Non-lawn) - Cultivate plant beds to a depth of 2 inches. Thoroughly mix 2 inches of soil conditioners into the top 12 inches of plant beds. In addition, add soil amendments, soil bioamendments and fertilizers, as specified, according to the soil amendment and soil bio- amendment report’s recommendations, into the top 12 inches of topsoil. Finish grades by raking to a grade tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch, with a smooth and firm condition, and an even grade that is free of undulations or low areas that could create standing water. Match existing grades at the perimeter. Finish to the proposed grades shown or specified. On slopes that the Owner’s Authorized Representative determines are too steep to cultivate, plants may be planted in individual planting holes prepared using method "B". (b) Method "B" (Non-Cultivated Planting Areas) - Spray existing weeds and non-desirable vegetation with herbicide to kill all top growth and roots in areas not requiring cultivation. Use herbicides that have limited residual toxicity to permit planting as required under the Contract. Do not spray or otherwise harm plants to be saved. After inspection and approval, remove the dead top growth of plant material within 2 inches of the surface and dispose of appropriately. Replace plants to be saved that are damaged by herbicide application at no additional cost to the Owner. Add any soil conditioners, soil amendments, soil bio-amendments or fertilizers with the backfill at each plant pit or to the seeding operation. Finish wetland mitigation planting areas to specified finish elevations, blending to existing ground smoothly, as required and directed. Except for projects that are less than one year in duration and unless otherwise approved, review the seasonal hydrology of the area to be planted for one full winter season (November 15 to February 28) prior to planting any wetland plants. Adjust plant types and planting locations as required or directed, based on the review of site hydrology. When planting seedling plants, completely scalp vegetation from a 12 inch diameter area around each planting hole. Clear all debris such as wood and rocks from the planting spots, provided debris is not deeper than 12 inches. When debris is deeper, move the planting location. Use herbicides around seedlings only upon written approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. (c) Method "C" (Sod Lawn and Seeded Lawn Areas) - Cultivate existing ground to a depth of 6 inches, achieving a loose and friable condition suitable for fine grading. Remove all vegetation, rocks larger than 2 inch diameter, clods, roots, sticks, debris, and other matter detrimental to the growth of sod. Uniformly spread soil conditioners, soil amendments, soil bio-amendments, and fertilizer evenly over the area and thoroughly rototill into the soil to a depth of 4 inches. Apply at rates recommended by soil testing, or as follows:

Material Rate (per 100 square yards) Soil conditioner 1/2 cubic yard Fertilizer 10 pounds Lime (Western Oregon Only) 40 pounds

Fine-grade and roll planting areas with a water-filled roller to provide a fine-textured, smooth, firm surface, free of undulations, irregularities or low areas that could create standing water. Grade areas receiving sod to within 1/2 inch of the designed grades, and 1 inch below adjacent walks, curbs and pavement. Since sod thickness varies, adjust initial grades so the final sod soil level is slightly below adjacent hard surface grades. Ensure that final sod grade does not create a pedestrian tripping hazard. Furnish the Owner’s Authorized Representative with sod mixture information and a quality compliance certificate from the sod grower, certifying sod compliance with mixture requirements. Prior to completion of any sodding and seeding, re-grade ruts, footprints, washouts, or any other irregularities, and re-seed or re-sod repaired areas as originally specified. (d) Method "D" (Rough Areas Seeded for Revegetation or Erosion Control) - Remove any matter detrimental or toxic to the growth of plants, including weeds, clods, rocks or debris. On slopes 1V:3H or flatter, remove all debris larger than 2 inches in any dimension. On cut slopes 1V:1.5H or flatter, roughen the surface with furrows parallel with slope contours and loosen the soil to a depth between 3 inches and 6 inches.

(e) Method "E" (Temporary Seeding Areas) - If grading is required or directed, make equipment passes at right angles to the slope in order to form seed-holding tracks in the soil. 01040.49 General Planting - Plant trees, shrubs, groundcover, vines, and bulbs using the following practices: • Inspect plants after arrival at the Project and before planting. Do not install plant materials until each required inspection by the Owner’s Authorized Representative is complete. Replace plants not meeting the requirement of the Specifications with plants as specified or otherwise directed, at no additional cost to the Owner. Initial approval of plant materials for planting by the Owner’s Authorized Representative will not constitute final acceptance. • Protect all plants during shipping, handling, storage, and planting from windburn or exposure to harmful weather conditions, and root or root ball drying. • When excavating planting holes, stockpile excavated topsoil separately from subsoil. Do not include alkali soil, subsoil, gravel, debris or rocks in the topsoil. Dispose of any substandard excavated materials in a manner not harmful to plants or planting work. Scarify planting pit sides and bottoms to eliminate glazed surfaces. Dispose of excess soil in a manner that is not harmful to plants or planting work. • Do not plant in standing water unless approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. If standing water is present within a plant pit, notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to planting to determine what corrective measures are required. Perform corrective measures on an Extra Work basis. • Excavate tree plant pits a minimum of twice the diameter of the plant root ball or 2 feet greater than the ball, whichever is larger. Dig shrub plant pits a minimum of one foot greater than diameter of root ball. Dig pits to the same depth as the root ball, root mass or container. Spread root systems of bare root plants and plant stock as necessary to keep plants from being root bound. • Cleanly cut off broken or frayed roots of bare-root plants before planting. Spread out roots in their natural position within the pit and trim only damaged roots as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Remove all labels, tags and attachment materials from the plants before final inspection. • Set upright growing plants straight and plumb, and prostrate growing plants level to the ground surface. Set all plants so that, after settlement, they are at the same level as when growing in the nursery or container. • Place the backfill then add soil amendments, soil bio-amendments, and fertilizers as recommended by the soil amendment and bioamendment reports. Moisten backfill completely after placing to eliminate air pockets and minimize settlement of the backfill. Form a shallow 2 inch high water-holding saucer in the soil around the plant unless directed otherwise. • Balled and burlapped plants may be placed with the root ball wrapping removed or, if all materials are untreated and fully biodegradable, left in place. If the root ball wrapping (burlap) is left around the plant, completely remove all tie wire, string or twine and fold down the burlap from the top half of the root ball. • Perform any required pruning using good horticultural practice appropriate to the type of plant. Prune to remove all dead, damaged, crossed or rubbing twigs and branches, and to compensate for loss of roots during planting. Make cuts close to the parent stem, but not flush or through the bark "knob" at the branch joint. Do not prune terminal ends of tree leaders without approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. • Apply bark or wood chip mulch of the type and depth as shown. Correct any contamination of new mulch due to the Contractor’s operations at no additional cost to the Owner. Feather mulch into plant material trunks, stems, canes or root collars, and leave 1 inch below the top of junction and valve boxes, curbs and pavement edges. Any mulch placed to a thickness greater than specified will be at no additional cost to the Owner. • Do not disturb protected existing vegetation unless approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to construction. • Dig pits of street streets that have hard surfaces around them so the crown of the rootball will be 3 inches below the finish surface of the surrounding grade. • Water deciduous trees 1 1/2 inches or larger, conifer trees over 4 feet in height, and all shrubs at a minimum frequency identified in the Special Provisions. 01040.50 Special Planting Requirements: (a) Transplanted Specimen Plants - Use the following methods for transplanting specimen plants, unless otherwise specified: (1) Mechanical Digging - Use a "Vermeer" type of tree spade or approved equal. Move only during the season that the tree is dormant. Treat deciduous plants with anti-transpirant prior to excavation. Confirm with the Owner’s Authorized Representative that the size of the spade is appropriate to the size and type of tree prior to beginning work. Dig the receiving hole prior to digging the tree to be transplanted. Take care not to damage the tree bark. Refill the original hole after transplanting. (2) Hand Digging - Before digging, obtain approval from the Owner’s Authorized Representative for the size of container or root ball to be used for each plant. Begin digging at a diameter greater than the expected size of the root ball and remove dirt toward the plant until the surface roots show.

When completely dug, secure the root ball with burlap and twine, wire basket or in a wooden box. Take special care to dig deep enough so that the taproot is not cut until it is smaller than 3/8 inch. Take care not to damage the tree bark. Refill the original hole and compact the soil after transplanting. Add fertilizer, soil amendments or bio-amendments to backfill topsoil mixture. Stake or guy the tree as specified. Provide one application of anti-transpirant before transplanting, and one application of Vitamin B1 growth hormone after planting to each specimen plant according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Perform all replanting of specimen plants according to 01040.41 and 01040.42. (b) Staking and Guying Trees - Stake and guy planted trees as shown or directed. (c) Seedling Trees - Plant seedling trees using one of the following three methods: • Planting hoe capable of opening a vertical hole broken out on 3 sides, with a minimum blade length of 12 inches and width of 3 inches • Planting shovel capable of opening a vertical hole broken out on 3 sides and at least 10 inches deep • Normal bare-root planting method No pre-staking of planting locations will be required. The Owner’s Authorized Representative will be present as planting begins and will approve the spacing, planting method, and areas to be planted before work can begin. Vary plant spacing in order to allow seedlings to be planted in suitable soil. During the planting process, remove one tree at a time from the planting bag or other container to prevent drying of roots. Place the roots of each seedling in the ground so that they assume a natural arrangement and do not twist, angle, bunch together or turn up at the ends. Plant seedlings so that the root collar is at or above the ground plane by no more than 1/2 inch. During planting, tamp soil around the roots in the lower half of the hole. Then fill the hole to the surrounding soil level and firmly pack so that no air pockets remain around the roots. Ensure that seedlings do not pull loose with a tug strong enough to detach a small group of needles or small branch ends as applicable. Place a stake at the edge of each planting pit and install browsing protection and browsing repellant. (d) Tubeling Plants - Place the tubeling into the planting pit without breaking the root mass. Set the top of the root collar 1/2 inch above finish grade, and gently tamp soil around the plant to compact the backfill. Place a stake at the edge of the plant pit and attach a browsing protector around each plant. (e) Collected Plants - After plants become dormant, excavate collected plants by hand, protecting the root mass against drying, freezing or breaking. If possible, plant all collected stock the same day as gathered, or transport to a local nursery for temporary storage until final planting. If immediate planting is not possible, place collected plants in heavy paper or plastic with slightly damp peat moss or sterile potting soil. Store dormant plants at 32 °F to 37 °F until planting. Examine stored material frequently for signs of stress or disease and correct storage conditions as necessary. Plant collected plants before dormant bud development. (f) Bulbs - Plant dormant bulbs at a depth of 1 inch to 2 inches or to the grade they grew naturally. Compact the soil firmly around the bulbs to prevent float-out and ensure good establishment. Dig holes large enough to naturally space bulbs within the planting area. (g) Plant Cuttings - Collect and plant the cuttings while in winter dormancy, generally between October and March. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative if conflicts exist with permit requirements. Store all cut material in ventilated plastic containers that allow free flow of water. Protect root systems from excessive drying at all times. Do not store plants in airtight containers. Plant stock within 4 hours of harvest. If plants are a willow species, plant in the riparian zone on that portion of the slope where the plant stem ends will be in contact with year-round moist soil. Make planting holes by forcing a steel bar or similar tool into the ground about 12 inches deep. Place the cuttings into the holes and tamp soil firmly around the stems, leaving a minimum of 6 inches showing. Vary these dimensions as required for larger plant cuttings. 01040.51 Planting Wetland Plants - When planting wetland plants, do not use soil amendments, mulch, or fertilizer. Plant rhizomes, tubers and plugs within the upper 2 inches to 3 inches in exposed muddy or moist soils. When the water depth reaches or exceeds 1 inch notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative of the potential need for adjustment to the planting.

01040.52 Placing Sod Lawn - Place sod only after approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Immediately before placing sod, water the soil bed to prevent drying of grass roots. Lay the first sod row in a straight line, then place subsequent rows parallel to and tightly against each other, staggering lateral joints. Do not stretch or overlap the sod. Tightly butt all joints. Do not use sod segments containing less than 2 square feet of surface area. After placement, diagonally roll and thoroughly water the sod. Apply a second application of fertilizer (22-16-8) at the rate of 10 pounds per 100 square yards and thoroughly water. 01040.53 Mulch - Apply mulch according to the following: (a) Ornamental Plant Bed Areas - Submit a 15 pound sample of bark mulch to the Owner’s Authorized Representative for visual inspection and approval. The approved sample will be the standard of acceptability for all mulch used on the Project. Apply bark mulch after beds are made free of weeds and debris, the surface is brought to a smooth finished grade, and all planting work, except for vines and groundcovers, is complete. Uniformly bark mulch planted areas to a nominal depth of 2.5 inches with bark mulch. Apply bark mulch so that it presents a smooth and even appearance as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Raking may be required. Keep bark mulch off plants, structures, roadways, shoulders, walks, and lawns. Uncover all plants covered by mulch material as soon as possible and leave the site in a neat, clean and finished appearance. When planting vines or groundcover, rake bark mulch away from planting pits so that the bark is not contaminated. After planting, evenly spread excess soil and rake bark mulch back into place. Replace bark mulch that is displaced or blown away, and correct to the specified depth any bark mulch placed to a greater than specified depth, at no additional cost to the Owner. Spread rock or cinder mulch to a depth of 2 inches after planting trees and shrubs. 01040.54 Water - Water all plants at intervals as required to maintain and promote healthy growth. Avoid excessive watering of shrub bed areas that may leach herbicide and damage adjacent lawns or desirable or protected vegetation. Repair all lawn vegetation damage at no additional cost to the Owner. (a) Pressure Moisture Stress Sensor - When a pressure moisture stress sensor is specified, the Owner’s Authorized Representative will test a 1% to 5% representative sample to ensure that the moisture stress level is below 20 bars of pressure and inform the Contractor if any material exceeds this limit. Any plant material found to have greater than 25 bars of pressure will be considered to be under extreme moisture stress. Provide sufficient water within 24 hours to bring the plant into normal range. The Owner’s Authorized Representative will retest to determine the new representative pressure. Plant material that have 30 bars or greater will be considered to have reached its permanent wilting point. Replace all such material during the next planting period. Testing will occur at mid-day at the following times until the end of the establishment period(s): • After plant delivery, during temporary storage, and before planting • At 1 month intervals throughout the summer season, up to the first fall rain or snow • At weekly intervals during extremely hot or dry summer periods • Any time the Owner’s Authorized Representative believes the plant material may be under stress (b) Timed-Release Water - Apply timed-release water containers when specified. Cut the bottom from the carton, dig a hole next to the plant and place so the contents touches the root ball or root area approximately 4 inches beneath finish grade, or according to the manufacturer’s directions. Fill soil back around the carton to hold it firmly in place. Apply 1 carton for seedlings and tubelings, 2 cartons for No. 1 containers, and 4 cartons for larger plant material. Water deciduous trees 1 1/2 inches or larger and conifer trees over 4 feet in height as follows: Time Frequency Gallons/Tree (Minimum) May – June weekly 15 July – August weekly 20 September – October weekly 15 Water shrubs as follows: Time Frequency Gallons/Shrub May – June weekly 5 - 10

July – August weekly 15 - 20 September – October weekly 10 – 15

(c) Moisture Retention Chemicals - Utilize moisture retention chemicals according to the manufacturer's recommendation, depending upon specific application. 01040.55 Miscellaneous Items – When shown in details, or called out on plans, place or install miscellaneous items as follows: (a) Boulders - Place boulders in locations as shown. Do not scar or break boulders with equipment. Ensure that 1/3 to 1/2 of each rock is buried beneath finish grade. Verify all rock placement with the Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to installation. (b) Tree Grates - Install grates, frames, and appurtenances as shown and according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Place frames flush at sidewalks and place guards plumb according to the manufactures recommendations. (c) Weed Control Geotextile – Place weed control geotextile at finish soil grade when planting is complete but before mulch placement begins. Place weed control geotextile with a minimum 4 inch overlap between rolls, turned under edges, and attached to the ground as recommended by the manufacturer. (d) Woody Course Debris - Place woody course debris within the stream channel, facing upstream at approximately 45° from the stream bank, or as shown or as directed. Anchor woody course debris to the stream channel bottom as shown. (e) Anti-transpirant - Apply anti-transpirant according to the manufacturer's directions to all exposed foliage surfaces immediately before materials are delivered to the Project, or as otherwise specified. Provide certification of compliance. (f) Game Repellent - Apply a game repellent to all exposed foliage surfaces immediately after materials are planted, or as otherwise specified. Re-apply to each plant every 120 days, or according to the manufacturer's printed instructions, until the end of the plant establishment period. (g) Browsing Protectors - Install browsing protectors according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. (h) Root Barrier - Install root barrier according to the manufacturer’s recommendation. (i) Tree Stakes and Ties - Place tree stakes parallel with the prevailing winds and drive vertically into the ground at least 12 inches below the planting hole depth, or as shown. Do not drive stakes through the rootball. (j) Trunk Wraps - Wrap tree trunks with the specified wrap, covering all exposed trunk between finish ground and the first whorl of tree branches. 01040.56 Cleanup During Construction - Maintain the Project in a neat, orderly condition. Remove unsightly construction materials at the end of each working shift. Clean all pavement surfaces of mud, debris, or other materials that may, in the opinion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, cause problems. If material is not removed, the Owner’s Authorized Representative reserves the right to have the cleanup work performed and deduct the value of this work from the monies otherwise due the Contractor. Plant Establishment 01040.70 General - The Contractor is responsible for the survival of all plant material until the end of a plant establishment period of 1 calendar year. The plant establishment period work will begin when all the original planting is completed. The original planting is considered complete when all the plant material has been planted to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Establishment period work includes removing all plants that have reached their permanent wilting point, are dead, dying, or which do not meet Specifications, and replacing them with healthy plants. All plants in place after this replacement will be recognized as the "original planting" and will be subject to the establishment specifications. Repair, restore, and replace all plantings that have been damaged by vehicles, or vandalized and stolen. 01040.71 Plant Care and Success Criteria - During establishment, maintain plants in a vigorous growing condition by regularly: • Watering, and fertilizing sufficiently to promote growth • Weeding, cultivating, pruning, and repairing • Adjusting tree stakes and guys • Controlling weeds before they seed • Controlling pests and noxious weeds before the reproductive cycle • Removing dead or non-vigorous plants • Replacing missing plants • Re-mulching of plant bed areas

The determination of a successful plant establishment period will be made at periodic plant establishment inspections. A successful planting establishment for each inspection is defined as follows: • All plants are surviving and have vigorous growth. • Plants are free of insects and disease. • Plants show signs of continuing health. • Plants have not reached permanent wilting point.

At the discretion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, certain types of regularly spaced plantings such as groundcovers may be measured using an area sampling method. To determine the rate of survival, set out (delineate) representative plots measuring 100 square feet at the completion of the original planting at random locations in each general planting area. The representative plots will be mutually agreed upon between the Contractor and the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Mark the plot corners with permanent markers such as re-bar, including date and identification. Delineate a minimum of 3 plots per acre of new planting area. The use of representative plots is intended to simplify the measurement of planting establishment work. If work within the representative plots does not accurately reflect the condition of the entire planting area(s), the Owner’s Authorized Representative reserves the right to reject all establishment work. 01040.72 Periodic Inspections - During each establishment period, the Owner’s Authorized Representative will make three inspections jointly with the Contractor at the following times: • Spring, early May • Summer, mid July • Fall, late September Depending on when the establishment period begins, one of the above inspections will be the final inspection. During each plant establishment inspection, the Owner’s Authorized Representative may determine, based upon the specified success criteria, that supplemental corrective work is required. If so, the Owner’s Authorized Representative will provide the Contractor with a written notice of required corrective work sent by hand-delivery or mail. 01040.73 Corrective Work - Complete all corrective work within 15 calendar days after written notification is received by the Contractor, except for such work as plant replacement during the appropriate planting season, unless otherwise specified. The 15 day requirement excludes those days the Owner’s Authorized Representative determines to be impractical for working. When the corrective work has been re-inspected and is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, the appropriate proportional payment due the Contractor will be made. The Contractor will be allowed to replace plants outside the Planting Season to perform corrective work after each periodic inspection Provide plant replacements of the same variety, size and quality as specified for the original plants, unless otherwise approved. Notify the Owner’s Authorized Representative when the corrective work complete. When the corrective work has been re-inspected and is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Authorized Representative, the appropriate partial payment due the Contractor will be made. If the Contractor does not perform the corrective work within the 15 day period after written notification, excluding those days the Owner’s Authorized Representative determines to be impractical for working, the Owner’s Authorized Representative may have the corrective work done by others and deduct the entire cost of the corrective work from monies due or to become due the Contractor under the Contract. 01040.75 Weed Control - Remove and prevent regrowth of weeds, weed plant parts, and weed seeds from areas within the Project limits. Do not harm or disturb existing native or ornamental vegetation, unless directed to do so. Do not compact soil with heavy equipment in areas where soil will not be disturbed for roadway or other construction. If a pesticide has been approved for use, apply according to Federal and State laws, including conditions and requirements of the Federally registered pesticide label. (a) Weed Control Work Plan - Depending on project conditions such as location, sensitive environments, permit requirements, jurisdictional regulations, or other items, there may be limits on the use of chemicals or other weed control methods. Before submitting the initial WCWP, determine if there are restrictions or all

potential for restrictions on weed control methods on project sites. At the preconstruction conference, submit a WCWP with the following: • Name and contact information for the approved weed control coordinator. • WMAs with existing Specified Weeds mapped on project plan sheets where possible. • Botanical and common name of each species of weed to be removed. • The proposed methods of weed removal and continuing control for each weed species listed. • Schedule of weed control measures. • Request to use wheeled or tracked construction equipment in sensitive areas. If changes of the WCWP are necessary, resubmit a revised WCWP for approval before proceeding. (b) Weed Control Inspections - Inspect the project for new growth of specified weeds at least monthly and apply weed control measures as appropriate. This requirement may be waived by the Owner’s Authorized Representative during the period that weeds are fully dormant. To ensure satisfactory weed removal, the last WMA inspection will occur at least 30 days after growing season has begun or as directed. At a minimum, schedule weed control inspection with the Owner’s Authorized Representative at the following times: • After approval of WCWP and prior to beginning weed control within a WMA. • Monthly. • Upon request by the Owner’s Authorized Representative to discuss non-compliant weed control work. • After completing weed control at material sources and disposal sites. (c) Remove and Control of Weeds - Remove and control weeds according to the following: (1) All areas: • At least 3 calendar days prior to beginning weed control activities, walk through each WMA with the Owner’s Authorized Representative and confirm the identity, location, type, and approximate number of Specified Weeds. Verify that control methods in the WCWP are acceptable as planned for each WMA before proceeding with weed control activities. • Remove Specified Weeds and receive approval prior to beginning construction or equipment mobilization in that area. As much as practicable, ensure that weed seeds or reproducing plant parts such as vines, runners, or rhizomes don’t remain or become dispersed during control activities. • As soon as practicable, place weeds and related materials in an approved container and transport to an approved offsite disposal facility according to applicable laws and regulations. During transport, ensure that materials are fully enclosed at all times to prevent escape. • Keep a record of all weed material loads transported off the Project and submit documentation from the approved disposal facilities that a corresponding number of weed material loads were disposed of at that facility. • Keep WMAs Weed Free including weeds not initially present in the walk through. (2) Sensitive Areas: • Unless otherwise approved in writing, use only hand or light mechanical weed control methods within 50 feet of Sensitive Areas. Hand methods include the use of hand tools. Light mechanical methods include the use of hand carried, motorized machinery. • Inside Sensitive Areas, obtain approval before using wheeled or tracked construction equipment. Requests will be approved only when all vegetation in the area will be cleared, such as under new roadways or slopes. • The Owner’s Authorized Representative, or Landscape Architect, will be the authority in the determination of Sensitive Areas. (d) Weed Control Corrective Work - If corrective work for areas identified as deficient by the Owner’s Authorized Representative is not completed within a 15 calendar day period, the Owner’s Authorized Representative may suspend the work. If the Contactor’s weed control work is determined to be unsatisfactory, the Owner’s Authorized Representative reserves the right to do the work at the Contractor’s expense. 01040.77 Plant Establishment (Ornamental Areas) - In addition to these plant establishment requirements, perform the following: (a) Watering, Fertilizing, and Mulching - Water all plants at the required intervals using the installed permanent or temporary irrigation systems, or such means as has been established for the Project. Avoid excessive watering of shrub areas adjacent to lawns that may leach herbicide and damage the lawn. Repair damaged lawns at no additional cost to the Owner.

If specified for the original planting, re-fertilize plants to promote vigorous growth. Maintain the plant bed mulch at a 2.5 inch depth during establishment. Rake to a smooth and even finish grade. Remove all timed-release water cartons that have not bio-degraded by the end of the establishment period. Water all plants during establishment as shown in 01040.54. (b) Trimming and Pruning - Prune in order to enhance the natural growth of plants, eliminate dead growth and crossing branches, maintain growth within available space, minimize overgrowth onto walks and walls, and minimize tree canopy damage from winds. Do not hedge any plant material. Prune during the dormant season unless otherwise specified. Remove and dispose of all dead and critically damaged plant material to maintain the overall appearance of the Project. (c) Transplanted Specimen Plants - Care for transplanted specimen plants immediately after the planting work is completed. Water, fertilize, and protect specimen plants against disease and infestation as required to ensure the plants remain healthy and vigorous. Final acceptance of transplanted specimen plants will depend on plant health and condition. (d) Seeded Lawn and Sod - Mow, cut and fertilize turf as required to maintain a healthy and vigorous condition. Provide the Owner with a schedule of feeding, mowing, and general treatment, including thatching and aeration. Final acceptance of sod lawn areas may be 45 days, depending on its health and condition. Keep sod mowed to a height between 1 1/2 to 2 inches. Do not perform the first mowing until the sod is firmly rooted and secure in place. Remove no more than 1/3 of the grass leaf during initial or subsequent cuttings. 01040.78 Plant Establishment (Mitigation or Other Non-Ornamental Areas): (a) Watering and Mulching - Water all plants as necessary to promote and maintain growth using temporary irrigation methods. Keep planted areas raked to a smooth and even finish grade. Maintain mulch within plant saucers at a 2 inch depth, unless otherwise specified. (b) Weeding - Perform weed control activities according to 01040.75. (c) Soil Testing and Corrective Soil Amendments - If specified for the original planting, have a soil test performed by a soil ecology lab between the second and third periodic inspection. Present the recommendations to the Owner’s Authorized Representative at the third inspection. Apply the amendments as recommended by the soil test report and as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. 01040.79 Final Inspection - After plant replacement work and any other required work has been completed, the Owner’s Authorized Representative will make a final inspection. Ensure that all plant materials, planting beds and other facilities are according to the Specifications as a prerequisite for acceptance. Measurement 01040.80 Measurement - The quantities of plantings and associated work performed under this Section will be measured according to the following: (a) Soil Testing - Soil testing will be measured on the unit basis for each test that is completed and accepted. Soil testing includes the required sampling, testing, analyses, and reports for one or more of the following: • Soil particle size range test • Soil fertility test and soil amendment report (including chemical analysis, acidity, salinity) • Soil ecology analysis and soil bio-amendment report (b) Topsoil and Wetland Topsoil - Topsoil and wetland topsoil will be measured on the volume basis in the hauling vehicle or in containers delivered to the Project site. Topsoil taken from the required excavations according to 00330.10 will be measured according to 00330.82. (c) Soil Conditioners - Soil conditioners will be measured on the volume basis in the hauling vehicle or in containers delivered to the Project site. (d) Plant Materials - Plant materials will be measured according to one of the following: • Unit Basis - Under this method, plant materials will be measured on a unit basis.

• Average Area Method - This method may be used when a plant bed area is greater than or equal to 3,000 square yards and will be measured as follows: • The total plant bed area will be measured along the ground surface by the foot and calculated to the nearest square yard and will be measured as follows: • 1% to 5% of the plant bed area will be selected and staked as 30 square yard representative plots • All the plants in each staked representative plot will be counted. Unless otherwise approved, if the number of plants in a plot exceeds the number of required plants of the representative plot, the number of required plants will be used to represent the plot. • Based on the results of the plant count, the average number of plants per plot will be calculated • The quantities of each item will be based on the calculated average number of plants per plot multiplied by the number of plots in the total plant bed area. (e) Sod Lawn - Sod lawn will be measured on an area basis on the ground surface and calculated to the nearest square yard. (f) Mulches - Mulch will be measured on the volume basis in the hauling vehicle. (g) Miscellaneous - Miscellaneous items will be measured as follows: • Tree Grates - Tree grates will be measured on a unit basis. One grate includes two half grates, frame, hardware, tree guards and appurtenances. • Woody Course Debris - Woody course debris will be measure on a unit basis. • Boulders - Boulders will be measured on a unit basis on the weight basis. • Root Barrier - Root barrier will be measured on the length basis. • Weed Control Geotextile - Weed control geotextile will be measured on the area basis on the ground surface and calculated to the nearest square foot. If not listed in the Schedule of Items, these items are considered Incidental to planting and no separate measurement will be made. Payment 01040.90 Payment - The accepted qualities of plantings and associated work performed under this Section will be paid for according to the following: (a) Soil Testing - Soil tests will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per each, for the item "Soil Testing". Payment includes mobilization, soil sampling, testing, analyses, and preparation of the soil amendment and bio-amendment reports. (b) Topsoil and Wetland Topsoil - Topsoil not taken from required excavations, will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per cubic yard, for the item "Topsoil". Wetland topsoil, taken from either the Project excavations or imported from other sites, will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per cubic yard, for the item "Wetland Topsoil". No payment will be made for topsoil or wetland topsoil that is placed in non-designated areas or which is contrary to the Owner’s Authorized Representative's instructions. (c) Soil Conditioners - Soil conditioners will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per cubic yard, for the item "Soil Conditioner". (d) Plant Materials - Plants will be paid for at the Contract unit price per each, for the appropriate items listed in the Schedule of Items. Plant materials will be listed by caliper size, size of container, or other size, or condition shown. Transplanted plants will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per each, for the item "Transplanted Specimen Plants". Partial payments for plant materials will be made as follows: At the time of the original planting.....................................................30% After the first plant establishment inspection.....................................10% After the second plant establishment inspection...............................10% After the third plant establishment inspection ...................................10% At completion of the establishment period ........................................40%

Partial payments made throughout the establishment period will be made for all surviving and replaced plants. Upon completion of the establishment period, full payment will be made for all surviving and replaced plants, except for corrective work performed. The Owner’s Authorized Representative will pay the Contract unit price only once for the specified quantity, whether or not plants are replaced. Contractor may request partial payment for plant materials on hand. (e) Sod Lawn - The accepted quantities of sod lawn will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per square yard, for the item "Sod Lawn". (f) Mulch - The accepted quantities of mulch will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per unit of measurement, for the following items: Pay Item Unit of Measurement (a) Bark Mulch ....................................................... Cubic Yard (b) Cinder Mulch .................................................... Cubic Yard (c) Wood Chip Mulch ............................................. Cubic Yard (d) Grass Straw Mulch ........................................... Cubic Yard (e) Rock Mulch.............................................................Ton (g) Miscellaneous - The accepted quantities of miscellaneous items will be paid for at the Contract unit price, per unit of measurement, for the following items: Pay Item Unit of Measurement (a) Tree Grates ...........................................................Each (b) Woody Course Debris ...........................................Each (c) Boulders ................................................................Each or Ton (d) Root Barrier ...........................................................Foot (e) Weed Control Geotextile .......................................Square Foot Payment will be payment in full for furnishing and placing the materials, and for furnishing all equipment, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete the work as specified. No separate or additional payment will be paid for: • soil amendments • lime, gypsum, or trace minerals • soil bio-amendments • fertilizer • herbicides • anti-transpirants • game repellant • browsing protectors • pesticides • trunk wraps • tree stakes and ties • water

• timed-released water

• pressure moisture stress sensors

• mulch materials required as part of replacement planting • corrective work during the plant establishment period

END OF SECTION


Recommended